Hide eeerets 


Library of the 
Church Divinity School 
of the Pacific 


No. Class _ 


Ex Dono Reve F's C. Grant Library, 
IDYtia 1961 


AV oHOR PesyNITAX 
OF 
NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


By the same author 


THE ELEMENTS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
A Method of studying the Greek New Testament with 
exercises. Second edition. 


Crown 8vo. 55. net. 
KEY TO THE ELEMENTS OF NEW TESTAMENT 


GREEK 


Crown 8vo. 3s. net. 


CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS 


A SHORT SYNTAX 
OF 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


by 
Rev. H. P. V. NUNN, M.A. 


St John’s College, Cambridge, sometime lecturer at 
St Aidan’s College, Birkenhead 


LIBRARY 


Cambridge 
at the University Press 
1924 


CAMBRIDGE 


UNIVERSITY PRESS 
LONDON: Fetter Lane 


New Yore 
The Macmillan Co. 


Bompay, Catcutra and 
Mapras 


Macmillan and Co., Ltd. 


‘TORONTO 


The Macmillan Co. of 
Canada, Ltd. 


Toxro 
Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha 


All rights reserved 


First Edition, 1912. 
Second Edition, 1913. 
Third Edition, 1920. 
Fourth Edition, 1924, 


PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN 


PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION 


| awe book is not intended to be a complete syntax of New 
Testament Greek ; its aim is to present the main features of that 
subject for the benefit of students in Theological Colleges and of those 
who take up the study of Greek towards the end of their school life, or 
after they have left school, chiefly with a view to reading the New 
Testament. 

It is founded wholly on the Greek of the New Testament, but it is 
hoped that it may be useful to those who expect to read a little 
Classical Greek as well. It seems to the writer that those who do not 
begin to learn Greek early, and who do not expect to make a thorough 
study of the Classical authors, may best begin the study of the 
language with the New Testament. The style of the writers of the 
Gospels and the Acts is very simple, and may generally be translated 
straight into English, while the style even of such a simple Classical 
author as Xenophon needs considerable adaptation. Moreover the 
vocabulary of such books as the Gospel and Epistles of St John is so 
limited that the student is not burdened at the beginning of his 
course with a long, and daily increasing, list of new words. Most of 
the words which he meets with are easily learnt from their frequent 
repetition. 

Care has been taken to indicate all deviations from Classical usage, 
and occasional notes have been added on usages which are confined 
to, but common in Classical Greek. 

Some of the rules are illustrated by Latin! as well as by Greek 
examples. The student probably has some knowledge of Latin, and it 
is believed that these examples will help him to remember the Greek 
rules either as parallels or contrasts. 

The section on English Grammar covers, as far as possible, the 
ground which is common to English, Latin, and Greek Grammar. 

Everything in it should be known by those who take up the study 
of any language, other than their own, before they begin that study. . 

1 The Latin quotations are generally taken from the Vulgate: but in 
a few instances the version of Beza published by the Bible Society has been 
used instead. 

a3 


vi PREFACE 


It is hoped that this preliminary section, if it does not convey any 
fresh information to the student, may at least serve to remind him 
of what he knows already, and to indicate those points of English 
Grammar which must be thoroughly understood by anyone who wishes 
to study Greek or Latin to any profit. 

The chapter on Prepositions is placed at the beginning of the 
second part of the book because Prepositions are of such frequent 
occurrence, and an exact acquaintance with their meaning is of such 
importance to correct translation, that it is well to master them 
thoroughly as soon as possible. 

For further study Burton’s J/oods and Tenses of New Testament 

Greek published by T. and T. Clark is strongly recommended. 
. The author wishes to express his thanks to his friend the Rev. 
W. L. Walter, late Vice-Principal of St Aidan’s College, Birkenhead, 
for much valuable help, and also to the Rey. Professor Moulton for 
some kind assistance in the final revision of the book. 


Before beginning this book the student is expected to be familiar 
with the declensions of the Nouns, Pronouns, and Adjectives commonly 
given in elementary Greek Grammars, with the conjugation of the verb 
Av both active and passive, and with the present and second aorist 
tenses of the verbs in pu. 

Huddilston’s Z£ssentials of New Testament Greek, published by 
Macmillan (American branch), gives just what is needed. 


The principal books which have been consulted in the preparation 
of this work are Professor Goodwin’s Greek Grammar, Dr Blass’ 
Grammar of New Testament Greek (both published by Macmillan), 
Professor J. H. Moulton’s Prolegomena, Professor Burton’s Moods and 
Tenses of New Testament Greek (both published by T. and T. Clark), 
the Rev. E. A. Abbott’s How to Parse, and Parts of Speech (published 
by Seeley), and the Parallel Grammar Series (published by Son- 
nenschein). 

To the authors of all these books the writer wishes to express 
himself deeply indebted. 

Corrections and suggestions will be thankfully acknowledged. 


ee VN 
175, Srocxport Roap, 
MANCHESTER. 
January, 1912, 


PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION 


N the second edition some corrections have been made, especially 

in the index of texts, and some slight changes and additions have 
been made in the first part. This has necessitated the alteration of 
the page numbers throughout the greater part of the book, but the 
numbers of the sections remain unaltered. 

An appendix consisting of a selection of passages from authors of 
the first two centuries has also been added, with notes directing attention 
to the paragraphs in the Syntax in which the points of grammar 
occurring in the text are dealt with. 

. The author desires to thank the reviewers for the favourable reception 
which they have offered to the first edition of this book, and wishes 
especially to express his thanks to the Rev. G. H. Casson of the 
Theological Hall, Mengo, Uganda, for the care with which he has looked 
over the book, and for his numerous valuable suggestions. 


July 2, 1913. [eb JP, We IN 


PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION 


N the third edition a few mistakes have been corrected, and a few 
definitions slightly altered. In response to a suggestion several 
passages have been added to the appendix of selections. Those who 
are interested in the subject are recommended to procure some of the 
volumes of the Loeb Classical Library, published by Heinemann. 
These give the Greek on one page and an English translation on the 
opposite page. The following authors of especial interest to students 
of New Testament Greek have been published: The Apostolic Fathers, 
Clement of Alexandria, Philostratus, Plutarch, Julian, Galen, St John 
Damascene (Barlaam and Joasaph). Others of equal interest will shortly 
be published. 

The author begs to thank all those kind correspondents whose 
suggestions have helped in the revision of this edition. He will 
be glad to receive further criticisms and suggestions from readers, as 
he hopes to publish a thoroughly reconstructed edition of this work. 


January, 1920. LP Vey ING 


PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION 


In this edition a few mistakes have been corrected and trifling 
alterations made. 

It should be noted that since this book was written Dr Burney in 
his Aramaie Origin of the Fourth Gospel has explained many of the 
peculiar uses of iva in the N.T. and especially in the Fourth Gospel by 
the supposition that it has been used to translate the Aramaic relative 
pronoun, Those who wish to understand these usages thoroughly are 


referred to his book. H.P.V.N, 


Cae fo BS te 


CONTENTS OF PART I 


Parts of Speech . C . ; : 6 ° 
Parsing ; : . : ° ° ° . 
Nouns . : ° . 6 2 - : : 


Adjectives . : : : . 5 . . 
Verbs ; 

(a) Transitive oe Taeaatiee 

(b) Active and Passive Voice . 4 5 f 
(ec) Deponent Verbs . : 

(ad) Formation of the Passive Voice 


(e) Auxiliary Verbs, Impersonal Verbs, the Conte 
Verb, Verbs of Incomplete Predication . . 


(f) Person and Number 

(g) Tense 

(kh) Mood 

(t) Participles : 4 : : : 
(7) Verbal Nouns: Infinitive Mood, Gerund . 
Sentences 

Equivalents . 

Simple and Complex Sentences . 

Substantival or Noun Clauses 

Adjectival Clauses 

Adverbial Clauses. 


Preparatory it and there 


a] 
> 
Qa 
Bw 


ITI OOD OD D Gt we 


CONTENTS OF PART II 


The Greek of the New Testament : 
Prepositions 

Subject and Predicate 

Cases and their meanings 

Notes on the use of the Oblique cases 
Adjectives 

Pronouns 

The Definite Article 

The Verb—Mood, Voice, Tense 
Sentences 

The use of the Subjunctive in independent sentences, etc. 
The Imperative 

Prohibitions 


The Infinitive and its equivalents in Noun Clauses and 
certain Adverbial Clauses 


Adverbial Clauses . 

Adjectival Clauses . 

Participles . 4 ; - : 

Use of ot and pn . 

Questions 

The Particle dv 

List of Irregular Verbs . ; : : : C 
Appendix 


Indices 


PAGE 
25 


28 
37 
37 
39 
49 
50 
55 
61 
80 
82 
83 
84 


87 
109 
120 
121 
126 
127 
128 
129 
135 
171 


GLOSSARY OF GRAMMATICAL TERMS 


ANACOLUTHON (d, negative, and dxodovOéw, I follow). A break in the 
construction of a sentence, where a clause is left unfinished, and 
one of a new construction begun. Very common in the Epistles 
of St Paul. See 2 Tim. iii. 10—11. 

ANALYsIS (dvd, back, and Ave, I loose), A loosing or division of a 
sentence into its parts :—Subject, Predicate, etc. A language like 
English which makes its verb-forms with auxiliary verbs instead 
of with endings is said to be analytical. 

ANOMALY (d, negative, and dpadds, level). A construction which does 
not conform to rule, 

ANTITHESIS (avri, against: riOnus, I place). Placing a word or clause 
over against another by way of contrast. 


APPOSITION (ad, to: pono, I place). When two nouns or a noun and a 
pronoun are placed together so that the second explains the 
meaning of the first more fully they are said to be in apposition, 
They must always be in the same case. 

Examples: I, your mother, call you. 
William the Conqueror died in 1087. 

ARCHAISM (dpyxaios, ancient). An expression belonging to an ancient 
form of any language. 


CARDINAL (cardo, a hinge). That on which anything hinges, that 
which is important. The name given to the more important 
forms of numeral adjectives, One, Two, Three, etc. from which the 
Ordinal numbers are formed, First, Second, etc. 


Casu (casus, falling). The nate given to the various forms which 
nouns etc. assume in Latin and Greek. The Ancients regarded 
the Substantive form of the noun (the Nominative Case) as 
standing upright and the other forms as falling away from it. 
Hence the name Oblique Cases applied to the cases other than 


the nominative, and the term declension or falling away given to 
the list of these cases. 


GLOSSARY OF GRAMMATICAL TERMS X1 


CoGNnatE (con, together: natus, born). Words derived from the same 
root, or even of the same meaning, are said to be cognate. 
Intransitive verbs may take a noun of cognate meaning after 
them which must not be confused with the object. 

Examples: He went his way. I have lived a long life. 

CoMPLEMENT (compleo, I fill up). A word or phrase that fills up the 
meaning of a verb of incomplete predication such as the verb fo be. 
Example: He is a man to be thoroughly trusted 

CoNJUGATION (con, together: jugo, I yoke). The name given to a 
number of verbs of generally similar inflections joined in one class. 

Consonant (con, together: sono, I sound). Letters that can only be 
sounded together with a vowel. 

Examples: B, C, D. 

CoRRELATIVES. Words that mutually answer to one another. 
Examples : Where, there, When, then. 

DECLENSION : see Case. 

DIpHTHONG (&, twice: @Acyyos, sound). Two vowel-sounds produced 
as one. 

Example: Caesar. 

Etiesis. The omission of words in a sentence which can be under- 

stood from the context. 


EryMoLocy (érupos, true: Adyos, meaning). The science of the true or 
original meaning of words. 
All the Greek and Latin words placed in brackets in this 
glossary show the etymological meaning of the English words. 
Evpuony (ed, well: ¢@wv7, sound). That which sounds well. Many of 
the varying forms of words are due to the fact that certain com- 
binations of letters were not easy to pronounce and so were 
modified for the sake of euphony. 

GERUND (gero, I carry on). A verbal noun which denotes the carrying 
on of the action of the verb. 
Examples : loving, fearing. 

Ip1om (iSuos, private, peculiar). A mode of expression peculiar to a 
language. 

InFLECTION (inflecto, I bend). The bending or changing of a word 
from its simple form; see Case. 


xl GLOSSARY OF GRAMMATICAL TERMS 


METAPHOR (perd, from one to another: ¢épo, I carry). The trans- 
ference of a word properly referring to one set of objects to 
another set of objects. For example, when a ship is said to plough 
a furrow in the sea we are transferring language, which properly 
applies only to the land, to the sea, by metaphor. This use is 
exceedingly common. In dictionaries the abbreviations Metaph. 
Figurat. Transf. (ie. by transference) and Trop. (Tropologice) 
are used to denote the metaphorical or extended meanings of the 
words. These are often the most important. 

MoNOSYLLABLE (ydvos, alone: ovAdaBy, a syllable) A word of one 
syllable. 

Moon: see page 11. 

OBLIQUE: see Case. 

ORDINAL (ordo, order). A numeral adjective which answers the question, 
In which order ?—Second, Third, etc. 

PARENTHESIS (srapa, beside: ¢veors, insertion). A word, phrase, or 
sentence inserted in another sentence yet not grammatically 
connected with any word in it. 

Example: Ye were the servants of sin; but now—God be thanked 
—ye are so no more. 

PARTICIPLE (participo, I partake). A form of the verb which partakes 
of the nature both of a verb and of an adjective. 

PERIOD (epi, around: 6dds, a way). (1) The full rounded path of a 
complex sentence. (2) A full stop. 

POLYSYLLABLE (modvs, many: ovaAdaB7, syllable). A word of many 
syllables, generally three or more. 

Primary Tenses. The Present, Future, Future Perfect and Present 
Perfect tenses. 


Seconpary TEnses. The Past, Imperfect and Pluperfect tenses. 
SIMILE (s¢mzlzs, like). A sentence or clause expressing the likeness of 
one action to another. 
Example; Then like an arrow swift he flew 
Shot by an archer strong. 


SYLLABLE (ovv, together: daB-, take). A group of letters taken 
together to form one sound. 


Syntax (cvv, together: rags, arrangement). The science of arranging 
words to form sentences. 


VowEL (Vocalis, having a voice). The letters which can be sounded 
by themselves: A, E, I, O, U. 


PART I 


1. PARTS OF SPEECH 


By parts of speech we mean the various classes under which all 
words used in speaking and writing may be arranged. 

The names of the parts of speech are as follows: 

Noun. Pronoun. Adjective. 

Verb. Adverb. 

Preposition. Conjunction. Interjection. 

The Article, definite and indefinite, is also sometimes classed as a 
separate part of speech. 

A Novwn is the name of anything. (Latin nomen, name.) 

Examples: John, boy, sweetness. 

A PRONOUN is a word used instead of a noun to indicate, or enumerate 
persons or things without naming them. (Latin pro, for: 
nomen, name.) 

Examples: I, you, they, who, that. 

An ADJECTIVE is a word used with a noun to describe, indicate, or 
enumerate what is denoted by the noun, (Latin-adjectum, 
a thing thrown to.) 

Examples: Good, many. 

A VERB is a word by means of which we can make a statement, 
ask a question, or give a command about some person or 
thing. (Latin verbum, a word, so called as being the principal 
word in the sentence.) 

Examples: I run, we see. 

An ADVERB is a word used with a verb or an adjective or another 
adverb to describe, indicate, or enumerate what is denoted 
by the verb, adjective, or other adverb. 

Examples: Slowly, very, there. 

A PREPOSITION is a word joined with, and generally placed before, a 
noun or its equivalent}, so that the preposition together with 
the noun forms a phrase equivalent to an adverb or adjective. 

“(Latin praepositum, placed before.) 
Examples: At, with, by. 
A ConsuNcTION is a word that joins together sentences, clauses or 
words. (Latin conjungo, I join.) 
Examples: And, but, for. 
1 See page 17. 
N. I 


9 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Aw INTERJECTION is a word thrown into a sentence to express a feeling 
of the mind. (Latin interjicio, I throw in.) 
Examples: Hallo, ha. 

The Derinire ARTICLE The and the INDEFINITE ARTICLE A are always 
joined with nouns like adjectives. 


J 


2. PARSING 


As this book is intended for older students it has not been thought 
necessary to adopt the method of deriving the reason for the names of 
the different parts of speech from examples. 

This is excellently done in a little book called How to tell the Parts 
of Speech, by the Rev. E. A. Abbott, published by Seeley, which the 
student who is altogether unacquainted with this subject is advised 
to get. 

A few rules and examples are however given which may be of 
assistance in determining the parts of speech. 

The first principle to be remembered is that no word should ever 
be parsed without careful reference to the function which it performs 
in the sentence where it occurs. 

In English many words having exactly the same form must be 
regarded as entirely different parts of speech, according to the place 
which they occupy in the sentence, and must be translated by wholly 
different words in Latin and Greek, according as their meaning varies. 

For example the word that may be (1) A demonstrative Pronoun. 
(2) A demonstrative Adjective. (3) A relative Pronoun. (4) A Con- 
junction}, 

(1) That is the man. (2) Give me that book. (3) This is the book 
that I want. (4) He said that this was the book. (4) He came that 
he might find the book. 

Again, the word considering may be (1) A verbal noun. (2) A 
participle. 

(1) Considering is slow work. (2) He went away considering the 
matter. 


Many words may be nouns or verbs, according to the place which 
they occupy in the sentence 


} Consider the meaning of the word that in the following sentence, He 
said that that that that man said was false. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 3 


Some such words are: Bite, fly, rose, scale and sign. 

Other words may be adjectives or nouns, such as: Base, last, stout, 
spring, kind. 

Other words may be adjectives or verbs, such as: Lean, clean, blunt, 
idle, free. 

Remembering then always to consider the word in connection with 
its sentence, the student should ask himself the following questions 
before parsing a word. They will help him to find out what part of 
speech it is. 

(1) Is it the name of anything? 

Then it is a noun. 

(2) Can a noun which is mentioned or thought of before be 

substituted for the word without altering the meaning of the sentence? 
Then it is a pronoun. 

(3) Does it answer any of the questions: What kind? How many ? 

How much? Which? Whose? In what order? with regard to some 


noun ? 
Then it is an adjective. 


(4) Does it make a statement, ask a question, or give a command ? 
Then it is a verb. 

(5) Does it answer the questions How? When? Where? 
Then it is an adverb. 

Note. The words How? When? and Where? are themselves 
adverbs. 

(6) Does it stand before a noun or its equivalent making with it a 
phrase which is equivalent to an adverb or adjective ? 

Then it is a preposition. 

(Another test of a preposition is that it is a word which is not a 
verb but which can stand before him and them, but not before he or 
they.) 

(7) Does it join sentences, clauses or words ? 

Then it is a conjunction. 


The words in the following sentence are parsed as an example. 
The man went quickly down the street and did not turn to his right hand 


or to his left. 


A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


THE 


MAN 
WENT 
QUICKLY 


DOWN 


THE 
STREET 


AND 
DID TURN 
NOT 


TO 
HIS 


RIGHT 
HAND 
OR 
TO 


HIS 
LEFT 


Limits the application of the word 
man. ‘Tells us which man it was, 
ie. some man already known. 


Is the name of something. 
Makes a statement about the man. 


Qualifies the verb went, tells us how 
he went. 

Stands before the noun sé¢ree¢, making 
with it a phrase equivalent to an 
adverb because it qualifies the verb 
went, telling us where he went. 

See above. 

Is the name of something. 


Joins together two clauses. 
Makes a statement about the man. 


Qualifies the verb did turn because 
it tells us how he did turn, i.e. not 
at all. 

See down above. 

The noun man’s can be substituted 
for this. 

But it also qualifies the noun hand, 
telling whose hand it is. 


Qualifies the noun hand, telling us 
which hand it is. 
Is the name of something. 


Joins together the two clauses did 
not turn to his right hand and (did 
not turn) to his left. 

See above. 

See above. 

See above. 


Therefore it is that 
kind of adjective 
to which the 
name Definite 
Article is given. 

Therefore it is a 
noun. 

Therefore it is a 
verb. 

Therefore it is an 
adverb. 

Therefore it is a 
preposition. 


Therefore it is a 
noun. 

Therefore it is a 
conjunction. 

Therefore it is a 
verb. 

Therefore it is an 
adverb. 


Therefore it is a 
pronoun. 
Therefore it is an 
adjectiveas well. 
Such words: are 
called Pronomi- 
nal adjectives. 
Therefore it is an 
adjective. 
Therefore it is a 


noun. 
Therefore it is a 
conjunction. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 5 


38. NOUNS 


There are four kinds of nouns : 


(1) Proper Nouns. A Proper noun is the name appropriated. 
to any particular person, place or thing (Latin proprius, belonging 
to a person). 

Examples: John, Mary, London, England. 

(2) Common Nouns. A Common noun is the name which all 
things of the same kind have in common (Latin communis, belonging 
to all). 

Examples: Boy, girl, town, country. 


(3) Collective Nouns. A Collective noun is the name of a 
number of persons or things forming one body. 

Examples : Committee, jury, army. 

(4) Abstract Nouns. An Abstract noun is the name of some 
quality, state, or action considered apart from the person or thing in 
which it is embodied (Latin abstractus, withdrawn). 

Examples: Goodness, whiteness, purity, servitude, running, 
walking. 


Number, Gender, Case 


Number. Nouns are inflected or changed in form to show 
whether they are singular or plural in number. 

A noun in the Singular number is the name of a single person 
or thing, unless it is a Collective noun (see above). 

A noun in the Plural number is the name of more than one 
person or thing. 


Examples : Singular Plural 
Horse horses 
Man men 
Ox oxen. 


Gender. In English all names of men or male animals are in the 
Masculine gender, all names of women or female animals are in 
the Feminine gender, all names of things without life are in the 
Neuter gender. Nouns used to denote persons of either sex such as 
parent, sovereign, are said to be of Common gender. 

In Latin and Greek, although all names of men and male animals 
are Masculine, and all names of women or female animals are Feminine, 
names of things without life may be Masculine or Feminine in gender 


6 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


as well as Neuter. The gender of a noun is generally determined by 
the ending of the Nominative Singular. 

Case. Nearly all traces of case-endings have disappeared from 
English nouns, The only surviving ending is that of the Possessive 
or Genitive case which is formed by adding ’s to the end of a noun in 
the singular and s’ to the end of the noun in the Plural. 


Example Nominative Possessive Singular Possessive Plural 
horse horse’s horses’ 


4. ADJECTIVES 


In English, adjectives are never inflected, but have the same ending 
whether they qualify singular or plural, masculine or feminine nouns. 

In Latin and Greek they are inflected to show gender, number, 
and case. 


5. VERBS 
Verbs are of two kinds—Transitive and Intransitive. 


(a) Transitive Verbs. ‘Transitive verbs are so called because 
they denote an action which necessarily affects or passes over to 
some person or thing other than the subject of the verb (Latin 
transire, to pass over). 

Examples: I throw, I take. These statements are not complete; 
we ask immediately, What do you throw or take? The name of 
the person or thing affected by the action of the verb must be 
supplied in order to make a complete sentence—J throw a bail, 
I take an apple. The name of the person or thing which is affected 
by the action of the verb is called the direct object. 

A transitive verb is one which must have a direct object expressed 
in order to make a complete sentence. 

Intransitive Verbs. Intransitive verbs are so called because they 
denote an action which does not affect or pass over to any person or 
thing besides the subject of the verb. 

Examples: I stand, The sun shines. These sentences are complete 
statements in themselves. 

Many transitive verbs may also be used intransitively. 

Examples: The dog bit the man. The dog bites. 


(6) Active Voice. A verb is said to be in the Active voice when 
its subject is spoken of as acting or doing something (Latin ago, I act). 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 7 


Passive Voice. A verb is said to be in the Passive voice when 
its subject is spoken of as suffering or being acted upon (Latin patior, 
I suffer). 

Examples: Active, I love, I was hearing. 

Passive, I am loved, I was being heard. 

N.B. Only Transitive verbs can have a Passive voice. 

There are certain verbs such as J fall, J slip, etc. which do not 
speak of the subject as acting; these are however regarded as Active 
verbs because they are Intransitive. 


(ec) Deponent Verbs. In Latin and Greek there are many 
verbs which are called Deponent verbs. These are verbs which have 
the form of Passive verbs, but which are Active in meaning. 

They are called Deponent because they have lazd aside (Latin 
depono) @ passive sense and assumed an active. 


Examples: patior, I suffer. dmoxpivopa, I answer. 
(d) The English Passive voice of any verb is formed by using the 


proper tenses of the verb to be with the Passive PartTIcIPLE (which 
usually ends in ed) of the verb of which we desire to form the Passive 


voice. 


Present simple Active I love. 

Present simple Passive I am loved. 
Past simple Active I loved. 

Past simple Passive I was loved. 
Future simple Active I shall love. 
Future simple Passive I shall be loved. 


This formation must be carefully distinguished from the use of the 
same Auxiliary verb to be with the AcTIVE PaRTICIPLE which forms 
the Continuous Active tenses of the verb. 


Present continuous Active I am loving. 

Past continuous Active I was loving. 

Future continuous Active I shall be loving. 

The student should be able to tell readily what voice, tense, and 
person any English verb is in ; unless he can do this he cannot possibly 
translate from another language with accuracy. 

It is good practice to go through the tenses of an English verb, first 
in the Active, and then in the Passive. 


8 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


(ec) Auxiliary Verbs. Auxiliary verbs are verbs which are used 
as aids (Latin ausilia) to enable other verbs to form moods and tenses, 
which cannot be expressed within the compass of one word. 

Examples: I sHatn go. I WOULD HAVE gone. I SHALL HAVE BEEN 
sent. 


In English the use of these verbs is very common, no tense in the 
Active Voice except the Past can be formed without them, and they are 
used in every tense of the Passive voice. 

In Latin and Greek they are rarely used. The only verb used in 
these languages as an auxiliary verb is the verb ¢o be. 


Impersonal Verbs. Impersonal verbs are verbs which are not 
used in the first and second persons, but only in the third. 
Examples : It rains, it snows. 


The Copulative Verb, Verbs of Incomplete Predication. 


The verb ¢o be has two meanings: 
(1) It is used in the sense of ¢o exist as in the sentence God is. 


(2) It is used to join together two nouns or noun equivalents which 
denote the same person or thing when the person or thing denoted by 
the one is said to be identical with the person or thing denoted by the 
other. 

Examples; William, was Duke of Normandy. Iam the governor. 
This is he. 


Ags the nouns or noun equivalents joined together by the verb to be 
denote the same person or thing, they must always be in the same 
ease. It is grammatically incorrect to say J am him, It is me, because 
him and me are in the Accusative case, and J and 7zt are in the 
Nominative case. 

It is necessary to observe this rule very carefully in Latin and 
Greek where the Nominative and Accusative cases generally have 
different forms. 

This rule is sometimes stated as follows: 


“The verb ‘to be’ takes the same case after it as before it.” 


‘The verb ¢o be may also join together a noun or a noun equivalent 
and an adjective, making a sentence which asserts that the quality 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 9 


denoted by the adjective is an attribute of the person or thing denoted 
by the noun or noun equivalent. This adjective always agrees with 
_ the noun in number, gender and case, in such languages as Latin 
and Greek. 


Examples: The king is proud. Heis good. To err is human. 


From its power of joining nouns to other nouns or adjectives the 
verb to be is called the Copulative Verb. (Latin copulo, I link.) 

It is also called a verb of Incomplete Predication because it does 
not make sense when it stands by itself (except when uscd in the sense 
of to exist), but requires to be followed by a noun or an adjcctive which 
is called the Complement, because it fills up the sense (Latin compleo, 

I fill up). 

There are other verbs of Incomplete Predication besides the verb 

to be, some Intransitive and some Transitive. 


Such verbs are: Intransitive—become, seem, appear, etc. 
Transitive—make, declare, choose, think, consider, 
ete. 


When a verb of Incomplete Predication is Intransitive, or Transitive 
and in the Passive voice, the Complement refers to the same person or 
thing as the subject of the sentence, and must therefore be in the 
Nominative case. 


Examples: Peter became an Apostle. 
This place seems healthy. 
He is called our king. 


But when a verb of Incomplete Predication is Transitive and in the 
Active voice, the Complement refers to the same person or thing as 
the object of the sentence, and is therefore in the Accusative case. 


Examples: They made him captain. 
We choose you king. 
You consider me happy. 


This principle is obviously of great importance in Greek and Latin. 


(f) Person and Number. 


The First Person of the verb is used when the speaker is speaking 
of himself. 


10 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


The Second Person is used when the speaker is speaking to 
another person or thing. 


The Third Person is used when the speaker is speaking of 
another person or thing, 


Examples: Ist person, I love. 2nd person, You love. 3rd person, 
He loves. 


The use of the Singular Number denotes that only one person or 
thing is being spoken about. 

The use of the Plural Number denotes that more than one person 
or thing is being spoken about. 


Rule. The verb agrees with its subject in Number and Person. 


Note. The Plural of the second person Yow is almost always used 
in modern English instead of the second person Singular, even where 
only one person is being spoken to. 

But in Latin and Greek the Singular is always used when one 
person is being spoken to, 


(g) Tense. Tenses are forms which verbs assume to show at 
what time the action of the verb is represented as taking place. 

The times when the action may take place are (i) Past, (ii) Present, 
(iii) Future. 

The tenses in English have further subdivisions to show whether 
the action is represented as being (1) continuous or in progress, 
(2) indefinite or simple, (3) perfect or completed. 

Below is a table of the Tenses of an English verb in the Indicative 
Mood with the corresponding tenses of a Greek and Latin verb, given, 
where possible, with the names by which the tenses are generally 
called in Latin and Greek Grammars. 

It will be seen that there are more tense-forms in English than in 
Latin and Greek. 

The Latin and Greek Present stands both for the English Present 
Continuous and Present Simple, and the Latin and Greek Future for 
the English Future Continuous and Future Simple. 

The Latin Perfect has two meanings, one of which corresponds to 


the English Past Simple, and the other to the English Present Perfect 
or Perfect, as it is generally called. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 11 


TIME 
$$... SS _—— —__~ 
STATE Past Present Future 
Continuous I was loving I am loving I shall be loving 
I used to love Amo Amabo 
Amabam (Im- pro parnow 
perfect) 
edidovy 
Simple I loved I love I shall love 
Amavi (Perfect) Amo Amabo 
edirnoa (Aorist) ire prjoo 
Perfect I had loved I have loved I shall have 
Amaveram Amavi (Perfect) loved 
(Pluperfect) mepidnka Amavero 
éerepiknkew mepidnoopar 
Perfect I had been I have been I shall have 
Continuous loving loving been loving 
None None None 


(hk) Moods. Moods are forms which verbs assume to show the 
way in which the action or state denoted by the verb is to be regarded, 
ie. if it is a statement or fact, a command, a wish, or a thought. 

The Indicative Mood generally makes a statement, or asks a 
question. 

Examples: He goes. We shall run. Were you listening? 

The Imperative Mood gives a command. 

Examples: Go. Come. Make haste. 

The Subjunctive Mood expresses a thought or wish rather than 
an actual fact. 

The uses of the Subjunctive Mood are so various, and its use in 
English is so different from its use in Latin and Greek, that it is 
impossible to bring it under any more exact definition. 

The student is warned against connecting any particular English 
meaning with the Latin and Greek Subjunctive, or with the Greek 
Optative such as that I might love, I should, or would, love. 

Practice, and the observance of seemingly arbitrary rules, will alone 
enable him to use these moods correctly. 


12 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


The use of tenses formed with may, might, should, would, etc. in 
English is a most unreliable guide to the use of the Subjunctive and 
Optative in Latin and Greek. 


nf 


(¢) Participles. Participles are verbal adjectives resembling 
verbs in that they can have subjects and objects, tenses and voices, 
and resembling adjectives in that they can qualify nouns. 

There are two Participles in English—the Active Participle ending 
in ng, and the Passive Participle ending generally in ed or d. 

Examples: Loving, Loved. 


There is also a Past Active Participle formed with the auxiliary 
having and the Passive Participle. 
Example: Having loved. 


The Past Passive Participle is formed with the auxiliary verbs 
having been and the Passive Participle. 
Example: Having been loved. 


The Present Participle Passive is being loved. 

There is no Past Participle Active in Latin except in the case of 
Deponent verbs, nor is there any Present Participle Passive. Both 
however are found in Greek. 

As the verbal noun or Gerund in English ends in ing as well as the 
Active Participle care must be taken to distinguish them. 

If the word is a Participle, it can always be replaced by such a 
clause beginning with a Conjunction or a Relative. 

When it is a verb-noun it cannot be replaced by a clause. 


Examples: (1) Skating is a fine exercise. 
Here skating is a verb-noun and the subject of the sentence. 


(2) I like to see the boys skating. 


Here skating can be replaced by the clause when they are skating, 
and is therefore a Participle. 


(3) There is a dancing bear. 

Here dancing can be replaced by the Relative clause that is dancing. 
Therefore it is a Participle. 

Participles are also used with auxiliary verbs to form certain tenses 
of the verb as shown above. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK | 13 


(j) Verbal Nouns, Infinitive, Gerund. The so-called Infinitive 
Mood to go, to see, to hear is really a verbal noun. 

The other verbal noun in English is called the Gerund, and ends in 
ing—going, seeing, hearing. 

Verbal nouns resemble verbs in that they can have a subject and 
an object, tenses and voices: they resemble a noun in that they 
themselves can be the subject or object of another verb. 


Examples of the use of the Infinitive. 

(1) As Subject—7o err is human. Here to err is the subject of 
the sentence. 

As is explained more fully in section 12, sentences in which the 
Infinitive stands as a Subject are more usually expressed in the 
following form with an anticipatory 7¢ standing as the grammatical 
subject before the verb: 


It is human to err. 
Tt is a pleaswre to see you. 
lt is advisable to make haste. 


' The object of an Infinitive standing as the subject of a sentence 
may be expressed as in the following example: Zo forgive such crimes 
is difficult, or It is difficult to forgive such crimes. 

Here such crimes is the object of to forgive. 

The only way in which the subject of an Infinitive standing as the 
subject of a sentence can be expressed in English is by inserting for 
in front of it and making it depend on the predicate of the principal 
clause: /¢ is difficult for a king to forgive such crimes. 


(2) As Object—They wish to live. Here to live is the object of they 
wish. 

I wish him to live. Here him is the subject of to dive and the clause 
him to live is the object of J wish. 

I wish him to see you. Here him is the subject, and you the object 
of to see and the clause him to see you is the object of J wish. 

The use of the Gerund is seen in the following examples : 

As Subject—Playing the violin is a delightful occupation. 

As Object—He loves playing the violin. 


(3) The Infinitive is also used after certain nouns and adjectives 
in an explanatory or epexegetic sense. 


14 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Examples: I have not the heart to do it. 

Weare not worthy to gather up the crumbs under His table, 
It is time to depart. 

He was not able to answer a word. 


The Infinitive and the Gerund must be always treated as verbal 
nouns, and then their use, in the various constructions in which they 
occur, will explain itself. 


Notes on the form of the English Infinitive. The English 
Infinitive is nearly always found with the preposition ¢o in front of it. 

This preposition is no part of the Infinitive, but is a relic of the 
Dative case of the verbal noun in Old English. The force of the 
preposition has become so weakened that its presence in the sentence 
is generally quite neglected, and another preposition may even be put 
in front of it, as for example— What went ye out for to see? 

This Dative case of the verbal noun originally expressed purpose, 
and this use still survives in such sentences as [ came to see you, He 
went to hear the band. 

The proposition to may be omitted after certain verbs such as may, 
can, shall, bid, let, make, etc. 


Examples: I can do this, Let him go, Make him stay. 
Contrast with these the following examples, J am able to do this, 
Allow him to go, Force him to stay. 


6. SENTENCES 
A. sentence is a group of words expressing a statement, question, 
desire (command, request, wish, entreaty), or exclamation. 


Every sentence must consist of at least two parts: 


(1) The Subject—the word or group of words which denotes the 
person or thing of which the predicate is said. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 15 


(2) The Predicate—the word, or group of words which expresses 
the assertion that is made, the desire that is expressed, or the question 
that is asked about the subject. 


N.B. The Predicate is not necessarily identical with the verb, it 


includes the extensions of the verb and the objects, if any, as well as 
the verb. 


If the verb in the Predicate is Transitive it must have an Object. 
The object of a verb is the name of that towards which the action of 
the verb is directed. 

In considering a sentence, first pick out the verb. 

The best way to find the Subject is to ask the question who? or 
what? before the verb. 


The best way to find the Object is to ask the question whom? or 
what? after the verb. 


Example : Caesar conquered the Gauls. 

Who conquered? answer Caesur. Therefore Caesar is the Subject. 

Caesar conquered whom? answer the Gauls. Therefore the Gauls is 
the Object. 


Hither the Subject or the Predicate can be omitted when it can 
easily be supplied from the context. It is therefore possible for a 
sentence to consist of only one word. 

Examples: Go. Come. Thank you. (Subject omitted.) 

Who did this? I. (Predicate omitted.) 

The omission of the Subject often occurs in Latin and Greek 
because the forms of the verbs in these languages leave no doubt as to 
the number and person of the subject. It only occurs in English in 
the Imperative mood. When any part of the sentence is omitted it is 
sometimes said to be understood. 


Every sentence must fall into one of five forms; 
(1) Subject and Intransitive Verb. 


Example : SUBJECT PREDICATE 
The sun shines. 
(2) Subject, Transitive Verb, Object. 
Example : SUBJECT PREDICATE ; 
Verb Object 


Caesar conquered the Gauls. 


16 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


(3) Subject, Transitive Verb, two Objects. 


Example:  SuBJECT PREDICATE 
Verb _— Indirect Object Direct Object 
Socrates taught Plato philosophy. 


(4) Subject, Copulative Verb or Intransitive Verb of Incom- 
plete Predication, Predicate Noun or Adjective. 


Example : SUBJECT PREDICATE 
Verb Predicate Noun 
William was a king. 
Verb Predicate Adjective 
He 7s happy. 
Alexander was called great. 


(5) Subject, Transitive Verb of Incomplete Predication, 
Object, Predicate Noun or Adjective. 


Example: SuBsxzcr PREDICATE 
Verb Object Predicate Noun 
Tyranny makes men slaves. 
Verb Object Predicate Adjective 
They call him happy. 


Note. As was mentioned above the Predicate of a sentence is not 
necessarily identical with the verb. It includes the verb and the 
object or complement with all the words which qualify them. 

Any part of a sentence may be amplified or extended by the 
addition of qualifying words. The learner must get into the habit of 
picking out the Verb and Subject first, and then finding out to which 
of the above forms the sentence, which he is going to translate, 
belongs. 

Take for example the following sentence : 


CarsaR, the great Roman general, completely coNQUERED the 
Gauls, the inhabitants of modern France, at the siege of Alesia. 


This is a sentence of form 2 with amplifications. 

A noun or pronoun may be amplified or extended in meaning by an 
adjective or an adjective equivalent. 

A verb, an adjective, or an adverb may be amplified or extended in 
meaning by an adverb or an adverb equivalent. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 17 


7. EQUIVALENTS 


The Noun, the Adjective, and the Adverb may be replaced by other 
parts of speech which can do the same work in the sentence. 

A word doing the work of a different part of speech, or a group 
of words doing the work of a single part of speech, is called an 
equivalent. 

A group of words forming an equivalent, and not having a subject 
or predicate of its own is called a phrase. 

In the above example the words the great Roman general, in- 
habitants of modern France and at the siege of Alesia are all Phrases. 

A group of words forming an equivalent and haying a subject and 
predicate of its own is called a subordinate clause. 

Example: Caesar, who was a great Roman general, completely 
conquered the Gauls, who inhabited modern France, when he took 
Alesia. Here all the groups of words in italics are Subordinate Clauses, 


Noun Equivarents. A noun equivalent may be 


(1) Apronoun. You are happy. Jam miserable. 
(2) A verb-noun, an Infinitive or Gerund. Lliketorun. Sleeping 
is pleasant. 
(3) An adjective. 
Both wise and foolish know this, 
(4) A clause, generally called a noun or substantival clause. 
That you have wronged me doth appear in this. 
I see that you know him. 


ADJECTIVE EquivaLents. An adjective equivalent may be 
SS SS Sa AT ST 


(1) A verbal adjective or participle, or a participial phrase. 
A loving mother. A loved spot. Wesaw aman carrying wood. 
(2) A noun in apposition. 
Queen Victoria. Edward the peacemaker. 
(3) A noun preceded by a preposition, or in the possessive case. 
The Houses 0f Parliament. 
Maids Causeway. 
The King of Britain. (Compare His Britannic Majesty.) 
Dogs for hunting. 


18 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


(4) An Adjectival Clause. 
The horse which Isawis there. At evening when the sun did set. 


Apvers Equivatents. An adverb equivalent may be 
SS a 


(1) A noun preceded by a preposition. 
He lives in the woods. 
He walked for six hours. 


(2) A noun sometimes qualified by an adjective, but without a 
preposition. 
He died last night. 
They went home. 
We hope to live many years. 
(3) An Adverbial clause. 
I will see you when you come. 
I have come i order to see hain. 
I will see you 7f you come. 
(4) A participle or a participial phrase. 
We stood amazed. 
Hearing this | went home. 
The sun having set we went to rest. 
(5) An Infinitive. 
We came to see the spectacle. 
He is too foolish to be trusted. 


8. SENTENCES SIMPLE AND COMPLEX 


A simple sentence is a sentence which contains a single subject 
and a single predicate. 

Two or more clauses which are not dependent on one another, but 
which make equally important and independent statements, are said 
to be combined by coordination, and to form a double or multiple 
sentence, Such clauses are generally joined together by the coordi- 
nating conjunctions and, but, or, for, etc. 

Example: You do this, and I do that. 

A complex sentence is a sentence which contains a principal 
clause and one or more subordinate clauses depending on it, or on one 
another, as noun, adjective or adverb equivalents. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 19 


It will be found convenient to keep the name sentence for complete 
statements occurring between two full stops. 

Groups of words forming part of a compound or complex sentence, 
and having a subject and predicate of their own, should be called 
clauses. 

Groups of words forming an equivalent to some part of speech, and 
not having a subject and predicate of their own, should be called 
phrases. 


EXAMPLE OF A COMPLEX SENTENCE. 


When the captain drew near to the coast, he seut some of his men 
to land in order that he might get help, if the other ships, which had 
not yet arrived, should need it. 

(1) Main Clause : he sent some of his men to land. 

Subject: He. Predicate : Sent some of his men to land. 

(2) when the captain drew near to the coast 

is an Adverbial Clause qualifying send. 
It tells us when he sent the men. 
(3) wn order that he might get help 
is an Adverbial Clause qualifying sené. 
It tells us why he sent the men. 
(4) af the other ships should need rt 
is an Adverbial Clause qualifying get help. 
It tells us under what conditions he would need the help. 
(5) which had not yet arrived, 
is an Adjectival Clause qualifying ships. 
It tells us more about the ships. 


9. SUBSTANTIVAL OR NOUN CLAUSES 

A Substantival or Noun Clause is a clause which stands in the 
relationship of a noun to the principal clause or to some other clause in 
a complex sentence. 

(1) As Subject. That he ts coming is certain. 

(2) As Object. He said that he was king. (Statement.) 

Ie commanded that bread should be set before them. (Command.) 

2—2 


20 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


He besought him that he might be with him. (Petition.) 
Do you know who he ts ? | 

He asked how it happened. + (Questions.) 

Tell me where he lives. | 

You see how unjust he is. (Exclamation.) 


(3) As Complement, or Predicative Noun. 
My hope is that you may succeed. 


(4) In Apposition to another noun. 
I had no idea that you would oppose me. 


When a Noun Clause which is the object of a verb states a fact, it 
is generally called a Dependent Statement. 

When a Noun Clause gives the words of a command or petition, it 
is generally called a Dependent Command or Petition. 

When a Noun Clause begins with an interrogative or exclamatory 
word such as who, what, where, whether, 7f, how, it is generally called a 
Dependent Question or Exclamation. 

All the Noun Clauses given above with the exception of the 
Dependent Questions and Exclamations are introduced by the con- 
junction ¢hat and contain a finite verb. 

In certain cases however an infinitive or a gerund may be used in 
Noun Clauses instead of a clause introduced by that and containing 
a finite verb. This is natural because the infinitive and gerund are 
verbal nouns. 

The infinitive is used frequently in Noun Clauses in Greek and 
Latin, it is therefore important to see how far the same construction 
prevails in English. 

It is used in English as follows : 

(1) As Subject. Zo err is human. 

It is a pleasure to see you. (See section 12.) 


(2) As Object. I declare him to be guilty. 
We believe him fo be ee Ce 
He commanded them to go away. (Command.) 
(3) As Complement or Predicative Noun. 
My hope is to succeed. 


The use of the infinitive in a dependent statement is only found 
after a few verbs in English, such as J declare, I assert, I proclaim, 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 21 


I believe, etc. A clause introduced by that is by far the most common 
way of expressing a dependent statement in English, and can be used 
after any verb. 

The infinitive is frequently used in dependent commands or petitions 
in English, and indeed is the most usual way of expressing them. 

There are certain verbs such as J wish, I hope, I am able, I can, etc. 
which always take an Infinitive as their object. 

These are sometimes called Modal Verbs because they are con- 
sidered to add to the verb new ways of expressing its meaning, 


Examples: I wish fo see the king. 
We hope Zo live many years. 
They can do nothing without you. (See 57.) 


The use of the Gerund is seen in such sentences as: 


Subject : Healing the sick is a noble work. 
Object : I deny using the expression. 


10. ADJECTIVAL CLAUSES 


Adjectival clauses are introduced by the relative pronouns Who, 
Which, That, and their equivalents when, where, such as, etc. and 
qualify some noun in another clause just like an adjective. 


This is the man who sent me. 

This is the man whom I saw. 

We will do this in the evening when we meet. 
This is the place where I was born. 

IT can sell you a house such as you require. 


The word to which the relative pronoun refers, and which the clause 
which it introduces qualifies, is called the antecedent. 

In the first two sentences the word the man is the antecedent, in 
the others evening, place, and house. 

A Participle qualifying the Antecedent may take the place of an 
Adjectival Clause. 

We may write: 


I saw a man clinging to a mast, or 
I saw a man who was clinging to a mast. 


22 


A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


11. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES 


Adverbial Clauses are clauses which stand in the relationship of 
an adverb to the verb in another clause. 


Example: I will do this on condition that you do that. 


Here the clause on condition that you do that qualifies the verb 
I will do just like an adverb. 


The sentence might have been written : I will do this conditionally. 
Example : I will do this when to-morrow comes. 


Here when to-morrow comes is an adverbial clause qualifying J will do. 
The sentence might have been written : I will do this to-morrow. 


Adverbial clauses may be divided into eight classes. 


(1) 
(2) 
(3) 
(4) 
(5) 
(6) 
(7) 
(8) 


(1) 
(2) 
(3) 
(4) 
(5) 
(6) 
(7) 
(8) 


Final Clauses denoting purpose. 

Temporal Clauses denoting time when. 

Local Clauses denoting place where. 

Causal Clauses denoting cause. 

Consecutive Clauses denoting consequence. 
Conditional Clauses denoting supposition. 

Concessive or Adversative Clauses denoting contrast. 
Comparative Clauses denoting comparison. 


EXAMPLES OF ADVERBIAL CLAUSES 


He ran that he might get home soon. 
He ran when he got on the road. 

He ran where the road was level. 

He ran because he was late. 

He ran so that he got home soon. 

He ran ¢f he was late. 

He ran although he was early. 

He ran as he was accustomed to do. 


The names given to the various kinds of Adverbial Clauses in the 
above list are names commonly given to them in Grammars. They 
are given here for that reason, and not because they have anything 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 23 


to recommend them in themselves. Some of the names are pedantic 
and obscure, and it is much better to speak of the clauses of classes 
1, 2, 3, 5, as clauses denoting Purpose, Time, Place, and Consequence, 
respectively. 

A Participle may be used to express some kinds of Adverbial 
Clauses. Care is often needed to distinguish such participles from 
those which take the place of Adjectival Clauses (see 10 above). 

If the participle can be resolved into a clause consisting of a 
conjunction and a finite verb it is used in place of an Adverbial Clause, 
but if it can be resolved into a clause introduced by a relative pronoun 
it is used in place of an Adjectival Clause. 


Example (1): Knowing this, I returned home. 
Here knowing this obviously means since L knew this and is therefore 
an adverbial clause denoting cause. 


Example (2): I saw a man clinging to a spar half a mile from shore. 

Here clinging to a spar might be replaced by who was clinging to a 
spar. This is a clause introduced by a relative pronoun and clinging 
to a spar must therefore be described as an adjectival clause. 


Example (3): Seeing the man running away, I went after him. 
This might be equally well expressed as follows: 

Since I saw the man who was running away, I went after him. 
When the sentence is put in this form there is no difficulty in analysing 
it. 

Even Relative Clauses are sometimes adverbial if they express 
cause or purpose. 


Example (1). We disliked our master who seemed to take a pleasure 
in punishing us. Here who seemed is equivalent to because he seemed, 
and is an adverbial clause of cause. 


Example (2). They sent men who should spy out the land. 

Here who should spy out the land is equivalent to in order to spy out 
the land, and is an adverbial clause of purpose. 

In analysing complex sentences pay very little heed to the rorm, 
but be sure to find out what the muanine of the clauses is by putting 
them into other words if necessary. 


24, A SHORT SYNTAX OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


12. PREPARATORY /7 AND THERE 


This construction is so common in English that it seems to require 
special mention. 

The subject is nearly always put before the verb in English ; indeed, 
as English nouns have no case endings to distinguish the subject from 
the object, the order of words in a sentence is the only way in which 
the subject can be distinguished from the object. 

But in certain cases, especially where the subject of the sentence is 
in the infinitive mood, the subject is placed after the verb. 

Then the pronoun 7¢ is placed before the verb to act as a preparatory 
subject and to show that the real subject is coming. 


Example: It is good to walk in the way of righteousness. 


Here the real subject is to walk in the way of righteousness, and 
is good is the predicate. 


Zt is the preparatory subject, or the grammatical subject as it is 
sometimes called. 

The adverb ¢here is used in the same way especially when the verb 
in the sentence is part of the verb Zo be. 

Example : There was once a boy who lived on an island. 

In this sentence the subject is a boy. There should be-parsed as a 
preparatory adverb. 

Neither of these constructions exist in Latin or Greek. 

The Latin or Greek for the examples given above are as follows: 


Bonum est ambulare in via justitiae. 
kahov cote mepimatety ev TH 6d@ THS SuKatoovvys, ° 


Olim fuit puer qui insulam habitabat, 
qv more mais Os KaT@Ker vijcov. 


25 


PART II 
THE GREEK OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 


TueE Greek language had its origin in the speech of that branch of 
the Aryan race which settled in the country which we call Greece. 
These people called themselves Hellenes, and their country Hellas. It 
consists of a number of small plains divided from one another by steep 
mountain ridges or by arms of the sea. From the formation of the 
country it resulted that each of the tribes which inhabited these plains 
formed a separate state, and spoke a different dialect. The most 
important of these dialects was the Attic dialect. This was spoken 
by the inhabitants of Attica, the little strip of country in which 
the famous city of Athens was situated. 

The importance of this dialect was not due to the size of Attica, or 
to the extent of the Athenian empire; but to the celebrity of the 
Athenian men of letters, whose writings were the accepted models for 
all Greece. 

All modern Greek Grammars, unless they are specially written to 
illustrate some dialect, are founded on Attic Greek, and deviations from 
it are treated as exceptions to rule. 

After the conquests of Alexander in the 4th cent. B.c., Greek 
gradually became the common language of all the various nations 
inhabiting the countries surrounding the Eastern end of the Mediter- 
ranean Sea. 

The victorious army of Alexander carried the Greek language to 
the inland parts of Asia Minor, to Syria, Palestine and Egypt. 


26 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


The colonies which the Greek states had planted at an earlier stage 
of their history had carried the language to the coast of Asia Minor, to 
the islands of the Aegean Sea, to Sicily and to the South of Italy. 

After the Roman conquest of Greece the admiration which the 
Romans felt for the language and literature of that country, and the 
convenience of the language for trading purposes, caused it to be 
very commonly spoken in Rome itself. 

But the Macedonian conquests had not only opened up the East * 
Greek influence ; they also broke down the barriers which separated 
one Greek state from another. Men of all the Greek tribes met in 
Alexander’s army or followed in its train. They soon felt the need of 
a new manner of speech by means of which they could communicate 
readily with one another, and so a new dialect was formed from those 
elements which the old dialects had in common. The literary celebrity 
of Attic Greek gave its forms a preponderance in the new common 
dialect ; but the latter contained many expressions, which would not 
have been tolerated in Attic, and dropped many peculiarities of diction 
and niceties of phrase, which had been found necessary by the highly 
cultivated Athenian writers, but which were not required for purposes 
of ordinary intercourse. 

This Common Dialect, or the coy, as it is generally called, became 
the regular means of communication among the nations comprising the 
Eastern part of the Roman Empire, and between them and Rome. 
We find the Apostle Paul writing to the Roman Church in Greek, and 
Clement, Bishop of Rome in the first century, writes to the Corinthians 
in Greek. The Shepherd of Hermas and many of the inscriptions 
in the Catacombs are written in the same language. 

In Egypt the language was thoroughly domesticated. 

The papyri, which are being discovered in Egypt, and which 
have thrown such a valuable light on the Greek of the New Testa- 
ment, represent the letters and business documents of people of all 
classes. 

The Septuagint, or Greek Version of the Old Testament, was 
produced at the court of the Ptolemies for the benefit of the Greek- 
speaking Jews of Egypt, and was soon used even in Palestine and 
Rome, as we can see from the quotations in the New Testament and in 
the letter of Clement of Rome. 

The Greek of the New Testament is the Greek of this common 
dialect. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK at 


Until a few years ago it was universally held that the peculiarities 
of New Testament Greek were due to the fact that the writers were 
accustomed to speak in Aramaic, and to read Hebrew. 

But recent discoveries of inscriptions from all parts of the Greek- 
speaking world and of papyri from Egypt have made it plain that most 
of these peculiarities existed in countries where there could be no 
suspicion of Aramaic influence. It is now generally allowed that the 
New Testament was written in the ordinary Greek in common use in 
Palestine in the time of Christ, which would be perfectly intelligible 
to any person of average education in the countries to which the Gospel 
first penetrated. Its diction is however much influenced by the 
Septuagint, as might be expected from the nature of the subjects 
treated, and from the familiarity of its writers with that version of 
the Old Testament Scriptures. 

The chief points in which New Testament Greek differs from Attic 
Greek are as follows : 

(1) The complete disappearance of the Dual. 

(2) The almost entire disappearance of the Optative, 


- (8) The great extension of the use and meaning of clauses intro- 
duced by wa. 
(4) The extension of the use of 7. 
(5) The substitution of the regular endings of the verbs in -o for 
those of the verbs in -z in certain cases. 
(6) The general simplification of sentence-construction, and the 
frequent use of a simple «ai or 6¢ to join sentences or clauses. 


28 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


PREPOSITIONS 


1. Prepositions were originally Adverbs, and are so still when they 
are compounded with verbs. Most of the local and other relations 
which are now expressed by a Preposition followed by the Accusative, 
Genitive, or Dative case of a noun or pronoun were originally expressed 
by the use of a suitable case of the noun or pronoun alone. 

In the language from which Greek was derived there were cases 
which, when standing by themselves, sufficed to denote local, temporal 
and other derived relations. 

The Accusative case denoted extension, or motion towards. 

The Ablative case denoted separation, or motion from. 

The Locative case denoted the place where, or rest at. 

The Instrumental case denoted the means by which an action was 
accomplished, and it had also an idea of association. 

In that form of the Greek language with which we are acquainted 
we find the form which we call the Genitive case used to express the 
meaning of the Ablative case as well as its own proper meaning. 

The form that we call the Dative case expresses the meanings of 
the Locative and Instrumental cases as well as its own. 

We are therefore justified in saying, as a practical rule, that the 
Genitive in Greek denotes motion from, and that the Dative denotes 
rest at, and also can be used to express the Instrument of an action, 
although these are not the proper original meanings of these cases. 

As we have already stated, the Accusative denotes motion 
towards. 

These cases called in the help of Adverbs to make their meaning 
more precise, and, when these adverbs had become fixed in this use by 
custom, they were treated as a separate part of speech, and called 
Prepositions. 

Prepositions do not, properly speaking, “govern” the cases which 
they precede. The case is really the governing element in the expression : 
the Preposition only serves to make clear the exact sense in which 
itis used. But as language developed, the Prepositions mastered the 
cases. As the horse in the fable called in the man to help him against 
the stag, and allowed him to get on his back, and then found that he 
himself had lost his liberty, so the cases called in the help of the 
Prepositions, and then found themselves weakened, and finally de- 
stroyed. In Modern Greek, Italian, French, and English the cases 


: 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 29 


have disappeared, wholly, or in part, and the Prepositions do the work 
which they once did. 

For example we say of a man where the Greeks said dvOpamov and 
to a man where the Greeks said dv@pare. 

In the Greek of the New Testament we can sce this process going 
on. Prepositions are used with the case of a noun, where the case 
alone sufficed in Classical Greek. 

For example the simple Dative was used in Classical Greek to 
express the Instrument; but in later Greek ¢v with the Dative was 
so used. 

Example: Lord, shall we strike with the sword ? 

Kupte, ei matdéopev €v payaipn; Lk. xxii. 49, 

In estimating the meaning of a Prepositional phrase (i.e. a Pre- 
position followed by a noun) the proper course to adopt is first to 
consider the force of the case of the noun and then to add to this the 
root meaning of the Preposition. The combination of the two ideas 
will generally explain the meaning of the phrase. 

If the proper force of the case is always kept in view, it will explain 
how the same preposition can have such wholly different meanings with 
different cases. 

We may see the joint influence of the case of the noun and the root 
meaning of the Preposition best by considering some Preposition that 
is used with all three cases. 

For example mapa means beside. 

When it is used with the Accusative it denotes Motion To ) beside 
and motion alongside of, hence it gets the derived meanings of contrary 
to, beyond. 

Examples: And having departed from thence, Jesus went to the 
side of the Sea of Galilee. 

kai peraBas éxeiOev 6 Incods nAGev mapa Thy Oddacoay ris TadsAaias. 

Mt. xv. 29. 

And as he sowed some fell by the way side. 

Kal ev TO OTElpey avroy a pev Erecev Tapa THY Oddv. 

Mt. xiii. 4. 

When it is used with the Genitive it denotes MoTION FRomM beside. 

Example: And they knew truly that I came forth from thee. 

kai €yvacav adnbas bre mapa aod e&HdOov. Jn. xvii. 8, 

When it is used with the Dative it denotes rest beside and is 
translated near. 


30 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Example: Jesus...taking a child, set him near himself. 

"Inoods...€midaSdspevos maidiov éotnoev aito wap’ éavr@. Lk. ix. 47. 

By analysing the following examples in the way suggested in the 
English rendering below the force both of the Preposition and the case 
may be clearly seen. 


eis THY modu, to the city inwards. 
dm’ avtov. from him away. 
€v TO TOTO. at the place within. 
_ oY avTe. in association with him. 


2. The uses of the Prepositions given in the following table are 
those which occur most frequently in New Testament Greek. 

The use of Classical Greek is somewhat different. 

The meaning printed in capitals after each Preposition may be 
regarded as indicating the root meaning of the Preposition ; it also 
generally indicates the meaning of the Preposition when compounded 
withaverb. Thestudentis advised to master these meanings thoroughly 
by learning them by heart, and to pick up the derived meanings in the 
course of his reading, remembering what has been stated above as to 
the importance of the meaning of the case in deciding the meaning of 
a Prepositional phrase. 

It may be well to add that it is sometimes difficult to trace the 
steps by which some of the derived meanings of the Prepositions have 
been reached: this is especially the case with some of the meanings of 
xara With the accusative, and émi with the genitive. 

Such peculiar meanings must be learnt as idioms. 


8. Prepositions connected with the Accusative only. 

dyad. UP. Occurs only in the New Testament in such phrases as 
ava dnvapiov a penny each, ava pécov in the midst. 

cis. INTO (to the interior), to, with a view to, for. 

4. Prepositions connected with the Genitive only. 

avti. OVER AGAINST, ¢nstead of, in return for. 

dro. AWAY FROM (from the exterior). 

ék. our oF (from the interior). 

mpd. IN FRONT OF, before of place or time. 


5. Prepositions connected with the Dative only. 

ev. IN of place or time, among. In the N.T. with or by of the 
instrument or agent. 

guv. TOGETHER WITH. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK Si 


6. Prepositions connected with the Accusative and Genitive. 
Oud. THROUGH. With Accusative on account of, owing to. 
With Genitive through, throughout, by means of. 
kata. DOWN. With Accusative down along, through, during, with 
regard to, according to, also distributively as car’ 
eros year by year. 
With Genitive down from, down upon, against. 
perd. AMONG. With Accusative after. 
With Genitive with, among. 
mepi. AROUND. With Accusative about, around of place or time. 
With the Genitive about, concerning, on account of. 
tmép. OVER. With Accusative above, beyond. 
With Genitive on behalf of, for the sake of, con- 
cerning. 
tmdé. UNDER. With the Accusative wnder. 
With the Genitive wnder the influence of, hence by 
of the agent after passive verbs. 
7. Prepositions connected with the Accusative, Genitive and 
Dative. 
_émi. Upon. With Accusative Upon (placed on), up to, as far as. 
With Genitive on, in the presence of, in the time of. 
With Dative on, at, on account of, in addition to. 
mapd. BESIDE. With Accusative to the side of, beside, beyond, 
contrary to. 
With Genitive from beside, from (of persons). 
With Dative near (generally of persons), 
mpds. TOWARDS. With Accusative towards, up to, in reference to, 
with regard to. 
With Genitive from (only once in N.T. in sense 
of for, Acts xxvii. 34). 
With Dative at, close to. 


APPENDIX TO SECTION I 
PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION: FOR REFERENCE ONLY 


The meaning of prepositions when compounded with verbs, nouns, 
etc. is not always the same as that which they have when they are 
connected with the case of a noun. Examples of some important 
compound words are given below. 


32 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 
In cases where the meaning of the compound word is very different 
from that of the simple word it is printed in capitals. 


dppi: Root meaning around. Only occurs in composition in N.T, 
dppuBdddewv to throw round. 


dvd: (1) Root meaning up. 


avaBaty ew to go up. 

avexew to hold up, Mid. to hold one’s self firm, bear 
with, TO ENDURE. 

avurrdvat to cause to stand up. 

avaxeo Oat to lie up, recline, sit at table. 


(2) Over again, anew, thoroughly. 
avaytyyookev TO READ. 


avarravew to give rest to thoroughly, to refresh, 
dvacravpovv to crucify afresh. 
(3) Back, backwards, to and fro. 

dvakpivew to judge by looking through a series of particulars, 
to examine, to interrogate. 

dvamimrety to fall back, to lean back, to recline. 

avaorpéede to turn back, to walk to and fro, to pass one’s 
time, TO DWELL, 10 BEHAVE ONE’S SELF. 

avaorpopn CONDUCT. 

dvrt. (1) Root meaning opposite, against, over against. 

avridixos an opponent in a law suit. 

avréxery to hold before or against. Mid. to keep one’s self 
opposite anyone, TO CLEAVE 0. 

avTideye to speak against. 

avrixero Oar to be set over against, oppose. 

avTiypirtos Antichrist. 


(2) Requital. 

dvramodiwWsva to repay, requite. 
(3) Substitution. 

avOuraros a Proconsul, 


ard : (1) Root meaning away from. 


am épxopat to depart from. 
dmoxadirtrev to withdraw a cover from, uncover. 
amoxpiveww to give a decision from one’s self, Mid. and Pass. 


Aor, TO ANSWER. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 33 


drodoyeicGa _—to talk one’s self off from a charge, defend one’s 


self. 
(2) In an intensive sense. 
dméyxev to have to the full, also in sense (1) to be away, to 
be distant, Mid. to hold one’s self off from, 
abstain. 
atroxteivew to lall. 
amoAdvvat to destroy. 
(3) In the sense of the Latin re, back again. 
amod.ovat to give back, Mid. to give away for one’s own 


advantage, TO SELL. 
admo\auBavey to take back, recover. 


Sia: (1) Root meaning through. 


Ouepyer Oar to go through. 
(2) Continuity of time or completeness of action. 
Ovapevery to remain or continue. 


duvaxaGapifew to cleanse throughly. 
(3) Distribution or separation, 

Siaxpivery to separate, make distinctions, learn by discri- 
mination, decide, Mid. be at variance with one’s 
self, HESITATE, DOUBT, to distribute. 

(4) Transition or change. 


ScaBddrey to throw across, TO SLANDER. 
dtaroyeto Oat to think different things, argue, discuss. 
dvadAdooeuy to change, reconcile. 
els: Root meaning into. 
eioépxer Oar to go into. 
éx: (1) Root meaning out of, from inside. 
exBadAew to cast out. 
e&épyer Oa to come out. 
ewkAnola a body of men called out from their homes, an 
assembly, a church. 
exheyeo Oat to choose out. 
ekvoravat to throw out of position, to astonish. 
(2) Removal, separation. 
éxOvew to strip off. 


év: (1) Root meaning in. 
évepyelv to work in, effect, 


N. 3 


(84 


EVOLKELV 
, 
evexXev 


A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


to dwell in. 
to have in, to hold in, c. dat. to have a grudge 
against any one, TO BE ENRAGED WITH. 


(2) Motion into or towards. 


euPaivew 
hae 
ev Oveuy 


emayyedrceo Oar 


émikaelv 
> [y 
emexe 
émOupety 


éduoravat 
> , 
émiotacOGa 


to go into, 
to put on. 


émt: (1) Root meaning on or upon. 


to announce concerning one’s self, TO PROMISE. 

to put a name upon, to surname, Mid. to call 
upon for one’s self, appeal to. 

to hold on or upon, apply, observe, give attention 
to, hold forth, present. 

to keep the 6vuds turned upon a thing, set one’s 
heart on, desire. 

to place at or over, Mid. to stand by. 

perhaps Ionic form of Mid. of édiorava, to place 
one’s attention on, TO UNDERSTAND. 


(2) Motion towards. 


, , 
éemepxerOar 


(3) Upwards. 


e€matpelv 


to come upon, to be coming on, to be at hand, to 
be future. 


to lift up. 


(4) Superintendence. 


émwioKomos 
emloTaTns 


an overseer or bishop. 
one who is set over, a master. 


kata: (1) Root meaning down from, down. 


xataBaivew 
katappovew 
kabicew 
cabvoTavat 


to go down. 

to look down on, despise. 

to make to sit down, to sit down. 
to set down, appoint. 


(2) In succession, in order, 


carapricew 
KkadeEns 
(3) Under. 


t 
KQATEXELV 


(4) Thoroughly. 


katepyacerOau 
careoOiew 


to set in order, to mend. 
in succession. 


to hold under, hold fast, restrain. 


to work out thoroughly, accomplish, 
to eat up. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 35 


karaxpaoda to use to the full. 
karaNvew to dissolve, undo, from loosing garments and loads 
at the end of a journey, To LODGE, 
(5) Opposition. 


katrapao Oa to pray against, curse. 
Kataxpiveww to give judgment against, condemn. 
peta: (1) Root meaning among. 

peréxyew to share, partake of. 

(2) Change, alteration. 
peraBaivew to pass from one place to another, remove, depart. 
poeravoety to change one’s mind, repent. 

(3) After, in search of. 
pera éurew to send for. 


mapa: (1) Root meaning beside, along, near. 
mapayyéh\Aew —_‘ to transmit a message along a line, TO COMMAND. 
mapaBdadew to put one thing beside another for the sake of 
comparison, to compare. 


mapaBorn a comparison, a parable. 
mapéxetv to hold beside, offer, show. 
mapaxaneiv to call to one’s side, summon, admonish, exhort, 
entreat, comfort, encourage. 
mapakAnros one called in to one’s aid, one who pleads one’s 
cause before a judge, an advocate, a helper, the 
Comforter. 
(2) Aside. 
mapaireio Oat to avert by entreaty, refuse, beg pardon, excuse 
one’s self. 
(3) Transgression or neglect. 
mapakovety to hear amiss, disobey. 
mapaBaiy ew to go by the side of, violate, transgress. 


wept: Root meaning in a circuit about, around. 
mepyBad)euv to throw round, to clothe. 


mepimareiy to walk about, to conduct one’s self. 
Tr EpLTEepV ELV to circumcise. 

mpo: Root meaning before of place or time, forth. 
mm poayew to lead before or go before. 


mpoyiyvacke to know before. 
m popyrevery to foretell, to speak forth. 


36 


A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


apes: (1) Root meaning towards. 


m™pooéepxer Oat 
1 poowéxelv 


™ poo kaNetv 
m poo kuvely 


(2) On or at. 


1 POTKOTTELY 


to come to, approach. 

to bring near to, attend, rpocéxewv Eavr@ to attend 
to one’s self, beware. 

to call to one’s self. 

(with the dative) to kiss the hand to, fall down 
before, worship. 


to strike on, to stumble. 


civ: (1) Root meaning together with. 


ovvayew 
ouvepyos 
ouvexev 
ouviévat 


(2) Thoroughly. 


ouvTnpel 


to gather together. 

a fellow-worker. 

to hold together, to constrain, oppress. 

to bring together in the mind, TO UNDERSTAND. 


to keep safe. 


trép: Root meaning over, above, beyond. 


umepéxelv 


to have or hold over, to excel, 


v6: Root meaning under, hence of subjection or inferiority. 


vmayev 
Umakovew 
Umdapxelv 
Umomevev 


to lead under, withdraw one’s self, depart. 

to listen to, obey, submit to. 

to begin below, to begin, to commence, TO BE. 
to remain under, to endure. 


Special attention should be paid to the meanings of the compounds 
of yew, ayyéAAew, Kpivev. 


Note on the “‘ perfective action” of certain prepositions. 

Certain prepositions such as dé, did, card, oJv sometimes practically 
lose their local meaning in composition, and denote that the action of the 
verb with which they are connected is to be regarded as fully accomplished, 
see examples given above. 

_ This is especially the case with verbs which in their simple form denote 
incomplete action, such as 6yijcxew to be dying, devyew to be fleeing. 

Compare to eat up, to knock in, to hear out, to follow up in English, and 
devorare, efficere, consequi in Latin. 

For a full discussion of the question see Dr J. H. Moulton’s Prolegomena, 


pp. 113—118, 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK oi 


SUBJECT AND PREDICATE 


8. The Subject of a Finite verb is in the Nominative Case. 

(A verb is said to be Finite unless it is in the Infinitive Mood.) 

Example: The crowd hears, Turba audit. 6 dydos dkover. 

9. The Subject of a verb in the Infinitive mood is put in the 
Accusative Case, 

Example: They say that the men know. Dicunt viros noscere. 
A€yovar Tos avOpamous yryvockey. 

10. The verb agrees with its subject in number and person. 


Exception. In Classical Greek a noun or pronoun in the neuter plural 
is regularly followed by a verb in the singular number; but in N.T. Greek 
there are many exceptions to this rule, especially when the neuter noun 


denotes persons. 
Example: The names of the twelve Apostles are these. 


Tay 6é dddexa drocré\wy Ta évéuaTa éotw Taira. 
Matt. x. 2. 


but: Children shall rise up against parents, 
éravacTnoovra: Téxva éml yovels. Matt. x. 21. 


Compare Jas. ii. 19, John x. 8. 

11. Some verbs cannot form a complete predicate by themselves. 
They require to be supplemented by a noun or adjective which is 
called the predicative noun or adjective or the complement. 

Such verbs, the most important of which is the verb éo be, are 
called copulative verbs. Generally speaking, they are such verbs 
as signify to become, to appear, to be chosen, to be named, and the like. 

The Predicative Noun or Adjective must be in the same case as 
the subject. Predicative Adjectives agree with the subject in number 
and gender as well as in case. 

Example: The kingdom becomes great. Regnum magnum fit. 4 
Baothela yiyverat peydAn. 


CASES AND THEIR MEANINGS 


12. Inflection is a change made in the form of a word to denote a 
modification of its meaning, or to show the relationship of the word to 
some other word in the sentence. 

Examples: bird becomes birds in the plural: in the same way man 
becomes men. 

The pronoun 4e is used when it is the subject of a sentence ; but it 
is changed into Aim when it is the object. 

Inflections are comparatively rare in English. 

Latin and Greek nouns, pronouns and adjectives have inflections 


38 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


to show number and case: adjectives and some pronouns have inflec- 
tions to show gender as well. 

To give a list of these inflections is called giving a Declension, or 
Declining a word, because the cases other than the Nominative are 
considered to fall away (declinare) from the form of the Nominative. 
For the same reason the cases other than the Nominative are some- 
times called oblique or slanting cases. 

Hence also the origin of the term Case from the Latin casus, 
falling. 

The cases actually in use are seven in number. 

Their names are Nominative, Vocative, Accusative, Genitive, 
Dative, Ablativet, Locative (not given in the tables of declensions in 
grammars). 

The commonest uses of these cases are as follows. 

The nominative is used to express the subject of a finite verb. 

The vocative is used in addressing a person or thing. 

The accusative is used to express the direct object of a transitive 
verb. 

The genitive is used to limit the meaning of another noun, and to 
denote various relations, most of which are expressed in English by 
the use of the preposition of or by the possessive case. 

The dative is used to express that to or for which anything is 
done. This includes the dative of the indirect object after transitive | 
verbs which is generally rendered into English by the preposition to. 

The ablative! is used to express separation, or motion from. 

The locative is used to express the place at which anything 
happens. 

In English we express the various relationships of words to one 
another, which are expressed in Greek and Latin by the use of case- 
endings, by means of Prepositions, or by changing the order of words 
in a sentence. 

Consider the following sentence : 

The man showed the way to the son of the farmer with a stick. 

Homo monstravit viam  filio  agricolae baculo. 

Nom. ace. dat. gen. abl. (in Latin). 

6 dvOpamos eMeev rHv dddv TO vid Tod yewpyod pdBdq. 


1 In Greek the Ablative case has the same form as the Genitive and is 
not given as a separate case in the tables of declensions in most Greek 
Grammars, (See page 28.) 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 39 


Here we see the use of Prepositions in English, and Cases in Latin 
and Greek. In English we show that the word way is the object of 
the sentence by putting it after the verb. In Latin and Greek we 
show that it is the object by putting it in the Accusative Case. 


NOTES ON THE USE OF THE OBLIQUE CASES 


13. The vocative case is used in addressing a person or thing. 


Example: Jesus, Master, have mercy upon us. 
Jesu, praeceptor, miserere nostri. 
*Inood émiordra, éhenoov jpas. Lk. xvii. 13. 


In N.T. Greek the Nominative case with the article is often used instead 
of the Vocative. 

Example: Yea, Father, because it thus seemed good to Thee. 

val, 6 marhp, OTe otrws eddokta éyévero eumpoobev cov. 
ikeexee ole 

14, The root idea of the accusative case is that of extension and 
so of motion towards. 

The Object is the name of that towards which the action of the 
verb goes forth. 

This is also clearly seen from the fact that all prepositions which 
‘denote motion towards, such as ad, contra, «is, mpds, are followed by 
an Accusative. 

In Latin the Accusative without a preposition is used to denote 
the place towards which one is going, if the place is a town or a small 
island.—I am going to Rome. Eo Romam. 


15. The Accusative is used to express the direct object of a 
transitive verb. 


Example: We beheld his glory. Spectavimus gloriam ejus. 
eGeacdpeba tHv SdEav avrod. Jn. i, 14. 

In English there is no means of distinguishing the subject from the 
object of a sentence by changing the form of the words (except in the 
case of personal and relative pronouns’. The only way in which they 
can be distinguished is by the order of the words in the sentence :— 
the subject comes before the verb, and the object after. 


40 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


16. The subject of a verb in the Infinitive mood is put in the 
Accusative case. 
Example: The crowd...... said that it thundered. 
Turba dicebat tonitruum esse factum. 


eit 


6 dyNos...€Aeyev Bpovrny yeyovévat. Jn. xii. 29. 


17. Cognate Accusative. Any verb whose meaning permits it 
may take ,after it an Accusative of cognate or kindred meaning: in 
some cases it takes a direct object as well. 

Examples: They rejoiced with great joy. 

éxdpnoav xapav peyadny. Mt, ii. 10. 

Ye load men with loads difficult to be borne. 

oprigere rovs dvOpamovs popria dueBdorakta. 
Lk. xi. 46. 

I fed you with milk. 

yada tyas émdrioa. 1 Cor. iii. 2. 

The same construction occurs in Latin. 
I have lived a long life. Longam vitam vixi. 


18. The Accusative may also denote extent of time or space. 


Examples: They remained not many days. 
Manserunt non multos dies. (Beza.) 
euevay ov moAXas nuépas. Jn. ii, 12, 
He withdrew from them about a stone’s cast. 
kal avtos ameomacdn dm aitav aoel idov Bodny 
Lk. xxii, 41. 
So in Latin—A wall ten feet high. 
Murus decem pedes altus, 


19. Two accusatives with one verb. Verbs meaning to ask 
questions, to demand, to teach, and (Greek only) to clothe and unclothe, 
and to remind, may take two object accusatives. 


Examples: I too will ask you one question. 
Interrogabo vos et ego unum sermonein. 
Epatno@ tvuas Kayo éyov éva, Mt. xxi. 24, 
And he began to teach them many things. 
Et coepit illos docere multa. 
kal #pEato SiddoKxew avtovs mwoAAd, Mk. vi. 34. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 41 


They took off from him the purple, and put his own garments on him. 
e€éSvcav airoy thy mopupar, kai évédvoav airév ra iuaria adbrod. 
Mk. xv. 20. 
Who shall remind you of my ways. 
ds buds dvauvyoe tas ddovs pov. UCorsivel 7 


20. Whena verb followed by two Accusatives is put into the passive voice 
the word in the Accusative denoting a person becomes the subject of the 
passive verb, and the other word in the accusative remains unchanged. 

Examples : : And John was clothed with camel’s hair. 

kal jv 6 ’Iwdayys évdedupévos tptxas kaupdrov. Mk. i. 6. 
He was instructed in the way of the Lord. 
ovTos mY KaTnXnMEvos THY Oddy TOD Kuplov. 

Acts xviii. 25. 

When a verb followed by a Dative of the person and an Accusative of 
the thing is put into the Passive voice, the word denoting the person becomes 
the subject of the verb and the word in the Accusative remains unaltered. 

Example: We have been thought worthy by God to be entrusted with 
the Gospel!. dedoximdoueba bd Tod Oe0d micrevOjvat TO evaryyéXwov. 

1 Thess, ii. 4. 


21. Verbs meaning to choose, to call, to appoint, to make, may 
take a Predicate Accusative as well as the Object Accusative. 
Example: Why callest thou me good? 
Quid me dicis bonum ? 
Ti pe Néyers ayaGor ; Mk. x. 18, 


22. Adverbial Accusative. The Accusative of certain nouns, pronouns 
and adjectives is sometimes found in an Adverbial sense. 
Examples: And every one that striveth is temperate in all things. 
mas O€ 6 dywrifduevos mdavTa éyKpareveTat. 
1 Cor, ix. 25. 
Hurting him in no wise, 
pndev BrAAdWav avrov. Lk. iv. 35. 
Under this head may be included such phrases as 
70 dowdy, for the rest. 
To Kad’ judpay, daily. 
év tpdmov, in like manner. 


1 The active form of this clause would be—God entrusted the Gospel to 
us. émrlorevoe huiv 6 Oeds TO evaryyédiov. 


42 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


THE GENITIVE CASE 


23. The Genitive case is an adjectival or descriptive case; a 
noun in the Genitive case is generally connected with another noun 
which it qualifies very much in the same way as an adjective. ‘The 
Genitive case is generally expressed in English by the use of the 
preposition of or by the Possessive case. 

In Greek the Ablative case has always the same form as the Genitive 
case ; the two cases are therefore treated as one in most grammars, and 
the name “Genitive” given to both. 

The Ablative case denotes separation from and expresses many of 
the relations which are expressed by the Ablative case in Latin. 

To avoid conflicting with established usage the name “ Genitive” is 
used here in its accustomed sense to cover both the Genitive case 
proper and the Ablative case: but the student should always keep in 
mind that under this common name there are really included two 
distinct cases. 

The most important uses of the Genitive are as follows: 


24. Possessive Genitive denoting possession. 
Example: The father’s house. Patris domus. 17 rov marpds oikia. 


25. The Genitive of Source or Material. 
Examples: The righteousness of faith (i.e. that springs from faith). 
Justitia fidei. Sscatocivn ricteas. 
° A herd of swine (i.e. consisting of swine). 
Grex porcorum. dyéAn xoipev. 


26. Partitive Genitive expressing the whole after words denoting 
a part. 
Example: Many of the Samaritans. Multi Samaritanorum., 
modXol Tay Sapaperrav. 
(This Partitive use of the Genitive explains its use after verbs meaning 


to touch, to taste, to partake of, because only part of the object is affected 
by the Action of the verb.) 


Subjective and Objective Genitive. 


27. The Genitive case is described as Subjective when the noun 
in the Genitive is the name of the subject of the action denoted by 
the word on which it depends, 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 43 


Example: Who shall separate us from the love of Christ ? 
Quis separabit nos a caritate Christi ? 
Tis 7Mas Xwpioe. dd THS ayamns Tod Xpiorod ; 
Rom. viii. 35. 
i.e. Who can separate us from the love which Christ feels for us? 


28. The Genitive case is described as Objective when the noun 
in the Genitive is the name of the object of the action denoted by the 
word on which it depends. 

Example; For the preaching of the cross is to them that are perish- 

ing foolishness. 

Verbum enim crucis pereuntibus quidem stultitia est. 

6 Ndyos yap 6 TOU Gravpod Tois pev arodupévors pwpia 
éoriv. i Corsinis: 

The cross is the object of the preaching. 

It is often very difficult to say whether a noun in the Genitive is 
Subjective or Objective. The context alone can decide the matter. 


29. Genitive of Time. The Genitive is used in Greek to express 
the time within which anything takes place. 
. Example: He came to Jesus during the night. 
Hie venit ad lesum nocte. 
ottos HAGev mpos Tov “Incody vuKrés. 
Jn. iii. 2, 
In Latin the Ablative is used to express time when. 
80. Genitive of Price. The Genitive is used in Greek to express 
the price at which anything is sold. 
' Example: Are not two sparrows sold for one farthing ? 
Nonne duo passeres asse veneunt ? 
ovxt Ovo otpovdia accapiov madeira; Mt. x. 29. 


In Latin the Ablative is used to express the price at which anything is 
sold. 


81. The Genitive of Definition limits the meaning of the noun 
with which it goes just like an adjective. It does not occur in Classical 
Greek or Latin. 

Example: The unjust steward. 6 olxovdpos rhs déucias. Lk. xvi. 8. 

This is imitated in the Vulgate by Villicus iniquitatis. 


44, A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Under this head may be classed the Genitive of Apposition, where 
the Genitive takes the place of a word in apposition to the noun on 
which it depends. 

Example: The sign of Circumcision (i.e. consisting in circumcision) 

OnNpelov meptrouns. Rom. iv. 11. 

This construction is common in English: ‘The City of London.’ 


The Genitive after Adjectives 


82. A noun in the Genitive case follows many adjectives denoting 
fullness or want, worthiness or unworthiness, participation. 
Examples: Full of grace and truth. mdAnpns xdperos cal ddnOetas. 
Worthy of death or bonds. d&vos Gavdrov 7) decpav. 
Sharing the sufferings. péroyos rév madnpuararv. 
évoxos guilty of or subject to is followed by a Genitive of the penalty or of 


the crime as well as a Dative of the Tribunal Matt. xxvi. 66, Heb. ii. 15, 
Mk. iii, 29, 1 Cor. xi, 27, Matt. v. 22. 


83. The Comparative Degree of the adjective is sometimes 
followed by a noun in the Genitive in Greek. 
Example: Thou shalt see greater things than these. 
Majora his videbis. 
pei(@ TovTay on. Jn. i. 50. 
In Latin the Ablative is used in this construction, 


Genitive with Verbs 


34. Some verbs both in Latin and Greek are followed by a noun 
in the Genitive case instead of in the Accusative case. Such verbs, and 
also those which are followed by a noun in the Dative case, are not 
really exceptions to the rule that all transitive verbs are followed by 
an object in the Accusative case, for they are not properly transitive 
when they are followed by a case other than the Accusative. We 
have similar verbs in English such as to think of, to laugh at, which 
are always followed by a noun preceded by a preposition. 

The student must observe the use of each verb as he finds it. The 
use varies greatly, even in the case of the same verbs. Many of those 
which are followed by a Genitive may be followed by an Accusative as 
well. 

In N.T. Greek the Genitive may follow many verbs of the following 
meanings, 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 45 


(1) Verbs where the Partitive meaning is obvious. 
Verbs meaning to partake of, to taste, to touch, to seize, to hold. 
peradapBavew, peréxery, yeverOur, drrec Oa, emda Bdvecbat, Kparety etc. 
The partitive sense may be seen by comparing éxpdrnoe ths xeupss 
avrijs He took her by the hand—a part of the body only—with ékpdrycev 
avtov He serzed him. 
(2) Verbs meaning to. be full or to fill. 
miumAdvat, wAnpody, yee, yepicew etc, 
(3) Verbs denoting perception. 
to hear dxovew (also followed by the accusative case). 
(4) Verbs denoting emotion etc. 
émiOupeiv to desire. ermeneioOar to give heed to. 
tuyxdve to attain. dvéyeoOac _ to bear with. 
(5) Verbs denoting separation or abstention from or hindering, 
want or need. 


droorepetoGa to deprive of. beta Bat beseech. 
maveo Oat to cease from. xpncew, votepeiv, to lack or 
amréxecOa to abstain from. Neier Oa need. 


(6) Verbs meaning to rule or to excel. 
Gpyxew, xupreve etc. to rule. duahépew to excel. 


(7) Verbs meaning to remember or to forget. 
| prpynoKeo Oat to remember. émravOaveaba to forget. 
Punpovevely 9 
(8) Many verbs compounded with xara are followed by a simple 
Genitive case. Such are 

KaTayeAay to laugh at. 
katraxavyacOa to boast oneself against, 
katagppoveiy _ to despise. 


The Genitive Absolute 


35. A noun or pronoun and a participle may stand together by 
themselves in the Genitive case, if the noun or pronoun does not de- 
note the same person or thing as the subject or object of the sentence. 

This construction is called the Genitive Absolute. 

Absolute means loosed, from the Latin Absolutus: phrases of this 
kind are called Absolute because they are loosed in construction from 
the rest of the sentence. 


46 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


The Genitive Absolute should generally be translated by an Ad- 
verbial Clause in English introduced by the conjunctions when, since, 
although etc. Which of these conjunctions is the proper one to use 
is determined by the context. 

Examples: When the devil was cast out, the dumb man spoke, 

kal exBAnOévros Tov Satpoviov ehdAnoev 6 K@dos. 
Mt. ix. 33. 
While the bridegroom tarried they all slumbered and slept. 
xpovitovros b€ rou vupdiov evvoragav macat kai exddevdov. 
Mt. xxv. 5. 

N.B. The rule given above as to the noun or pronoun not referring 
to the same person as the subject or object of the sentence is generally 
observed in Classical Greek. 

But it is frequently broken in N.T. Greek, as the following example 
shows : 

Since he had nothing wherewith to pay, his lord commanded him 
to be sold. 
pay Exovros S€ avrov dmodobvat éxéhevoev adrov 6 xupios mpabjva. 
Mt. xviii. 25. 


The same construction is found in Latin, but the case there used is the 
Ablative. 

A similar construction. is also rarely found in English. 

Example: This done, he went home. 

Here This done is a phrase consisting of a pronoun and a participle, but 
they are in the Nominative case, and not in the Genitive case as in Greek. 


THE DATIVE CASE 


36. The Dative case denotes that to or for which anything is or is 
done. In Greek the Dative case also does the work of the Locative 
and Instrumental cases which had distinct forms in the language from 
which it was derived. In Latin the work of the Instrumental case ig 
done by the Ablative, and the Locative still exists as a separate form 
in certain words. 


37. The Dative of the Indirect Object is used atier verbs of giving, 
showing, etc. 


¢ . . . 
Example: They promised to give him money. 
Promiserunt el pecuniam se daturos. 
kal emnyyei\avto uiT@ apyvpwov dovva. Mk. xiv. 11. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 47 


88. The Dative of Interest may be used after any verb to denote 
the person or thing whose interest is affected by the action of the verb. 
Examples: Be not anxious for your life. 
Ne solliciti sitis animae vestrae. 
B71) pepiyvare TH Wux7 bpav. Mt. vi. 25. 
To his own master he stands or falls. 
Domino suo stat aut cadit. 
TO Wim kupio ornKe if) wimret Rom. xiv. 4, 
89. The Dative of Possession after civa, yéveoOa. 
The Dative is used after these verbs to denote the person to whom 
the person or thing named as the subject of the verb is said to belong. 
Examples: Whose name was John. 
Cui nomen Johannes. 
dvopa aiT@ “lwdvyns. Jn. i. 6. 
If any man should have a hundred sheep... 
Si fuerint alicui centum oves... 
eav yévnrai tit dvOpam@ éxatov mpoBara. Mt. xviii. 12. 
40. Locative uses of the Dative. 
The Dative is used very rarely in the N.T. to express place where. See 
Acts xiv. 8, 16, Romans iv. 12, Jas. ii. 25, Jn. xix. 2. 
The Dative is used to express the time at which anything takes place. 
Example: On the third day. 
Tertia die. 
Th Tpitn HuEpa. 
Note that in Latin the Ablative is used here. 
41. The Dative is used to express the sphere to which a quality is 


referred. 
Examples: The poor in spirit. 


IMGY, Sayial, Palle 


of mT@XOl TS Mvevpare. Mt. v. 3. 
An Alexandrian by descent. 
*AdeEavipeds TO yévet. Acts xviii. 24. 


The Dative is also sometimes used to express duration of time. 
Lk. viii. 29, Jn. ii. 20, Acts viii. 11, xiii. 20, Rom. xvi. 25. 
42, The Dative used to denote the Instrument etc. 
The Dative is used to express the cause or manner of the action of 
the verb or the instrument by which it is carried out. 
Examples: Cause. They were broken off because of their unbelief. 
TH amvotia e£exAacOnoar. Rom, xi. 20. 


48 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Manner. I partake with thanks. 
xdpure petéxo. 1 Cor. x. 30. 
Instrument. But the chaff he will burn with un- 
quenchable fire. 
ro O€ dxupov Kkaraxavoe mupi acBéoto. Mt. iii. 12. 


Very rarely the Dative expresses the Agent after a passive verb. See 
Lk, xxiii. 15, Mt. vi. 1, Acts i. 3. 


43. The Dative of resemblance or union. 

The Dative is used with all words implying resemblance, union or 
approach. This includes verbs, adjectives, adverbs, and nouns. 

For example verbs meaning to follow, to meet, to make like are 
followed by a Dative. 


The Dative with Verbs 


44. The Dative is used after certain verbs which in English are 
followed by a direct object in the Accusative case. 

These verbs, although transitive in English, are intransitive in 
Greek, and cannot therefore have a direct object. 

There are also verbs which are transitive in Greek, but intransitive 
in English, as for example evayyedifew to preach the Gospel to, hevyew 
to flee from. 

The following may be taken as examples of verbs which are followed 
by a Dative case in Greek. 

Certain verbs meaning to worship  mpockuveiv. 

to serve Sovdrevew, Siaxoveiv, dmanpereiv. 
to obey melOecOa, vmakovev. 

to believe TLOTEVELY. 

torebuke = émuripav, éuBpiar. 

to command emirdcoew, mapayyéAdew. 

See Lk. viii. 24—29 for several examples of the use of some of these 
verbs 

The Dative also follows verbs compounded with certain prepositions 
such as ev, ovv, emi, mapd, mpds. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 49 


ADJECTIVES 


45. Adjectives agree with the Nouns which they qualify in 
Number, Gender, and Case. 

This rule also applies to Participles, and adjectival Pronouns, and 
to the Article in Greek. 

Examples : 

Of the wise men. Virorum sapientium. rév copay dvdpav. 

Of these men. Horum virorum. rovrev ray dvdpav. 

The laws written for the world. Leges mundo scriptae. oi ra 
KOOH@ ypaddpuevor vdpor. 

An Adjective may be either attributive or predicative. 


46. An Attributive Adjective simply qualifies its noun without 
the intervention of the verb ¢o be or any other verb. 

Example: The good man. Bonus vir, 6 dyads dynp. 

A Predicative Adjective is connected to its noun by the verb to be 
or some other Copulative verb, and forms with the verb and iis subject 
a complete sentence. 

Example: The man is good. Vir bonus est. 6 avyp ayadds. 

(See further sections 75 aad 76.) 


47. The Adjective used as a noun. 
An Adjective or Participle (generally with the Article in Greek) 


may be used as a noun. 


Examples: A resurrection of the just and the unjust. 
Resurrectio justorum et iniquorum. 


dvdoracis Otxkalwy te Kal adickav. Acts xxiv. 15. 
Blessed are the poor in spirit. 
paxdpio. of mrwyol TO mvevpar Mt. v. 3. 


48. The neuter singular of an Adjective preceded by an Article 
is often used as an abstract noun. 
Example: The foolishness of God is wiser than men and the 
weakness of God is stronger than men. 
TO papoy Tov Gcod coporepov Tov advOpamay eaTiv, Kal TO daOeves 


1 Cor. i. 25. 
4 


Tov Oeov iaxupdrepov TaY avOparerv. 


N. 


50 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


PRONOUNS 


49, A Pronoun has been defined as a word which is used instead 
of a noun; but many words are classed as Pronouns which are also 
used as Adjectives to define or point out nouns. 

Personal, Reflexive and Relative Pronouns can stand only in 
place of nouns. 

Demonstrative, Interrogative, Indefinite and Possessive Pro- 
nouns can be used either in place of nouns, or adjectivally. 

50. Personal Pronouns. J, thou, he, she, me, him etc. 

As the ending of a Greek or Latin verb generally shows what person 
and number the subject is, the Nominative of the Personal Pronouns is 
seldom used in these languages except for emphasis. 

Thus if we wish to translate we hear it is quite sufficient to write 
audimus in Latin and dxovopey in Greek. 

Example of the use of the Personal Pronoun in the Nominative for 
emphasis : 

We heard out of the Law that Christ abideth for ever, and how 
sayest thou that the Son of Man must be lifted up? 

Nos audivimus ex lege, quia Christus manet in aeternum; et 
quomodo tu dicis: Oportet exaltari Filium hominis? 

pels NKOVTamEY EK TOD Vopuov STL 6 Xpioros pever eis TOY aldva, Kal 
mas héyets od Ore Set DYwOnvat Tov vidv Tod dvOp@mov; Jn. xii. 34, 

51. All cases of atrdés are used in the N.T. for the Personal 
Pronoun of the third person, he, she, it etc. But in Attic Greek only 
the cases other than the Nominative are so used: the Nominative case 
always means se/f. 

Examples: I myself. éya adrés. 

The man himself. 6 dvépaos atrés or airés 6 dvOperos. 

This use is found sometimes in the N.T. In the following example 
we find the Nominative of airdés used in the sense of self, and the 
Genitive used as a Personal Pronoun in the sense of hs or of him. 

And John himself had his raiment of camel’s hair, 
autos 5€ 6 “lwdvyns eLyev TO €vdupa avTov amo Tptx@v Kapndov. 
Mt. iii. 4. 

52. The personal pronoun of the third person may also be expressed by 

the demonstrative pronouns ovros and éxetvos. 


Examples: He was in the beginning with God, 
ovros nv &v apxy mpds Tov Oedv, dn. i. 2s 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 51 


éxeivos is always used emphatically, generally with reference to God or 
Christ. It is especially frequent in the writings of St John. 


Examples: But he spake of the temple of his body. 
éxeivos € Edeyev wept Tod vaod Tod oduaros adrod. 
Jn. ii. 21. 
He that saith that he abideth in him ought himself also to walk even as 
he walked. 
6 Néywn év air mévew deter kaOws éxelvos Tepierdrncey Kal adros obrws 
TeplTarety. ied fin, sty (ry 


_ Note that the Feminine Nominative singular and plural forms of of ros 
differ only from the corresponding forms of ai’rés in the breathing and 
accent—airn, ait): avra, airal, 

The forms airod, airs, atrod ete. which are found in some texts of the 
N.T. are contracted forms formed from the Reflexive Pronoun éauréy ete. 
They have generally the same meaning as the simple avrod, airis, adtod. 
53. adrds with the Article before it is used in the sense of the 
same. The man himself, 6 dv@pwmos airés. The same man, 6 ards 
avOpemos. 
Examples: He prayed the third time saying the same words. 
mpoonvéaro €x Tpirov, Tov avTov Adyov cirav. 
Mt, xxvi. 44, 
For thou doest the same things. 
; Ta yap aira mpdocets. Rom. ii. 1. 
This use must be carefully distinguished from those given above. 


54, The Nominative of the Article followed by pév or 6¢ is often 
used as a Personal Pronoun. 

Example: But he, going out, began to publish it much. 

6 b€ eEeAOav jnpEato knpiooew moddd. Mk. i. 45. 

5 pév followed by 6 dé or @Ados 5é must be translated by one... 
another : oi pev followed by oi S¢€ or dAdou 6é must be translated some... 
others. 

Example : 

Some mocked, others said We will hear thee again about this matter. 
oi pev exdevator, of Sé elroy Akovadpueba cov mepi TovTov Kal mahw. 
Acts xvii. 32. 


In N.T. Greek even the Relative Pronoun is used with pév and 6é in the 
sense mentioned above. 

Example: And the husbandmen taking his slaves beat one and killed 
another and stoned another. 

Kal kaBbvTes of yewpryol Tos SovAous abrod dv wey depay, ov dé améxreway, 
dv 6é ENLOoBdAgoav. Mt. xxi. 35. 

Compare also Lk. xxiii. 33, Jn. v. 11, Romans xiv. 2, 5. 


4—2 


52 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


55. Reflexive Pronouns are used either as objects or after a pre- 
position when the person or thing to which they refer is the same as 
the person or thing to which the subject refers. 

The forms common in the N.T. are: 

Myself, ¢uavrov ; Himself, éavtov, avrov. 

Thyself, ceavrov ; Themselves, éavrovs, avrovs. 

(éavrovs is also used for ourselves and yourselves.) 

56. Possessive Pronouns are generally equivalent to the pos- 
sessive Genitive of the Personal Pronoun. 

They are My or mine, pds ; ; Thy or thine, cos. 

Our or ours, npérepos; Your or yours, tperepos. 
Our Father may be translated either 
6 IMETEpOs TaTHp OY 6 TaTHp HUev, 
and the same is the case with the other persons and numbers. 

The Genitive Singular of airdés is used for his, her, its, and the 
Genitive Plural for ¢he’r. When used with nouns these words should 
be called Possessive Adjectives. 

57. Demonstrative Pronouns are used to point out something. 

They are: 


otros this (Latin hic), which generally refers to that which is 
near in place, time or thought. 


exeivos that (Latin dle), which generally refers to that which is 
more remote. 


de, 7Oe, Tdde, this, is rare in the N. T. LK. x. 39, Jas. iv. 13, Rev. i. 1. 
Examples : ; 
This man went down to his house justified rather than that. 
KateBn ovtos Sedtkaiw@pévos eis Tov olkov avTod map éxeivov. Lk. xviii. 14. 
Thus saith the Holy Spirit. 
rade héyer TO TvEvpa TO ayLov. Acts xxi. 11. 
When used with nouns these words should be called Demonstrative 
Adjectives, 
58. The Interrogative Pronoun. ris may take the place of 
either a noun or an adjective. 
Whom did I see? tivas €idov; 
Which men did I see? = rivas dvdpas eidov; 
ris may be used in independent or dependent questions. 


What does he want? tl Bovdera; 
He asks what you want. epata Ti Bovrca Oe. 

59. The Indefinite Pronoun. rs generally means some, any. 
Some one says this. TOUTO A€yet TIS. 


Some man. av Opwr os Ts. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 53 


It is sometimes equivalent to the English article @ or an. 
There was a rich man. 
avOpamds tis Hv movouos. ike xvinl: 

60. The Relative Pronoun who, that etc. is used to connect two 
clauses in a sentence like a conjunction: it always refers back to some 
noun or pronoun in the first of the two clauses, which word is called 
its antecedent. 

In Latin and Greek Relative Pronouns agree with their antecedent 
in gender and number, but Nor in case. 

The case of the Relative Pronoun depends on the function which it 

_performs in the clause in which it stands. 
Examples; I saw the men who came afterwards. 
Vidi homines qui postea venerunt. 
eiSov tovs dvOpamous ot Uatepov AAOov. 

Here homines and av@pamovs are in the Accusative case because 
they are the objects of the verbs in their respective clauses ; but qui 
and oi are in the Nominative case because they are the subjects of the 
verbs in their respective clauses. 

The men, whom you saw, went away. 
Homines, quos vidisti, abierunt. 
of avOpamoat ods cides amndOov. 

Here homines and advépwroa are in the Nominative case because 
they are the subjects of the verbs in their respective clauses ; but guos 
and ovs are in the Accusative case because they are the objects of the 
verbs in their respective clauses. 


61. The Relative Pronoun also agrees with its Antecedent in 
person. 

No change is made in the form of the pronoun to show that its 
person is changed, the change is only shown by the personal ending of 
the verb in cases where the Relative is the subject of a clause. 

Examples : 


You who do this. _I who did this. 
Vos qui hoc FAciris. Ego qui hoc Fuct. 
tpeis ot TovTO moveiTe. ey® Os TovTo* eroinca. 


62. The Antecedent of the Relative may be omitted in cases 
where it can readily be supplied from the context. 
Example: For your Father knoweth what things ye have need of, 
Scit enim Pater vester Cus vobis sit opus. ’ “4 
oldev yap 6 manip tye elav ExETE, Mt. vi. 8. + % 


IN 
cou 7p 


oF 


S 
3 of the 


cs RDACICIMm Cc 


54, _ A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


63. When the Relative would naturally be in the Accusative case 
as the object of the verb in its clause, it is generally assimilated to 
the case of its Antecedent, if this is in the Genitive or Dative. 

Examples : 

Of the water which I shall give. 

€k Tov UOaTos ov eyo dae. Jn. iv. 14. 
If there had been no assimilation this would have been— 

€k Tov Vdatos 6 eym dace. 

At the catch of fishes which they had taken. 

éml TH dypa tav iyOvav fF ovvédaBov. Ibis 6 th 
If there had been no assimilation this would have been— 

éml th G@ypa tav ixdiav Av ovvédaBov. 

64. Ina few instances also where the Relative would naturally be in 
the Dative it is assimilated to the case of its Antecedent. 

Example; Until the day in which he was taken up from us. 

tws THs huépas Hs dvednupdn ad hudr. Acts i. 22. 

If there had been no assimilation this would have been: é@ws rijs 7uépas 7 
averruden ad nucr. 

Compare also Lk, i. 20. 


65. In some cases the Antecedent may be omitted, and the 
Relative assimilated to the omitted Antecedent. 


Examples : And they kept silence, and told no one in those days 
any of the things which they had seen. 


‘ > Vy t \ > ‘ > , > > , fost c , > ‘ 
kal avtol egiynoay Kat ovdevl amnyyeiday ev exeivais Tals nuépas ovdev 
ze ¢ 


Ov €@pakay. Lk. ix. 36. 


If this had been written in full, it would have been—oiSéev rovrav 4 
éopakay, 


‘ 


When Christ comes will he do more signs than these which this 
man did? 
6 Xpiores Grav €dOy, yu) wreiova onpeia romoer dv odTOS eroincer ; 
Jn. vii. 31. 


If this had been written in full, it would have been—rotrov & odros 
émoingey. 


66. The Antecedent may be attracted into the Relative clause, 
while at the same time the Relative is assimilated to it in case. 
If the Antecedent has an article, it is omitted. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 55 


Examples: The multitude began to praise God for all the mighty 
works which they had seen. 
ifp§avto rd wAyOos aiveiv rov Gedy wept racdv dy eidov Suvduewr. 


Dike xix 37. 


If this had been written in full, it would have been—zepi racav 
tev Suvapuewy as eidov. 


That thou mightest know the certainty concerning the things 
wherein thou wast instructed. 

iva éreyva@s repli dv KatnynOns oyov ty doddreav. Lk. i. 4. 

If this had been written out in full, it would have been—zep) 
Tav Adyev ovs KatnxnOns. 


Compare Lk, i. 20, iii. 19, Mt. xxiv. 38, Acts a 18. 


67. Very rarely the Antecedent is assimilated to the case of the 
Relative. 


Examples: Bringing with them one Mnason of Cyprus, an early disciple, 
with whom we should lodge. 
dyovres wap’ @ fevicOwpev Mvdowvt ru Kurply, dpxaly pabyrz. 
Acts xxi. 16. 
If there had been no assimilation this would have been : 
dyovres Mydowva tia Kuimpioy dpxatov pabyrhv map’ @ tevicbdGuer. 
Ye became obedient to the form of teaching whereunto ye were delivered. 
umnkovcare eis dv mapeddOnre TUTov didaxjs. Rom. vi. 17. 


Compare also 1 Cor. x. 16, Lk, xii. 48, 


THE DEFINITE ARTICLE 


68. There are in English two words to which the name Article is 
given: the Indefinite Article a (or an), and the Definite Article the. 

In Latin there is no Article, Definite, or Indefinite : in Greck there 
is only a Definite Article 6, 7, ro. 

This word was originally a demonstrative pronoun, and it is used 
even in the New Testament as a personal pronoun of the third person 
before pév and dé, see section 54. A relic of its use as a pronoun is 
also to be seen in the quotation from an ancient poet in St Paul’s 
speech at Athens in Acts xvii. 28 (rov yap kal yévos eopév). 


56 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


As ordinarily used the Definite Article retains something of its 
original demonstrative force. Generally speaking it is used in Greek, 
as it is in English, to denote that the person or thing, to whose name 
it is attached, is well known, has just been mentioned, or would 
naturally be thought of in connection with the subject which is 
being spoken about. 

The difference between the Definite and Indefinite Articles in 
English is readily shown by examples. 

Compare the sentences 


I saw a man in the lane yesterday, and 
I saw the man in the lane yesterday. 


The first sentence refers to any man ; the second to some particular 
man already known and thought of both by ourselves and the persons 
to whom we are speaking. Foran example in Greek see Mark ii. 15, 16. 

Consider also the sentence in the account of our Lord’s visit to the 
Synagogue at Nazareth. And having shut the book and given tt back to 
the attendant, he sat down. 'The Definite Article is used here before 
book and attendant because there would be a book and an attendant in 
every Synagogue, and they would be thought of at once, by those 
acquainted with Jewish customs, when a Synagogue was mentioned. 
In explaining the passage to an English audience, unfamiliar with the 
customs of the Jews, it would however be necessary to explain why the 
Definite Article was used before these two words. 

Although the Definite Article is generally used in Greek where it 
would be used in English, this rule is by no means of universal 
application. The student must therefore pay most careful attention 
to its use; he must not think that it is used arbitrarily or without 
reason, because he finds it difficult to express its force in English. 

Many of the mistakes made by the translators of the Authorised 
Version were due to their misunderstanding or neglecting the use of 
the Definite Article. Compare the translations in the A.V. and the 
R.V. of such passages as 1 Tim. vi. 5, 10. See how greatly the force 
of the passage is altered by the omission of the Definite Article in 
Jn. iv. 27 in the R.V. and by its insertion in the marginal reading in 
Lk. xviii. 13. 

See also Acts ii, 42, James ii. 14. In 1 Pet. iii, 1 even the Revisers 
have wrongly inserted the Article, and have quite spoilt the sense 
of the verse by reading without the word. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 57 


The best general rule that can be given for the use of the Definite 
Article in Greek is that it is always used when it is desired to mark 
the person or thing denoted by the word with which it goes as definite 
or well known, unless the word is regarded as already definite enough 
without it, or is made definite in some other way. 

For example such words as jus (Mt. xiii. 6), yq (Lk. ii. 14), 
@adacoa (Lk. xxi, 25) and many others may be used without a Definite 
Article, because they are regarded as already definite enough in them- 
selves. We generally use the Definite Article with such words in 
English, although we too may say He came to earth. 

Again a word may be made definite by the addition of a defining 
Genitive or an adjective, and so not need a Definite Article as well. 


Examples : muda doov. Mt. xvi. 18. 
eis xetpas Oeov Cavros. Heb. x. 31. 


69. Below are enumerated certain classes of words and con- 
structions where the Definite Article is regularly omitted in English, 
but regularly, or frequently, used in Greek. 


(1) Proper nouns may take the Definite Article, especially if the 

person or place named is well known, or has just been mentioned. 
Jesus is generally written 6 “Inaods. 

The Definite Article is generally used before Xpiords in the Gospels 
in the sense of the expected Messiah, the One who is well known by 
that title, just as we speak of the Christ. 

But in the Epistles, written at a time when Xpiorés was becoming a 
proper name, the Article is often omitted. 

An instance occurs in Acts xix. 13 where we can translate this 
Article into English : 

I adjure you by the Jesus whom Paul preacheth. 
dpxi(@ tpas tov "Incoty dv TavAos xnpioces. 

(2) Abstract nouns may take the Definite Article especially 
when it is desired to lay emphasis on the quality spoken about, or to 
denote it as one previously mentioned. 

Examples: Depart from me, ye that work iniquity. 

admoxapeire am eyo of epyatdpevoe THY avopiay. 
Mt. vii. 23. 

The following sentence contains an example of the Definite Article 

used with the name of a quality previously mentioned, i.e. ddBos. 


58 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


There is no fear in love, but perfect love casteth out fear, because 
fear has punishment. 

pdBos ovk oti €v TH aydry, GAN’ 7 Tedela aydrn Ew Bare Tov PdBov, 
bru 6 PoBos Kodaow EXEL 1 Jn. iv. 18. 

Note also that dyamn, which is the principal matter under con- 
sideration, has the Article every time. See also James ii. 14. 


(3) The Definite Article may be used Generically, that is to 
mark the noun with which it goes as the name of the representative or 
representatives of a class. 

Examples: !For a workman is worthy of his hire. 


G&us yap 6 épydtns Tov pucGod avrod. Iles ef: 
Ye load men (as a class) with loads difficult to be borne. 
gopri¢ere tovs avOpwmovs doptia duaBdacrakra. Lk. xi. 46. 


God is generally written 6 Oeds, because, especially by the mono- 
theistic Jews, God was regarded as standing in a class by Himself. 


(4) Nouns qualified bya Demonstrative or Possessive Pronoun, 
or on which the Possessive Genitive of a personal or demonstrative 
pronoun depends, regularly take the Definite Article. 

Examples: This man. otros 6 av@pamos. 

My father. 6 euds marnp. 
These men’s father. 6 rovrev marnp. 

(5) The Definite Article is sometimes used in Greek where in 
English we use a Possessive Pronoun to mark something as belonging 
to a person or thing mentioned in the sentence. 

Example: He washed his hands. 

ameviyato Tas yeElpas. Mt. xxvii. 24. 


70, Sometimes a word such as son, daughter, wife, mother, thing, 
or things is omitted after a Definite Article where it can easily be 
supplied from the context, and where a qualifying Genitive follows. 

Examples: Mary the (wife) of Clopas. 


Mapia 7 Tod Ki\ora. Jn. xix. 25, 
The (sons) of Zebedee. 
oi Tov ZeBedaiov. doy SON Zh 
The (things) of Caesar. 
Ta Tov Kaicapos. Mt. xxii. 21, 


1 We might use the Definite Article here in English and say The 
workman is worthy of his hire. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 59 


71. The Definite Article can turn Adjectives, Participles, Adverbs 
and even Prepositional phrases into Noun Equivalents. 


Adjectives: Blessed are the poor in spirit. 


Hakapiot of mr@xol TO mvevpar. Mt. v. 3. 
Participles: Blessed are they that mourn. 
pakapior of revOodvtes. Mt. v. 4. 


An Article followed by a Participle is generally best translated into 
English by a Pronoun followed by a relative clause. 
Adverbs: Love worketh no ill to his neighbour. 
1) aydmn TO wAnoiov Kaxdv ovK epyatera. 
Rom. xiii. 10, 
Prepositional Phrases: They that are of Italy salute you. 
domdovra vpas of amd ths “IraXlas. 


Heb. xiii. 24. 
‘72. For the use of the Article before Infinitives see 172. 


73. The Neuter Article ré can turn any word or collection of 
words which follow it into a noun equivalent, especially when the 
words are a quotation of something which has been said before. 

Example: But Jesus said to him “If thou canst!” All things are 
possible to him that believeth. (See verse 22, where the father of the 
child says, “If thou canst do anything, have mercy on us and help us.”) 

70 Ei dtvy, wavra Suvara ro wiotevorti. Mk. ix. 23. 

For the whole law is fulfilled in one word, even in this, Thou shalt 
love thy neighbour as thyself. 

6 yap was vdpos ev évt Adym memAnpa@rat, ev TO Ayamjoes Tov TAnoloy 
gov ws ceavTov. Gal. v. 14. 

Compare also Eph. iv. 9, Romans xiii. 9, Mt. xix. 18. 

The article also introduces dependent questions. 

Lk. i, 62, xxii. 2, 28, 37. Romans viii. 26. 


74, For the use of the Definite Article as a Pronoun see 54, 


60 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


The Position of the Article 


75. When a noun with an Article is qualified by an attributive 
adjective, the adjective generally stands between the Article and the 
noun, 

The wise man. 6 codds avnp. 

The Article together with the adjective may follow the noun, in 
which case the noun itself may have another Article before it. 

Thus we may translate The wise man in three ways: 


6 copes avnp. avnp 6 codds. 6 dvnp 6 copes. 
The first of these arrangements is the commonest. 


Such a position of the adjective with reference to the Article and 
the noun is called the attributive position. 


76. When an adjective either precedes the Article or follows the 
noun WITHOUT TAKING AN ARTICLE BEFORE I’, it is said to be in the 
predicative position and does not qualify the noun as an attribute, 
but forms part of the predicate of the sentence. 

Thus 6 avnp codpds does NoT mean The wise man, but The man is 
wise. 

This distinction is of great importance, and must be thoroughly 
mastered. 


Note. If however the predicate is identical with the subject or denotes 
something previously well known, the Definite Article may be used in the 
predicate. 

Examples : 

Sin is lawlessness. (i.e. they are identical.) 

 dpapria éorly 7 dvoula. ih Gays seb, Zh 

Art thou the teacher of Israel and knowest not these things? 

ad el 6 SiddoKados rod "Iopayd kal ratra ov ywdoKets; 

Jn. iii. 10, 

Art not thou the Egyptian? 

ovk dpa ad el 6 Alybrrwos; Acts xxi. 38. 


When a Demonstrative Pronoun qualifies a noun, it takes the 
position of a predicative adjective, and either precedes the Article or 
follows the noun. 


This man may be translated either odros 6 dvnp, 


or 6 avnp obtos. 


re 


ee 


~—— 


Ft 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 61 


THE VERB—MOOD, VOICE, TENSE 


77. Many of the names given to the different forms of verbs are 
by no means accurate descriptions of the functions which they perform. 

As a rule they describe one function, and one only. 

Thus the Optative Mood has other functions besides expressing a 
wish. 

The Present Tense often expresses time other than present. 

The Subjunctive Mood is not always used in subordinate sentences, 

These names must therefore be looked upon as being somewhat 
arbitrary and conventional. 4 

The functions of the various forms must be learnt rather from actuak 
usage than from their names. “ 

In Latin grammars the verbs are arranged under Moods. 

That is to say all the tenses of the Indicative mood are given 
together, then those of the Subjunctive, and so on. 

In Greek grammars the verbs are often arranged under Tenses. 

That is to say all the moods of the Present tense are given first, 
then the moods of the Future, Aorist, etc. 

- This causes some difficulty to those who have learnt Latin before 

learning Greek. 


MOODS 


78. Moods are forms which verbs assume to show the way in 
which the action expressed by the verb is to be regarded, i.e. if it is to 
be regarded as a statement, a command, a wish, or a thought. 

The Indicative Mood (generally) makes a statement or asks a 
question, 

The Imperative Mood gives a command, or expresses a request or 
a concession. 

The Subjunctive Mood expresses a thought or wish rather than a 
fact. The uses of the Subjunctive Mood are so various, and its use in 
Latin and Greek is so different from its use in English, that it is im- 
possible to bring it under a more exact definition. The student who 
knows Latin must be on his guard against supposing that in cases 
where the Subjunctive Mood is used in Latin, it will also be used in 
Greek. . 

The Optative Mood expresses a wish, and is also used in dependent 
statements and questions after a principal verb in past time, and in 


62 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


certain kinds of conditional sentences, and in other ways. It occurs: 
very rarely in the N. T. 

The Infinitive Mood is really a verbal noun. 

The Participle is a verbal adjective. 


VOICE 


79. The Active Voice is used when the subject of the verb is 
spoken of as acting or doing something. 

The Passive Voice is used when the ni of the aes is spoken 
of as suffering or being acted upon. 

N.B. Only Transitive verbs can have a passive voice. 

There are certain verbs, such as He fell, They slipped etc., which 
do not speak of the subject as acting : these are however regarded as 
being in the active voice because they are intransitive. 

Examples; Active. The father loves the boy. 

Pater puerum amat. 

6 matip pret tov maida. 
Passive. The boy is loved by the father. 

Puer a patre amatur.. 

6 mais didelrar Urd Tov marpds. 

Both these sentences express the same idea, but they express it in 
different ways. It will be noticed that when a sentence with an active 
verb is turned into a sentence with a passive verb, the object of the 
first sentence (the boy) becomes the subject of the second: while the 
subject of the first sentence (the father) is introduced in English in the 
second sentence by the preposition by. 


80. Consider the sentence 
Boys are strengthened by labour. 
Pueri labore firmantur. 
oi maides move paovyvvrat 


It will be seen that, although the constructions of this sentence and 
the sentence given above—T'he boy is loved by the father—are just the 
same in English, the construction of the two sentences is not the same 
in Latin and Greek. 

In Latin a with the Ablative is used in the first’ case, and er 
Ablative alone in the second. 


NEW 'TESTAMENT GREEK 638 


In Greek iad with the Genitive is used in the first case, and the 
Dative alone in the second. 

This is because the doer of the action in the first sentence is a 
living person, i.e. the father: but the thing that does the action in 
the second sentence is not a living person, but labour. 

In sentences similar to the first sentence the doer of the action is 
spoken of as the Agent, because it is a living thing. 

In sentences similar to the second sentence the doer of the action is 
spoken of as the Instrument, because it is not a living thing. 

This distinction must be carefully observed. 


General rule: In Latin the Agent of the action of a passive verb is 
translated by a with the Ablative, and the Instru- 
ment by the Ablative alone. 

In Greek the Agent of the action of a passive verb 
is translated by tro with the Genitive, and the 
Instrument by the Dative alone. 


The same verb may have both an Agent and an Instrument : 
The boy is beaten by his father with a stick. 
Puer caeditur a patre virga. 
6 mais TUmTerat Ud TOU Tarpos paBde. 


81. The Middle Voice. (Greek only.) 
In the Middle Voice the subject is represented as acting upon 
himself, or in some way that concerns himself. 


(1) The subject is represented as acting upon himself. This use, 
which would seem to be the most natural use of the Middle Voice, is 
the most uncommon. The Active Voice and a Reflexive Pronoun are 
generally used instead as in Jn. xvii. 19. 

This use of the Middle corresponds to the use of the Active with a. 
direct object. 

Examples of the reflexive use of the Middle do however occur. 


Rise (rouse yourselves), let us be going. 


eyelperOe dyaper. Mt. xxvi. 46. 
He went and hanged himself. 
dreMOav amny€&aro. Mt. xxvii. 5. 


Except they wash themselves, they eat not. 
éav py Barricwrra otk éeobiovow. Mk. vii. 4. 


64 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


(2) The subject is represented as acting for himself, or with 
reference to himself. 


This use of the Middle Voice corresponds to the use of the Active 
with an indirect object. 
Examples; Ye know not what ye ask (for yourselves). 
ovUK oldate Ti aireiabe, Mk. x. 38. 
Compare this with the Active: 
Ask and ye shall receive. 
airetre kal Anpreode. Jn. xvi. 24. 


The following is an example of the Active and the Middle of the 
same verb in the same sentence : 


Give diligence to make your calling and election sure, for by so 
doing ye shall never fall. 
ormovddcare BeBaiav tpav thy KARoW Kal ekoyny moreicOa: TadTa 
yap mowovvtes ov py mratonré more. 2 Pet. i. 10. 
(3) The Middle Voice is also used in a causative sense, to denote 


that the subject allows something to be done, or gets something 
done. 


Examples: To get himself enrolled with Mary. 


dmoypawacOa ovv Mapidap. Lk. ii. 5. 
They got baptized. 
€Barricavro. 1 Cor. x. 2. 


82. There is however often no difference in meaning that we can 
trace between the Active and Middle voices of a verb. Even in the 
case of the examples given above the exact force of the voice of the 
verbs is considered doubtful by some grammarians. 

The difficulty is increased by the fact that the forms of the Middle 
are identical with those of the Passive except in the Future and Aorist 
tenses. Moreover many verbs are Deponent, wholly or in part, that is 
to say they have Passive or Middle forms, and an Active meaning. 

No rule can be given; the student must observe for himself the 
voice in the tenses of the various verbs which he comes across. 

At first sight it seems curious that we should not be able to decide 
certainly from the form of a verb whether it is Active or Passive in 
meaning. This ambiguity is however not unknown in English. The 
sentences Goods now showing and Goods now being shown mean practically 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 65 


the same, except that in the second sentence we lay more stress on the 
thought that the goods will be shown by some person. 


TENSES 


83. The action denoted by a verb may be defined both as regards 
its time, and as regards its state or progress. 

Its time may be defined as Past, Present, or Future. 

Its state or progress may be regarded as Continuous or In- 
completed, as Perfect or Complete, as Simple or Indefinite without 
any reference to continuity or completion. 

Example: Continuous action. I am writing this letter. 

I was writing this letter. 

I shall be writing this letter. 
Complete action. I have written this letter. 

I had written this letter. 

I shall have written this letter. 
Simple action. I write this letter. 

I wrote this letter. 

I shall write this letter. 

The combination of these ideas of time and state should produce 
nine different tenses. 


Continuous Continuous Continuous 
Past { Perfect Present { Perfect Future 4 Perfect 
Simple Simple Simple 


Different tense forms to express all these ideas exist in English, but 
not in Latin and Greek. (See page 11.) 

Some of the tenses in Latin and Greek perform the functions of 
more than one English tense, and therefore care is often necessary in 
translating them; generally speaking however the Greek Present 
corresponds to the English Present Continuous or Present Simple: 
the Greek Imperfect corresponds to the English Past Continuous : 
the Greek Future corresponds to the English Future Continuous or 
Future Simple: the Greek Perfect corresponds to part of the uses of 
the English Present Perfect: the Greek Aorist corresponds to the 
English Past Simple and to certain uses of the English Present Perfect, 

N.B. The above remarks only apply to the tenses of the Indicative 
Mood in the Greek verb: the use of the tenses of the other moods is 
different. 


N. 5 


66 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Great care should be devoted to the translation of the tenses in the 
Greek Testament, as the translators of the A.V. often went wrong on 
this point, and familiarity with their version is apt to mislead the 
student. 


84. It is somewhat unfortunate that we are compelled to use the 
name ¢ense in connection with the forms of the Greek verb. It directs 
our attention too much to the time of the action of the verb, whereas 
it was the state of the action, rather than the time, that was most 
prominently before the mind of a Greek. The time of the action of the 
verb is often left to be inferred from the context, and cannot always be 
certainly told from the form of the verb. This is almost invariably the 
case with the moods other than the Indicative, and is sometimes the 
case in the Indicative mood itself. 

To the Greek mind the forms to which we give the names “ Present” 
and “Imperfect” denoted duration, or repeated action. 

The forms to which we give the name “ Perfect” or “ Plupertect y 
denoted action complete at the time of speaking, the results of which 
were regarded as still existing. 

The forms to which we give the name “Aorist” denoted a simple, 
indefinite action, and were always used where no stress was laid on 
the continuity, completion, or incompletion of the action denoted by 
the verb. 

As a rule the Indicative mood of the Aorist refers to an action in 
past time. The idea of time is however quite secondary, and does not 
enter at all into the meaning of the moods of the Aorist other than the 
Indicative, except in reported speech. With this exception the idea of 
Past time is only to be found in the forms of the verb which have an 
Augment, that is to say the Imperfect, the Pluperfect, and the Aorist 
Indicative. 

The Future tense in Greek, as in English, refers to future time in 
all its moods, and is thus an exception to the principle that the tenses 
of the moods other than the Indicative do not denote time in Greek. 


85. The use of the Present Indicative in Greek generally denotes 
action in progress or customary or repeated action in present time. 
Examples: Lord, save, we are perishing, 
Kvpie, o@cov, drodhvpea. Mt, viii. 25. 
Our lamps are going out. 
ai Aapmrddes nuav ocBévyuvrar Mt. xxv. 8. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 67 


Every tree that bringeth not forth good fruit is hewn down and 
cast into the fire. 
wav dévdpov ph moody Kaprov Kadov exxdmrerat Kal eis mip BadXerat. 


Mt. vii. 19. 
I die daily. 


Kad” nuépav amobvncka. 1 Cor. xv. 31. 


86. As the Present Tense denotes action in progress, and hence in- 
complete, it may be used to express action which is attempted or desired, 
but not performed. This use of the Present is called the Present of Incom- 
pleted Action, or the Conative Present. 


Example: Many good works have I shown you from my Father: on 
account of which of them do ye desire to stone me? 

Toda Epya deta buty Kara é€x Tod watpds’ dia motov abrdy 
Epyov éué NrMdfere ; Jn. x. 32. 


See also Rom. ii. 4, 1 Cor. vii. 28, Gal. v. 4. 
8'7. The Present tense is occasionally used in an Aoristic sense to 


denote a simple event in present time, without any thought of action in 
progress. 


Examples: Thy sins are forgiven thee. 


adievral co. al duapria cov. Mk, ii. 5. 
Jesus Christ maketh thee whole, 
laral oe “Inoots Xpuorés. Acts ix. 34. 


In these cases the context alone can decide whether the Greek Present is 
to be translated by the English Present Continuous or Present Simple. 


88. The Present Tense may be used for the sake of vividness to 
describe an event in the Past or Future. 
When it is used to denote an event in the Past, it is generally called 
the Historic Present. 
Examples: Present to describe an event in Past time: 
And they came again to Jerusalem. 
kal €pyovrat waAuy eis ‘Iepooddupa. Mk, xi. 27. 
Present to describe an event in Future time: 
My time is at hand: I will take the Passover with my disciples 
at thy house. 
6 Kaipos pov eyyvs eat: mpos oe TOL TO TaoXa pETAa TOY pabnrav 
fiov. Mt. xxvi. 18. 
See also Lk. xix. 8, 1 Cor. xv. 32, Jn. xxi. 23. 


89. The use of the Imperfect Indicative denotes action in 
progress or customary or repeated action in past time. 
5—2 


68 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Examples: And many that were rich were casting in much. 
kal moAXol. wAovotor €Baddov moAXa. Mk, xii. 41, 
Behold how he loved him. 


ie mas epider airov. Jn. xi. 36. 
Whom they used to lay daily at the gate of the Temple. 
bv éridovy Ka@? jpépav mpos THY Odpav Tod iepot. Acts ili. 2. 


See also Mk. xv. 6, Lk. xvii. 27. 


90. The Imperfect is sometimes used to denote that an action 
was attempted or desired, but not performed. (Conative Imperfect.) 


Example ; And they wished to call him by the name of his father 
Zacharias. 
kal exddovv adrd él TO dvduare Tov marpds avrov Zayxapiay. 
Lk, i. 59. 
See also Mt. iii. 14, Mk. ix. 38, xv. 23, Acts vii. 26, xxvi. 11. 


91. The use of the Aorist Indicative denotes that the action is 
regarded simply as an event without any account being taken of its 
progress or of the existence of its result. Even its time is not always 
distinctly contemplated; but, generally speaking, it is regarded as 
taking place in past time. 

The name Aorist means without boundaries or indefinite, and denotes 
that the action expressed by the verb is not defined with regard to its 
time, progress, or result. 


92. The Aorist Indicative is most frequently used to describe a 
past event or series of events, viewed as a whole, without any refer- 
ence to the progress of the action, or the existence of its result. 

The fact so recorded may be 

(a) A momentary action. 
And having stretched forth his hand, he touched him. 
Kal exreivas Thy xeipa ato avTov. Mt. viii. 3. 
(6) A continued act or state viewed as a single action. 
He abode two whole years in his own hired dwelling. 
gwewvev O€ dteriav ddAnv ev idiw picOwpare. Acts xxviii. 30. 
(c) A series of similar acts viewed as constituting a single event, 
Thrice I suffered shipwreck. 
Tpis évavdynoa. 2 Cor, xi. 2b. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 69 


98. The Inceptive or Ingressive Aorist. 
The Aorist of a verb which denotes a state or condition in the 
Present or Imperfect often denotes the beginning of the state. 
Compare the use of the Imperfect in the first example with that of 
the Aorist in the two following : 
Examples: But he remained silent and answered nothing. 
6 O€ €ota7ra Kal ovdév dmexpivaro. Mk. xiv. 61. 
And they wondered at his answer and held their peace 
kal Oavpdcavres emt TH dmoxpice: avtov eciynoav. 
LK. xx. 26. 
And after they held their peace, James answered. 
pera O€ TO orynoat avrovs amexpiOn Idxw Bos. 
Acts xv. 13. 


In the first of these examples we have the Imperfect denoting the con- 
tinuance of a state of silence, in the last two we have the Aorist denoting 


the beginning of the state. 


Consider also the force of the Aorist in the following examples : 
And having said this, he fell asleep. 
kal TOUTO el7r@v exoLurnOn. Acts vii. 60. 
Though he was rich, for your sakes he became poor. 
dv bpas erraxevoev mAovous dv. 2 Cor, viii. 9. 


See Lk. xv. 32, Jn. iv. 52, Rom. xiv. 9. 


94. The Resultative Aorist. 
The Aorist of a verb which denotes effort or intention in the Present 


or Imperfect often denotes the success of the effort. 
Compare the use of the tenses in the following examples : 


Hinder them not to come to me. 
pH) KoAveTe adTa éhOeiv mpds pe. 
But the centurion kept them from their purpose. 
6 5€ ExatovTdpyxns...ek@dugev avTovs Tov BovAnparos. 


Acts xxvii. 43. 


In the first of these examples we have the Present denoting the attempted 
but unsuccessful action of the Disciples, in the second the Aorist denoting 
the successful action of the centurion. 


Mt. xix. 14. 


See also Mt. xxvii. 20. 


70 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


95. Special uses of the Aorist. 

The Gnomic Aorist!, The Aorist is used in proverbial sayings (yr@uat), to 
express what generally happens. The Present is used in English. 

Example: The grass withereth, and the flower falleth. 

é&npdvOn 6 xopros Kal 7d dv Oos ééérecer. 1 Pet. i. 24. 

See also Jas, i. 11, 24. 

The Epistolary Aorist. The writer of a letter sometimes puts himself 
in the place of his readers, and describes as past an action which is present 


to himself, but which will be past to his readers when they receive the letter. 
The Present is used in English. 


Example: I think it necessary to send to you Epaphroditus my brother. 
dvaykatov bé hynoduny Eragpédirov tov ddedpoy wéwwar. 
Phil. ii. 25. 


See also Acts xxiii. 30, 1 Cor. v. 11, Eph. vi. 22, Phil. ii. 28, Col. iv. 8, 
Philemon 12. 


The Dramatic Aorist. The Aorist is used to express vividly the state of 
mind which a person has just reached. The Present is used in English, 
Example: I know what to do. 


éyvwv Th moujow. Lk, xvi. 4. 


96. The use of the Perfect Indicative in Greek denotes that the 
action of the verb is regarded as complete at the time of speaking, and 
that its results are regarded as still existing. 

When it is said that the action is regarded as “complete” this does 
not mean that it is regarded as ended ; but only that it is regarded as 
brought to its appropriate conclusion in such a way that its effects 
remain in action. The Perfect has therefore really as much to do with 


present as with past time, since it describes the present result of a past 
action. 


97. The main uses of the Perfect in the New Testament are as 
follows : 
(1) The Perfect of Completed Action denoting an action com- 
pleted in past time the results of which still remain. 
Examples: Ye have filled Jerusalem with your teaching. 
metAnpokare THY ‘lepovoadnp ths didax7js tpav. Acts v. 28. 


I have fought the good fight, I have finished the course, I have 
kept the faith. 


Tov Kaddv ayava nyovopa, Tov Spdpov terédexa, THY TioTW 
TeETNPIKA. 2 Tim, iv. 7. 

1 “The Gnomic Aorist gives a more vivid statement of general truths, by 

employing a distinct case or several distinct cases in the past to represent (as 


it were) all possible cases, and implying that what has occurred is likely to 
occur again under similar circumstances.” Goodwin, Moods and Tenses 155. 


— 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 71 


(2) The Perfect of Existing State. The Perfect is sometimes 
used to denote a present existing state, the past action of which it is 
the result being left out of account. 

Such Perfects are generally found in certain verbs which use the 
Perfect in this sense only, for example péuvnua, wéroiOa, oida, yéypam- 
Tal, €yv@xKa. 

The Perfect of Existing State is generally best translated by the 
English Present. 


Examples: He trusteth in God. 
mémoev emi tov Gedy. Mt, xxvii. 43, 


We believe and know that thou art the Holy One of God. 
Nmeis memioTevKapmer Kal eyvaxapev Ott ov ef 6 dyios TOD Oeod. 


Jn. vi. 69. 


98. The use of the Pluperfect in Greek denotes that the action 
of the verb is regarded as complete at a point in past time implied in 
the context. Unless the completion of the action in past time is dis- 
tinctly emphasized the Pluperfect must not be used. It is not used, 
as in English, to denote that the action simply occurred before a certain 
point in past time; in this case the Aorist or Imperfect would be used, 
and the fact that the action denoted was antecedent to another action 
in past time would be left to be inferred from the context, and not 
made plain by the use of a special tense. 


99. The uses of the Pluperfect in the New Testament are as 
follows : 


(1) Pluperfect of Completed Action. 
Examples: For it had been founded upon the rock. 
teOepediaro yap emt thy wérpav. Mt. vii. 25, 
For the Jews had agreed already that if anyone should confess 
that he was the Christ he should be put out of the Synagogue. 
#8n yap cuveréGewwro ot lovdaior iva édv Tis avtov dpohoynan Xpiorov, 
dmoovvaywyos yévntal. Jn. ix. 22, 
(2) The Pluperfect of Existing State. 
Verbs which denote a present state in the Perfect denote a past 
state in the Pluperfect. They must be translated by a simple past 


tense in English. 


72 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


In the following example a Pluperfect of Existing State and a Plu- 
perfect of Completed Action are seen side by side. 


And the more part knew not why they had come together. 
kai of mAelous ok AOecav Tivos évexa ouvedndvOecar. 


Acts xix. 32. 


100. The following are examples of the use of the Aorist or Im- 
perfect to denote an event which is spoken of as taking place before 
another past event. In these cases the Greek Aorist and Imperfect 
must be translated by the English Pluperfect, not because there is any 
confusion in meaning between the tenses, but because the Greeks stated 
the action simply as a past event, and left it to the context to make 
plain that it took place before some other past event, whereas the English 


prefer to make the order of the events clear by the use of a special 
tense. 


Examples: And they had forgotten to take bread, and they had 
none with them in the boat except one loaf. 
kal émeAdOovto AaBeiv dprovs, Kal ef pt) Eva Aprov ovK etyov ped 
€avTav év TO Toi. Mk. viii. 14. 
Shewing coats and garments which Dorcas had made. 
erOerkvUpevat xiT@vas Kal ijdria, doa émole 1) AopKas. 
Acts ix. 39. 
See also Mt. xiv. 3, 4, Lk. vill. 27, Jn. xii. 17, xiii. 12, xix. 30. 


101. It is most important to distinguish clearly between the 
meanings of the Imperfect, the Aorist, and the Perfect. 

The difference between them is best learnt by the study of ex- 
amples such as those given below, but it may help the student to 
regard the meaning of the Imperfect as graphically represented by a 
line (——) or by a series of points (--:-> ), and that of the Aorist as 
graphically represented by a point (:). In the examples given in 
section 92, where the Aorist denotes a continued act or state or a 
series of acts, the line or series of points is reduced to a single point 
by perspective. 

The Perfect is not used in Greek unless stress is laid on the fact 
that the action denoted by the verb has been brought to its ap- 
propriate conclusion, and that its results remain. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 73 


102. Examples of the difference between the Imperfect and the 
Aorist. 

I used to sit daily with you in the Temple teaching, and ye did 
not lay hands upon me. 

Quotidie apud vos sedebam docens in templo, et non me tenuistis. 

cad repay mpos duds exabeCounv ev tO icp SiSdoK@v, Kal od« 
€kpatnoaré pe. Mt. xxvi. 55. 

But he remained silent, and answered nothing. 

Ille autem tacebat, et nibil respondit. 

6 5€ €oiwra Kal ovdev dmexpivaro. Mk. xiv. 61. 

And he sat down (single action) over against the treasury, and 
beheld (continued action) how the multitude cast money into the 
treasury (repeated action): and many that were rich cast in much 
(repeated action). And there came a certain poor widow, and she cast 
in two mites (single action)—for they all cast in of their superfluity 
(viewing the action as a whole). 

Et sedens Jesus contra gazophylacium, aspiciebat quomodo turba 
jactaret aes in gazophylacium, et multi divites jactabant multa. Cum 
venisset autem vidua una pauper, misit duo minuta—omnes enim ex 
eo, quod abundabat illis, miserunt. 

kal ka@ioas Karévavte Tod yalopuAakiov eOewper mas 6 ByAos BaAXet 
xarKdy eis TO yafoduAdkwov> kal moddol mdovovor €Baddov modAd: Kal 
e\Oodveaa pia xnpa wry) eBarev Aerra dvo—rdvres yap €k TOD meEpio- 
gwevovTos avtois €Badov. Mk. xii. 41. 

It will be observed that in these examples the Greek Imperfect 
corresponds to the Latin Imperfect, and the Greek Aorist to the tense 
which is generally called the “ Perfect” in Latin grammars. 

As will be seen from the following examples this tense does the 
work both of the Greek Aorist, and of the Greek Perfect; but, although 
there was only one form to express these two ideas in Latin, yet the 
meanings were quite distinct, as is shown by the fact that the “ Perfect” 
in Latin is followed by a Primary or Secondary tense according as it 
has a true Perfect or an Aorist meaning. 


108. The following are examples of the difference between the 
Aorist and the Perfect. 

Go to thy house and to thy friends and tell them what the Lord 

hath done for thee (completed action with abiding result), and how he | 

had mercy on thee (single action), 


TA A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Vade in domum tuam ad tuos, et annuntia illis quanta tibi 
Dominus fecerit, et misertus sit tui. 

dmaye eis Tov oikdv cov mpos Tovs Gos, Kal amayyetoy avTois doa 6 
Kuptds wou werroinxey kal nrénoév oe. Mk. v. 19. 

And further he brought Greeks into the Temple (single action), 
and hath defiled (completed action with abiding result) this holy place. 

Insuper et Gentiles induxit in a, et violavit sanctum 
locum istum. 

ere TE Kal "EhAnvas elonyaye eis TO iepov Kal KekOlV@KEV TOV dyvov 
TOTOY TOUTOY. Acts xxi. 28. 


And that he was buried (single action), and that he was raised 
again (completed action with abiding result) the third day according to 
the Scriptures. 

Et quia sepultus est, et quia resurrexit tertia die secundum 
Scripturas. 

kal ore eradn, Kal ore eynyepta TH TpiTn nuépa Kara Tas ypahds. 

1 Cor. xv. 4. 
We have no form in English that will give a satisfactory rendering 
of the Greek Perfect in this case, 


104. Generally speaking the Greek Aorist should be translated by 
the English Past, and the Greek Perfect by the English Perfect ; but 
this rule cannot be universally applied, as the tenses do not correspond 
exactly to one another in meaning. The Greek Aorist is wider in 
meaning than the English Past, and the Greek Perfect is narrower 
in meaning than the English Perfect. 

It is therefore often necessary to translate an Aorist by a Perfect or 
even by a Present. 

- The English Past Tense denotes an action which took place at a 
definite past time, or an action between which and the time of speaking 
the speaker wishes to suggest an interval, 

The English Perfect Tense denotes an action which took place at 
an indefinite past time, and also an action between which and the time 
of speaking the speaker does not wish to suggest an interval. 

If we say Did you go to London last week? we use the Past tense, 
because we are speaking of an action which took place at a definite 
time. 

If we were not thinking of any definite time, we should say Have 
you been to London ? 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 75 


A boy may shut his book and say I have finished my lessons, He 
would not say J finished my lessons, unless he meant to suggest that 
they were finished some time before: J finished my lessons an hour ago. 

As the Greek Aorist denotes a single action without any regard to 
its time or progress, it is used in all these cases, and must be translated 
into English by the Past or the Perfect according to the general sense 
of the passage. 

This is not because there is any confusion between the Aorist and - 
the Perfect in Greek, but because the English Past is not wide enough 
in meaning to translate all the meanings of the Greek Aorist. The 
English Perfect supplies the forms necessary to express the meanings 
of the Aorist which the Past cannot. express. 

The English Perfect is not confined, as the Greek Perfect is, to the 
expression of events complete at the time of speaking whose results 
continue. As has been shown above, it can denote events which 
happened at some indefinite time in the past, and also events which 
have just taken place. 


The following table may make the relationship of the tenses clearer, 


The English Past tense ex- ) 
presses an action which took place 
at a definite time in the past, or ! 
an action between which and the The Greek Aorist denotes an 
time of speaking the speaker | action regarded simply as an 
wishes to suggest an interval. event without any account being 

( The English Perfect tense ‘taken of its progress or result. 
expresses an action which took 

place at an indefinite past time, or 

an action between which and the 

time of speaking the speaker 

does not wish to suggest an 

interval. 


The English Perfect tense ex- The Greek Perfect expresses 
presses an action regarded as | an action regarded as complete 
complete at the time of speaking }at the time of speaking whose 
whose results are regarded as still | results are regarded as still ex- 
existing. isting. 


oS 


76 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


EXAMPLES FROM THE NEW TESTAMENT 


105. The Greek Aorist denoting an event which happened in 
indefinite past time translated by an English Perfect. 


I thank thee, O Father, Lord of heaven and earth, that thou hast 
hid these things from the wise and understanding, and hast revealed 
them unto babes. 

eEoporoyotdpail gor, matep, KUpie TOU ovpavod Kal THs yns, OTL amwé- 
Kpuwas Taira amd copay Kal cuver@y, kal amekddupas ara vnrio.s. 

Mt. xi, 265. 

Have ye not read what David did when he was hungry and those 
that were with him ? 

OvK avéyvare Ti éemoinoey Aaveid, dre émeivacey kal of per’ adtov; 

Mt. xii. 3. 
Note that in this example the Aorist is used both to denote indefinite 
action (have ye not read), and definite action (what David did when he was 
hungry). 
The Greek Aorist denoting an event between which and the time of 
speaking no interval is suggested translated by an English Perfect. 


We have seen strange things to-day. 
eWOopnev mapadoéa onpepov, Lk. v. 26. 


Therefore that field has been called the field of blood until this 
ay. 
616 exAnOn 6 aypos Exeivos aypos aipatos eas Tis onMEpov. 
Mt. xxvii. 8. 
See also Acts vii. 52, 53. 


106. In certain cases we are compelled to translate the Aorist by an 
English Present or by an English Perfect which has its full sense of 
complete action with abiding result. From the point of view of the Greek 
we seem to have to do with one of the most ancient uses of the Aorist in 
which it is used to express what has just happened. See Dr J. H. Moulton’s 
Prolegomena, page 135. 

Examples: This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased. 

obrds éoTwv Oo vids mov 6 ayamnrés, ev @ evddKyaa. 
Matt. iii, 17. 

See also the parallel passages Mk, i, 11, Lk. iii, 22. 

; ue this thy brother was dead and is alive again, he was lost and is 
ound. 
dre 6 ddeAPds cou obros vexpos Hy Kal dvéfnoev, Gmrohkwdws Kal evpéOy. 
Lk. xv. 32, 
See also Jn. xv. 6. 


> danas 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 77 


The Aorists éyrwy and éyvw in Jn. xvii. 25 and éyvw in 2 Tim. ii. 19 must 
be explained as gathering up the whole process denoted by the Present 
yyveoxew into a single moment. They must be translated by a Present 
in English. 

In the following instance the verb is Present in form in English, but 
Perfect in meaning. 

He is risen, he is not here. 

ayépen, ovK Eorw wee. ME. xvi. 6. 
See also Mk. vy. 39, Lk. xxiv. 34. 
In the following instances the Perfect is the best translation. 

I have married a wife. 


yuvatka eynua. Lk. xiv. 20. 
Behold the world has gone after him. 
t6e 6 Kédcpmos dricw atrod ami\Oev. Jn. xi. 19, 


See also Mt. xii. 28, Lk. vii. 16, Jn. xiii, 1, 1 Thess. ii. 16. 


107. The use of the Future Indicative in Greek denotes that the 
action is expected to take place in future time. 
The context decides whether the state of the action is to be 
regarded as simple or progressive. 
Examples: (1) Simple future action. 
And she shall bear a son, and thou shalt call his name Jesus, 
réEerar O€ vidv, Kal kadéoeis TO Gvopa avTov "Ingody. 
Mt. i. 21. 
(2) Action in progress in future time. 
And therein I rejoice, yea and will continue to rejoice. 
kal €v TOUT@ xalpw’ GAA Kal xapnoopan iBowll, ah 1K). 


THE TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS 


108. (1) Not in Reported Speech. 

The tenses of the moods other than the Indicative, with the 
exception of the Future, do not denote the time of the action of the 
verb, but only its state, that is to say they represent the action as 
continuous, completed, or simply as an event. 

The time of the action is denoted by the context. 

It is quite a mistake to suppose that the Aorist Subjunctive in 
Greek corresponds with the Imperfect Subjunctive in Latin, or that 
the Aorist or Perfect Infinitive in Greek is equivalent to the Perfect 
Infinitive in Latin. 

N.B. The Augment is the only decisive mark of past time in the 
Greek verb, and this does not of course occur in the Dependent moods!. 


? Except when used instead of the reduplication in certain Perfects. 


78 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


109. The Present tense of the dependent moods denotes action 
in progress or repeated action. 
Examples: Infinitive, 
To be writing the same things to you to me indeed is not irksome... 
Ta avTa ypaderv vw ewol pev ovK dxynpor, vpiv de aadarés. 
Phaleaitee 
Subjunctive, 
If therefore thou shalt be offering thy gift at the altar. 
eav odv mpoodépns To Sapov cov emi TO Ovovaornpiov. 
Mt. v. 23. 
Imperative, 
Give us day by day our daily bread. 
Tov dprov pay Tov émovoroy Sidov jyiv Td Kad? jpépar. 
Lk. xi. 3. 
Participle, 
We are ambassadors on behalf of Christ, as though God were 
entreating by us. 
tmép Xpicrod ovv mpeaBevouev ws Tov Geqv mapaxadodyTos oe 
NOV. 2 Cor. v. 20. 


110. The Aorist tense of the dependent mood denotes action 
represented as a simple event or fact without reference either to its 
progress or the existence of its result. 

Examples: Infinitive, 

I came not to destroy the law, but to fulfil. 
ovk HAOov Karahioat Tov vopov adda mANpGoat. Mt. v. 17. 

Subjunctive, 

And if he sin against thee seven times in the day—thou shalt 
forgive him. 


SR ae Tacks, ; ; sate 
kal €ay EmTadkis THS NMEepas Guaptnoy eis Te—ahyoets avira. 


Lk. xvii. 4, 
Imperative, 
Give us this day our daily bread. 
Tov Gptrov nua Tov émcovotov Sos jpiv onwepov. Mt. vi. 11. 


Participle, 
And taking her by the hand he raised her up. 
HYElpev avTiy Kpatnoas THS xELpOS. Mk, i. 31. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 79 


111. The Perfect tense of the dependent moods denotes complete 
action the results of which remain. 
Examples: Infinitive and participle, 

And the jailor being roused out of sleep, and seeing the prison 
doors open, drew his sword, and was about to kill himself, supposing 
that the prisoners had escaped. 

eEurvos b€ yevouevos 6 SecpopvaAdk kai (Sav dvewypévas tas Oipas 
THs pudakns omacdpevos Thy payaipay Auedey Eavtov avatpeiv, vopitwv 


exmreevyevat Tovs Secpiovs. Acts xvi. 27. 
Imperative, 
Peace, be still. (Literally, “be muzzled.”) 
clatra, Tepipaco. Mk. iv. 39. 


Compare Acts xiv. 19, xxvii. 13, Rom. xv. 14, 2 Tim. iv. 8. 


112. The Future tense of the dependent moods represents an 
action as future from the point of view of the time of the principal verb. 

It is thus an exception to the rule that the tenses of the dependent 
moods do not express time. 


Examples: Infinitive, 
And when it was shewn me that there would be a plot against 
the man... 
pynvvbeions dé por eriBovdrrs eis rv dvdpa eoec Oat. 
Acts xxiii. 30. 
Participle : 
Thou sowest not that body that shall be... 


ov TO TGpua TO yevnoopevoy omeipets. Te Cormxvemsir. 


The use of the tenses of the Imperative and Participle will be 
treated further in paragraphs 125, 259—266. 


(2) In Reported Speech 


118. The term Reported Speech includes all object clauses de- 
pending on a verb of saying or thinking which contain the words 
or thoughts of any person stated indirectly, and also all indirect 
quotations and questions. 

See 145, 159, 160. 

When the Infinitive and (in Classical Greek) the Optative stand in 
Indirect Discourse, each tense represents the corresponding tense of 
the same verb in Direct Discourse. See 151—157. 


80 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Periphrastic Forms of Tenses 


114. In N.T. Greek Periphrastic forms of the tenses, that is tenses 
made up of a participle and part of the verb to be, often occur. 
The Periphrastic Present is made up of the Present Participle and the 
Present of the verb eva: (rare). 
Example: 
For we are not, as many, making merchandise of the word of God. 
od ydp éopev ws of moddol Kamndevovtes Tov Abyov TOD Jeod. 
2 Cor. ii. 17. 
The Periphrastic Imperfect is made up of the Present Participle and the 
Imperfect of the verb elva. 
Example: And Jesus was going before them. 
Kal qv mpodywv avtovs 6 Inaods. Mk, x. 32. 
See also Lk. i. 21, 22. 


The Periphrastic Perfect is made up of the Perfect Participle and the 


Present of the verb elva. eke xx Oy 
The Periphrastic Pluperfect is made up of the Perfect Participle and the 
Imperfect of the verb eva. Mt. xxvi. 43, Lk. ii. 26. 


The Periphrastic Future is made up of the Present Participle and the 
Future of the verb elvar. The force is that of the Future continuous with 
the thought of continuity emphasized. 


Examples: Thou shalt catch men. 


avOpmHmous éon fwypav. Lk. v. 10. 
Jerusalem shall be trodden underfoot. 
‘Tepovoahiy tora maroupévy. Lk. xxi. 24. 


uAXew with the Infinitive is also used with a force akin to that of the 
Future Indicative. It usually denotes an action which one intends to do or 
which is certain to take place. 


Example: For Herod will seek the young child to destroy him. 


wedAe yap “Hpwdns (nrety 7d mardiov rod dmodéoa avs. 
Mt. ii. 138, 


SENTENCES—SIMPLE, COMPOUND, AND COMPLEX 


115. A Simple Sentence is a sentence which contains a single 
subject and a single predicate. 

Compound and Complex Sentences are sentences which contain 
more than one subject and predicate. 

In dealing with sentences it will be found convenient to keep care- 
fully to the following terminology : 

The name Sentence should be applied only to a complete statement, 
command, or question occurring between two full-stops. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 81 


Groups of words forming part of a Compound or Complex Sentence, 
and having a subject and predicate of their own, should be called 
Clauses. 

Groups of words forming an equivalent to some part of speech, and 
not having a subject or predicate of their own, should be called 
Phrases. 


116. Two or more clauses, none of which depends on any of the 
others, but which all make equally important and independent state- 
ments, are said to be combined by coordination, and to form a 
Compound Sentence. 

Such clauses are generally joined together by the coordinating con- 
junctions xai, adAd, 8, #, ydp. 

Example: And he went forth again by the sea side; and all the 
multitude resorted unto him, and he taught them. 

kat e&nhOev wddw mapa tiv Oddaccav: Kal was 6 byAos Hpxero 
mpos avrov, kat ediSacKev avtovs. Mk. ii. 13. 

This simple form of sentence construction is very common in 

the N.T. 


-117. A Complex Sentence is a sentence which contains a prin- 
cipal clause, and one or more subordinate clauses depending on it, or 
on one another, as noun, adjective, or adverb equivalents, 

The verb in the principal clause of a complex sentence is nearly 
always in the Indicative or Imperative Mood, and it should be looked 
for first in translating the sentence. 

Example of a Complex Sentence : 

If any man willeth to do his will, he shall know of the doctrine, 
whether it is of God, or whether I speak from myself. 

eav tus Oé€An TO O€Anpa avtod moveiv,* yyooera epi ths Siday7s, 
motepov ek Tod Ocod éoTiv ij éy@ am’ éwavTod ada. Jn. vii. 17. 


118. Subordinate clauses are divided into three classes : 


Noun clauses which take the place of a noun. 
Adverbial clauses which take the place of an adverb. 
Adjectival clauses which take the place of an adjective. 


82 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT 
SENTENCES OR IN PRINCIPAL CLAUSES 


119. The Hortatory Subjunctive. The Subjunctive is used in 
the 1st person plural when the speaker is exhorting others to join him 
in the doing of an action. 

Example: Beloved, let us love one another. 

Dilecti, diligamus alii alios. 
dyamnrol, ayam@pev adAnovs. 1 Jn. iv. 7. 
120. The 1st person singular is also used with ddes prefixed. 
Example: Let me cast out the mote out of thine eye. 
des éxBddw 7d kapgos ex TOD dPBapo0d cov. Mt. vii. 4. 

121. Deliberative Subjunctive. The Subjunctive is used in deli- 

berative questions, when a person asks himself or another what he is to do. 


Example: What shall we do? 
Quid faciamus ? 
TL Too @per ; Lk. iii. 10. 
122. The Subjunctive is often used to ask a question after @é\eus, Oédere, 
Bov\eobe, without a conjunction between. 


Example: Where wilt thou that we prepare for thee to eat the Passover? 
mod Oédets ETOLMATwWpey Gor payely TO raoxa; Mt. xxvi. 17. 


This use even occurs when words are inserted between @édexs etc. and the 
Subjunctive. 


Example: What will ye that I should do for you? 
tl OédeTE we ToLnow duty ; Mix. 3Ga ee 

123. The use of ov py. 

The Future Indicative and the Aorist Subjunctive are used in 
Classical Greek with ov py in the sense of the Future Indicative with 
ov but with more emphasis. 

In the New Testament od py occurs frequently with the Aorist 
Subjunctive, and occasionally with the Future Indicative. 

When it occurs in a quotation from the Septuagint or in the words 
of Christ it is often used as a simple negative future without any special 
emphasis. This seems to be due to the fact that these passages are 
translations from a Hebrew or Aramaic original! 

When it occurs elsewhere it generally has an emphatic sense. 


1 The use of ov 7 in these passages is not accounted for by the fact that 
there was a double negative in Aramaic: but by the teeling of the trans- 
lators that “inspired language was fitly rendered by words of a peculiarly 
decisive tone.” 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 83 


Examples. (1) Of the emphatic sense: 

Him that cometh to me I will in no wise cast out. 

Tov Epxopevov mpos pe ov pr) exBdrw Zéa. Jn. vi. 37. 

If I must die with thee, I will not deny thee. 

éav S€n pe cvvarrobaveiv co, ov py ce dpvjnoopa. Mk. xiv. 31. 
(2) Of the unemphatic sense : 

The cup which my Father has given me, shall I not drink it? 

Td wotnptov d Sédaxév poe 6 Iartyp, ov a) wiw airé; Jn. xviii. 11. 
See also Mt. xxv. 9, Mk. xiii. 2. 


For a full discussion of the question see Dr J. H. Moulton’s Pro- 
legomena, pages 187—192. 


THE IMPERATIVE MOOD 


124. The Imperative Mood is used to express commands, ex- 
hortations and entreaties, and, in some cases, permission. 


Examples. Command. Give to him that asketh thee. 
Qui petit a te, da ei. 
T@ airovyti oe dbs. Mt. v. 42. 
Entreaty. But, if thou canst do anything, help us. 
Sed, si quid potes, adjuva nos. 
GAN, et re Ovvn, BonOnoov npiv. 
Mk. ix. 22. 
Permission. If need so require, let him do what he 
will; he sinneth not; let them marry. 
éav ovTws odeirer yiver Oat, 6 Oédet roveira: 
ovx dwapraver’ yapeirooar. 


1 Cor. vii. 36. 


125. The tenses of the Imperative which are in general use are 
the Present and the Aorist. 

The Present Imperative, in accordance with the use of the Present 
Tense in moods other than the Indicative, denotes action in Progress, 
or Habitual action. . 

The Aorist Imperative, in accordance with the use of the Aorist 
Tense in moods other than the Indicative, denotes that the action is 
regarded as a Single Event. 


6—2 


84 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Examples ; Compare together the use of the Imperatives in the two 
forms of the Lord’s Prayer. 
Give us (keep on giving us) day by day our daily bread. 


, n ace. hp : 
rov dprov ja Tov émvovoroy didov jpiv TO Kad’ jpépay. Lk. xi. 3. 


Give us to-day our daily bread. 
rov dprov nuav Tov eriovoroy dds juiv onpepov. Mt. vi. 11. 
The Pres. Imperative denotes a continuous act of giving—day after 
day. 
The Aor. Imperative denotes a single act of giving—for to-day. 


Compare also Mt. v. 42 with Lk. vi. 30; and consider carefully the 
exact force of the Imperatives in the examples given below. 


PROHIBITIONS 


126. Prohibitions are negative commands or petitions, 

They are expressed in Greek by the Present Imperative or the 
Aorist Subjunctive (not Imperative) with the negative yy and its 
compounds. 

The distinction in meaning between the Pres. Imperative and the 
Aor, Subjunctive is the same as that between the Pres. Imperative and 
Aor. Imperative in affirmative commands. 

The Pres. Imperative forbids the Continuance of an action 
already in progress, or sometimes the Habitual Doing of an action, 
or even the attempt to do it. 

The Aor. Subjunctive forbids the doing of an action without any 
regard to its progress or frequency, and it is most generally used with 
regard to an action not already begun. 

These distinctions of meaning are carefully observed by the writers 
of the N.T. and must not be neglected in translating because we have 
no corresponding niceties of phrase in English. 

(In Latin the Perfect Subjunctive with me is used to express a 
Prohibition.) 


12'7. Examples of the use of the Present Imperative to denote 
the prohibition of an action in progress, or in the sense of a command 
to cease to do the action. 

It is I, be not afraid (do not continue to be afraid). 
eyo cig, py PoBetobe. Mk. vi. 50, 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 85 


Thy daughter is dead, do not trouble the Master any further. 
TéOvnkev 7) Ovyarnp cov, pykére oKVAXE Tov AiddoKador. 
Lk. viii. 49. 
Compare the expression used in Mk. v. 85—# Ouydrnp cov dméOavev: 
ti ért oxvAXAes TOV AcSdoKadov; 


Daughters of Jerusalem, weep not for me (cease to weep for me). 

Ouyarépes ‘Iepovaadyp, p1) KAaleTe err” pe. Lk. xxiii. 28. 

Take these things hence, do not make my Father’s House a house 
of merchandise. 

dpare ravra evredGev, pn moveire Tov oikov Tod Tarpés pov otkov 
€j47ropiov. Jn. ii. 16. 

(Notice the use of the Aor. Imperative—commanding the immediate 

removal of the doves.) 


Behold thou art made whole: do not go on sinning, lest a worse 
thing come upon thee. 
We dyups yéyovas’ pnKér dpdprave, iva pr xeipdv col Te yévynrat. 


dis se, eS 


128. In the following example the Present Imperative appears to 
be used to forbid the repeated doing of an action. 


Do not keep going from house to house. 
py peraBaivere &€& oixias cis oikiav. Lk, x. 7. 


(The command cannot mean cease to go from house to house, because 
the disciples had not yet started on their mission.) 


Let not sin continue to reign in your mortal body...neither keep 
on presenting your members unto sin as instruments of unrighteous- 
ness ; but present yourselves (once for all) to God. 

pa) obv Bacievér@ 7 dpapria €v TO OvnT@ tpov copare...pndé map- 
woravere Ta PéAN Upav Orda ddikias TH Gpapria, dA\Aa mapaorncate EavTois 
TO Oe@. Rom. vi. 12, 13. 

Notice the contrast in the use of the Aorist Imperative rapacrijcare. 

See also Mk. xiii. 21, Jn. x. 37, Eph. iv. 26, 1 Tim. iv. 14, v. 22, 
dh, 1h 1 

For the possible use of the Present Imperative in the sense of do not 


attempt to do the action (conative) see 1 Cor. xiv. 39, Gal. v. 1, and 
Dr J. H, Moulton’s Prolegomena, p. 125. 


86 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


129. The use of the Aorist Subjunctive in the sense of a 
command not to begin the action. 


Do not get gold...for your purses. 

py krnonobe xpvodv...eis Tas (avas vor. Mt. x. 9. 

Do not therefore begin to be ashamed of the testimony of our 
Lord nor of me his prisoner. 

pi) obv eraoxvvOjs TO papripioy Tov Kupiov nwov, pnde epe Tov 
Oégpuov avrov. 2 Tim. 1. 8. 


180. The following are examples of the use of both the Pres. 
Imperative and the Aor. Subjunctive in the same sentence. 
Do not carry (continue to carry) a purse, nor a scrip, nor shoes, 
and do not salute any man by the way. 
pa) Baoragere BadAdvrioy, ut) mHpay, pr) Urodnpara, Kat pndéva kara 
THY ddov damaona be. Lk. x. 4. 
Then spake the Lord to Paul in the night by a vision, “Do not 
fear (as you have already begun to), but go on speaking, and do not 
begin to hold thy peace.” 
elmev Sé 6 Kvpwos ev vuxti dv dpduatos To TavAw: pr) PoBov, adda 
AdAet kal py) TLomnoys. Acts xviii. 9. 
Compare also Lk. xiv. 8 with verse 12. 


THE OPTATIVE MOOD 


131. The Optative Mood has almost disappeared from use in 
N.T. Greek. When used it generally expresses a wish. 
Example; May it be unto me according to thy word. 
yevouTo pot KaTa TO pHa Gov. Lk. i. 38. 


132. The Potential Optative with dv is used to express what would 
happen on the fulfilment of a supposed condition. 

It is to be translated by the English Auxiliaries would, should, 
could, and it is very rare in the N.T. See Acts viii. 31, xvii. 18. 

The Optative in Dependent Questions and in Conditional Sentences 
is also very rare, and will be treated under those heads. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 87 


THE INFINITIVE AND ITS EQUIVALENTS IN NOUN 
CLAUSES AND IN CERTAIN ADVERBIAL CLAUSES 


183. The so-called Infinitive Mood had its origin in the Dative 
and Locative cases of a verbal noun. 

Avew meant originally for loosing or in loosing. 

This Dative or Locative force can still be seen in some of the uses 
of the Infinitive, especially when it is used in Adverbial clauses 
denoting purpose or result. 

But, generally speaking, the Infinitive is regarded as an indeclinable 
verbal noun which can be made declinable by the addition of the 
article. 

The Infinitive partakes of the nature both of a verb and a noun. 

As a verb it has a subject expressed or understood, and it may have 
an object, it is qualified by adverbs, and has tense and voice. 

As a noun it may stand as the subject or object of another verb, it 
may be in apposition to another noun or pronoun, or it may be governed 
by a preposition, 

The subject of the Infinitive is properly in the Accusative case. 

The use of the Greek Infinitive is much wider than that of the 
English Infinitive. It is sometimes translated by the English Infini- 
tive, or by the English verbal noun in ing, and sometimes by the 
English Indicative, Subjunctive, or even Imperative mood. 

The fact that the Infinitive was in its origin a verbal noun has 
caused it to be employed in a great variety of subordinate clauses. 

It is used, naturally, in Noun clauses, as being a noun, and it is 
also used in Adverbial clauses expressing purpose or result, because 
it retains something of its old Dative sense. 


134. Clauses introduced by iva or ér frequently take the place of 
the Infinitive in New Testament Greek just as clauses introduced by 
that frequently do in English. 

For example we can say 

I declare him to be innocent. 
Or J declare that he is innocent. 
He commanded bread to be set before them. 
Or He commanded that bread should be set before them. 


88 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


It is sufficient for the servant to be as his master. 

Or It is sufficient for the servant that he should be as his master. 
I am going to buy bread. 

Or I am going that I may buy bread. 


A clause introduced by ér: may take the place of an Infinitive in a 
Noun clause after a verb of saying or thinking in both Classical and 
New Testament Greek. 

In New Testament Greek a clause introduced by iva may take the 
place of the Infinitive in almost every other kind of clause where a 
simple infinitive might be used, but in Classical Greek this construction 
is only used in Adverbial clauses expressing purpose. 


185. The student must never be surprised to find a clause intro- 
duced by iva in the New Testament where an Infinitive might have 
been expected. The two uses are practically parallel. 

The Infinitive and a clause introduced by iva occur side by side in 
1 Cor. xiv. 5: 


Odo S€ mavras tpas Aadeiv yAwooats paddov dé iva mpodnrevnre. 
I wish all of you to speak with tongues, but more that ye may 
prophesy. 
Observe the exact parallel of the English use of an Infinitive and 
a clause introduced by that. 
The Infinitive occurs in one Gospel, and a clause introduced by tva 
in the parallel passage in another Gospel. 


Example: The latchet of whose shoes I am not worthy to stoop 
down and unloose. od ovk eipi ixavos xiwWas Ada Tov 
iudvra Tov vVrodnudrov avTov. Mk. i. 7. 
The latchet of whose shoe I am not worthy to unloose. 
od ovk eipt eyo a&ws va \iow adtod Tov ipavta Tod 
tmodnuaros. Jn, i. 27, 
See sections 180—196 for a fuller treatment of this subject. 


1386. Clauses and phrases which take a verb in the Infinitive mood 
may be arranged under four heads : 


(1) Principal clauses where the Infinitive is used in the sense of 
an Imperative to express a command or exhortation. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 89 


(2) Adverbial clauses. 
(a) Final clauses, denoting purpose. 
(6) Consecutive clauses, denoting result. 
(ec) Temporal clauses after piv. 


(3) Noun clauses standing as 
(a) Subject. 
(6) Object. 
(c) In apposition to a noun or pronoun. 
(4) Explanatory phrases limiting the meaning of a noun, or 
adjective, or even of a verb. 


(1) The Imperative Infinitive 


187. The Infinitive is sometimes used to express a command or 
exhortation. This is an ancient use of the Infinitive in Greek, and has 
parallels in modern languages, but it is very rare in the New Testament. 

Example: Rejoice with them that do rejoice, and weep with them 

that weep. 
Xaipew pera yatpdvTa@y, kAaiew pera KAaLOvTOV. 


Rom. xii. 15. 
See also Acts xxiii. 26, Phil. iii. 16, Titus ii, 2. 


(2) The use of the Infinitive in Adverbial Clauses 


188. (a) The Infinitive of Purpose. 

The Infinitive is used in Greek, as in English, to denote the purpose 
of the action of the principal verb. 

The original Dative force of the Infinitive, expressing that to or for 
which anything is done, comes out plainly in this use. 

Compare together the English sentences : 


I am going to the Temple to pray. (Infinitive.) 
And Iam going to the Temple for prayer. (Noun in the Dative.) 


Examples: I am going to fish, or I go a fishing. 


Umdyo ddvevery. Jn. xxi. 3. 
For Christ sent me not to baptise, but to preach the 
gospel. 


, > A > 
od yap améaredév pe Xpiotds Bawrigew, adda evayyeNi- 


(eoOa. Corsielz 


90 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


A clause introduced by iva is, however, more generally used in this 
sense. See 184, 198. 


1389. (b) The Infinitive of Result. 
The Infinitive may also be used to express the result or consequence 
of the action of the principal verb. 
It is generally introduced by dove, but is occasionally found standing 
alone. See further 230—232. 
Example: And the waves beat into the boat, so that the boat was 
now filling. 
kal Ta KUpata éméBaAXdev eis TO WAOLOV, BaTeE On yepiCe- 
cba 76 moiov. Mk. iv. 37. 
Example of an Infinitive without dare denoting result : 
For God is not unrighteous so as to forget your work. 


ov yap Gdkos 6 Geds eridabécOat Tov epyou tpayv. Heb. vi, 10. 
See also Acts v. 3, Col. iv. 6, Heb. v. 5. 


140. (c) The Infinitive in Temporal clauses after piv. 
When the verb in the principal clause is affirmative, a temporal 
clause introduced by mpiv has its verb in the Infinitive. 
Example: Verily I say to thee that, in this night, before the cock 
crow, thou shalt deny me thrice. 
dprpy Néyw@ woe Ore ev TavTH TH VUKTI mMply adé€xTopa havacar 


Tpls amapvnoy pe Mt. xxvi. 34, 
See also section 216. 


(83) The use of the Infinitive in Noun Clauses 


141. A Noun clause is a clause that stands in the relationship of 
a noun to the principal clause or some other clause in a complex 
sentence. 


The Infinitive, as being a verbal noun, is regularly used in Noun 
clauses in Greek and Latin. 


142. (a) Noun clauses standing as the Subject of a verb. 
In these clauses the verb is put in the Infinitive mood, and its 
subject in the Accusative case. 
Examples: For it is easier for a camel to go through the eye of a 
needle than for a rich man to enter into the kingdom of God. 
eVKoma@TEpOY ‘yap cot Kayndov did TpHpatos Beddvns cicehOciv F 
mAovovov eis THY BaciAciav Tod Beod ciaedOciv. Lk, xviii. 25, 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 91 


Is it lawful for us to give tribute to Caesar or not? 


eeorw nas Kaioaps popov Sovvar i) ov; ik. xx; 22) 
And it came to pass that he was sitting at meat in his house. 
kat ylyverat kataxeio Oar avrov €v TH oikia avtod. Mk. ii. 15. 


148. A clause introduced by é7 may take the place of the Infinitive as 
the subject of a verb. 


Example: Carest thou not that we perish? 
ov médet gor Ste droddUmeGa ; Mk, iv. 38. 
See also Lk. x. 40. 


144. (b) Noun clauses standing as the Object of a verb. 

The verb in these clauses may be nearly always in the Infinitive 
mood, but a clause introduced by 67 is often substituted for the 
Infinitive in both Classical and New Testament Greek, and in New 
Testament Greek a clause introduced by iva is often found as a sub- 
stitute for the Infinitive after certain verbs. See 188—190. 


145. Object Clauses after verbs denoting saying or thinking, 
or Dependent Statements, 

A Dependent Statement, or the Oratio Obliqua, as it is often 
called, repeats the thoughts or sayings of a person, not in the words in 
which they were originally conceived or spoken, but in the words of the 
reporter, or, to put it in another way, it is an Object Clause depending 
on a verb of saying, thinking, or feeling. 

Example: Mr Smith said that he was very pleased to be there 
that evening, and to see them all sitting round that table. 


These words are a report of what Mr Smith said, and not the 
words which he actually uttered. 

The words which he did say were: J am very pleased to be here 
this evening, and to see you all sitting rownd this table. 

In the first example his words are incorporated into the structure 
of the sentence, and made into a Noun Clause, which is the Object of 
the verb sazd. 

The whole passage has been remodelled to suit the position of the 
reporter instead of the position of the speaker. 

The verb J am very much pleased has been put into the third person 
and so have the Personal Pronouns J and you. 

The tense of the verb is changed from Present to Past. 

Here has been changed to there, and this to that. 


92 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


146. Object Clauses of this kind may be translated into Greek, 
and must be translated into Latin, by the Accusative and Infinitive 
construction, that is, the principal verbs are put into the Infinitive 
mood, and their Subjects are put into the Accusative Case. 

A clause introduced by dre followed by a verb in the Indicative or 
Optative Mood is however frequently substituted for the Accusative 
and Infinitive construction in Greek. = 


147. We have these two parallel constructions also in English : 
We can say I declare him to be a criminal. 
Or I declare that he is a criminal. 
We believe them to be here. 
Or We believe that they are here. 


The first of these constructions is an Accusative and Infinitive con- 
struction, just like the Greek or Latin construction. 

The second corresponds to the clause introduced by or in Greek. 

The second of these two constructions is far the most common in 
English ; the first can only be used after a few verbs. 


148. The following are examples of Dependent Statements in the 
Accusative and Infinitive construction taken from the New Testament. 
Ye say that I cast out devils by Beelzebub. 
Dicitis per Beelzebul ejicere me daemonia. (Beza.) 
Réyere ev BeeCeBovA exBadrew pe Ta Sarpovia. Lk. xi. 18. 
How do they say that Christ is the son of David ? 
Quomodo dicunt Christum esse filium David ? 
TOs héyovow Tov Xpiorov eivar Aaveid vidv ; Lk. xx. 41. 
The crowd therefore that stood by and heard said that it had 
thundered. 
Turba ergo quae stabat et audierat dicebat tonitruum esse factum. 
6 ovv ByNos 6 Extas Kal dxovoas eheyev Bpovtny yeyovévat. 
Jn. xii. 29. 


I do not think that even the world itself would contain the books 
which should be written. 


Ne mundum quidem ipsum opinor capturum esse eos qui scribe- 
rentur libros. (Beza.) 


oS’ avréy oipat Tov Kdopov xopnoew Ta ypapspeva BiBXta. 
Jn. xxi. 25. 


, 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 93 


149. When the subject of the verb in the principal clause (the verb of 
saying or thinking) is the same as the subject of the infinitive, the subject of 
the infinitive is put in the Nominative case in Greek (not in Latin). 

This construction avoids the ambiguity which so often is felt in English 
in dependent statements. 

This construction is common in Classical Greek, and a few instances 
occur in the N.T.; for example: 


For I could wish that I myself were anathema from Christ for my 
brethren’s sake. 

nixduny yap avdbeua elvar abrds ey drd Tod Xpicrod brép rdv ddehpav 
pov. Rom. ix. 3. 

Saying that they were wise they became foolish, 

pacxovres elvat codpol éuwpavOncay. Rom. i, 22, - 


See also Mt. xix. 21, Mk. ix. 35, Jn. vii. 4, 2 Cor. x. 2. 


150. After verbs of feeling, seeing or knowing (perception as opposed to 
statement) the Accusative and the Participle is preferred to the Accusative 
and the Infinitive, especially in Classical Greek. (Not in Latin.) 


I see that thou art in the gall of bitterness and in the bond of iniquity. 
eis yap xoAhy mexplas Kal civdecuoy déiklas 6p@ ce dvra. Acts Vili. 23. 


See also Lk. viii. 46. For the Genitive and Participle after dxovew see 
Jn, vii. 32. 
Tense of the Infinitive 


151. In Latin and Greek the tense of the Infinitive in a dependent 
statement is always the same as that used by the original speaker when 
he uttered the words. 

The use in English is different. 

In English, when the verb of saying or feeling is in a Primary tense 
(that is, in the Present or Future tense) the tense of the verbs in the 
dependent statement is unchanged. 

If the original speaker said J see the city, this becomes in indirect 
speech He says that he sees the city: the person of the verb only is 
changed and the tense remains the same. 

If the original speaker said I saw the city, this becomes in indirect 
speech He says that he saw the city. 

If the original speaker said I shall see the city, this becomes in 
indirect speech He says that he will see the city. 

After a verb of saying or feeling in a future tense these sentences 
would be—He will say that he sees the city, He will say that he saw the 
city, He will say that he will see the city. 

But when the verb of saying or feeling is in a Secondary tense 
(that is, a Past tense) the tense of the verbs in the dependent statement 


94 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


is put one stage further in the past than the time of the tense used 
by the original speaker. ‘ 

If the original speaker said J see the city, this becomes in indirect 
speech He said that he saw the city. ind, 

If the original speaker said / saw the city, or I have seen the city, 
this becomes in indirect speech He said that he had seen the city. 

If the original speaker said J shall see the city, this becomes in 
indirect speech He said that he would see the city. 

We see in these examples that the present tense of independent 
statement becomes the past tense in dependent statement. bd 

The past tense of independent statement becomes the pluperfect 
(or doubly past) tense, in dependent statement. 

The future tense of independent statement becomes the second 
future or future in the past! tense in dependent statement. 


152. But in Latin and Greek the infinitives in dependent state- 
ments are always put in the same tense as that used by the original 
speaker, both when the principal verb is in a Primary tense, and when 
it is in a Secondary tense. 

If the original speaker said J see the city, 

This will become He says that he sees the city in English. 

Dicit se urbem videre in Latin, 
Aéyet THY mod Spay in Greek. 

The tense used by the original speaker is kept in all three languages 
because the principal verb is in a Primary tense. 

But if the principal verb is in a Secondary tense the sentence will 
be as follows: 

English: He said that he saw the city. 
Latin: Dixit se urbem videre. 
Greek:  €Aeye tiv mow épav. 

In these examples the tense used by the original speaker is retained 
in the dependent statement in Latin and Greek, but not in English. 

In the same way if the original speaker said I saw the city, after a 
principal verb in a Primary tense this will become 

He says that he saw the city. 
Dicit se urbem vidisse, 
Aéyer THY Tod ideiv. 


1 This name has been adopted by the Joint Committee on Grammatical 
Terminology. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 95 


But after a principal verb in a Secondary tense the sentence will be 
as follows; 
He said that he had seen the city 
Dixit se urbem vidisse. 
eheye thy wodw ideiv, 


If the original speaker said J shall see the city, after a principal verb 
in a Primary tense this will become 


He says that he will see the city, 
~ Dicit se urbem visurum esse, 
Reyer THY wow OerGat. 


But after a principal verb in a Secondary tense the sentence will be 
as follows: 
He said that he would see the city. 
Dixit se urbem visurum esse. 
eeye THY mod OerOat. 


It is good practice to read over the report of a speech in a news- 
paper, where most speeches are reported in the Oratio Obliqua, and to 
put it into direct speech by restoring in thought the words which the 
speaker actually used. 


153. As has been mentioned above, there is in Greek another way 
of expressing dependent statements besides the Accusative and Infini- 
tive construction. This way is almost exactly similar to the English 
way of expressing dependent statements, for the clause is introduced 
by 67: (thaz) and the verbs are in a Finite mood (that is, they are in some 
mood other than the Infinitive). 

As is the case in the Infinitive construction explained above, the 
tense used by the original speaker must in no case be altered in 
expressing his words as a dependent statement. 

This point deserves special attention, because it is entirely opposed 
to the English use, where, as we have seen above, the tense of all verbs 
in dependent statements is altered after a principal verb in a Second- 
ary tense. 

If the original speaker said J see the city, this will become after a 
principal verb in a Primary tense 


He says that he sees the city. 


4 oe \ , c fc) 
Aéyer Ore Tv woh Opa. 


96 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


But after a principal verb in a Secondary tense it will be 
He said that he saw the city. 
édeyev Ore THY modu Opa. 
If the original speaker said I saw the city, this will become after a 
principal verb in a Primary tense 
He says that he saw the city. 


héyer Ore rv modu cider. 
But after a principal verb in a Secondary tense it will be 
He said that he had seen the city. 


édeyev Ore THY modw cider. 


If the original speaker said Z shall see the city, this will become after 
a principal verb in a Primary tense 


He says that he will see the city. 


Réyer Gre Ty modw Overa. 
But after a principal verb in a Secondary tense it will be 
He said that he would see the city. 


edeyev Ore THY wow oYerat. 


The following are examples of this construction taken from the New 
Testament : 


Supposing that she was going to the tomb to weep there. 
ddEavres dre brdyer eis TO pyqueiov iva davon exe. Jn. xi. 31. 


They supposed that they would have received more. 
évduicay ore wetov Anwovrat. Mt. xx. 10. 


154. After a principal verb in a Secondary tense the Same Tense of the 
Optative mood as that used in the Indicative mood by the original speaker 
is frequently employed in Classical Greek in dependent statements introduced 
by 671. This construction is never found in the New Testament. 


Examples: He said that he saw the city. édeyev dre ri wow pwn. 
(The original speaker said 6p& rv wédw.) 

He said that he had seen the city. édeyev dre thy woduw tor, 
(The original speaker said eldov ryv mbduy.) 

He said that he would see the city. édeyev dri Thy wodw bYorTO, 
(The original speaker said SWouat rHv wodw.) 


155. N.B. A verb is never put into the Subjunctive mood in 
Greek, as it is in Latin, because it is the verb in a dependent statement. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 97 
The chief thing to remember in Greek is never to change the 


tense used by the original speaker when putting his words into 
the Oratio Obliqua. 


Subordinate Clauses in Dependent Statements 


156. The rules given above apply to verbs in principal clauses in 


Dependent Statements. 


As however a whole speech may be expressed as a dependent state- 
ment, it is obvious that complex sentences which contain subordinate 
as well as principal clauses may occur in a statement of this kind. 


Example: Mr Smith said that although he had been their member 
for twenty years, he had never known how much they appreciated his 
services, until he entered the hall that evening. 


Here all the clauses in italics are subordinate clauses in a de- 
pendent statement. 

In English after a verb of saying or feeling in a Secondary tense all 
the verbs in such subordinate clauses are put into past tenses, just as 
the verb in the principal clause is. 

But in New Testament Greek all verbs in Subordinate clauses in a 
dependent statement are kept in the same tense and mood as that 
used by the original speaker. This is the case both when the 
Accusative and Infinitive construction is used in the principal clause 
of the dependent statement and also when it is introduced by éru. 

Dependent statements made up of complex sentences are however 
very rare in the N.T. 


Example: They came saying that they had seen a vision of angels 
who said that he was alive. 
> a Coe r >? , c a a s ea | 
HAOov A€éyovoea Kal dmraciav ayyéAa@y Ewpakévat, of €yovow avTov 


Civ. Lk. xxiv. 23. 


The words which the women said were We have seen a vision of 
angels who say that he is alive. 


15'7. In Classical Greek after a verb of saying or feeling in a Secondary 
tense all verbs in the Subordinate clauses of a dependent statement, whether 
they are in the Indicative or Subjunctive mood, may be put in the same 
tense of the Optative mood. 


N. 7 


98 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


158. érvis frequently used in the New Testament to introduce a 
direct quotation of the speaker’s actual words; it is of course redundant, 
and can only be expressed in English by the use of Inverted Commas. 

Example: He said “I am he.” 

exeivos édeyev OTe eyo etme. Jn. ix. 9. 

The redundant ér: may even be used before a direct question. See 

Mk. iv. 21. 


159. Object clauses after verbs meaning to entreat, to exhort, 
to command, or Dependent Commands or Petitions. 

Dependent Commands or Petitions follow verbs of commanding 
or entreating to tell us the command that was given or the request 
that was made, not in the words of the original speaker, but in the 
words of the reporter. ; 

Examples: He commanded them to go away. 

(The words used by the original speaker were Go away.) 

He requested them to follow him. 

(The words of the original speaker were Follow me.) 

Dependent commands or petitions are generally expressed in Greek, 
as in English, by the use of the Infinitive mood. 

Examples: He commanded them not to depart from Jerusalem. 

mapnyyerev avtots amd ‘Iepooodvpov pn yopicer Oar 
s Acts i. 4 
Master, I beseech thee to look upon my son. 
diddoxare, Séopai cov emiBréWat emi Tov vidy pov. 
Lk. ix. 38: 

In New Testament Greek a clause introduced by iva often takes the 
place of the Infinitive construction in dependent commands or petitions. 
See 189, 

Subordinate clauses in Dependent Commands follow the same rule as 
subordinate clauses in Dependent Statements; see section 156. 

For an example see Mt. xviii. 25. 

160. Object clauses after verbs meaning to ask a question etc. 
or Dependent Questions. 

Dependent Questions follow verbs meaning to ask a question etc., 
to tell us the question that was asked, not in the words of the original 
speaker, but in the words of the reporter. 

Example: He asked if they were going away. 

(The words used by the origiual speaker were Are you going away ?) 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 99 


The rules for translating dependent questions into N.T. Greek are 
exactly the same as those for translating dependent statements in a 
clause beginning with ér. The mood and tense used by the original 
speaker are retained, whether the verb on which they depend is in a 
Primary or Secondary tense. 

Examples: They asked if Simon lodged there. 

émvGavorto ei Siuwv evOade Eevifera. Acts x. 18, 

The question which they asked was Does Simon lodge here ? 

Calling the centurion he asked him if he had been long dead. 


Tm poka\eodpevos Tov KevTUpiava éemnpwTnoey ei mada dmébavev. 


Mk. xv. 44. 


161. But in the writings of St Luke we often find the Optative 
substituted for an Indicative or Subjunctive used by the original speaker 
when the main verb is in a Secondary tense. 

This is also the usage of Classical Greek. 

And they began to question among themselves which of them it 
was that should do this thing. 

kal avrot #pEavto av¢nrety mpos éavrovs TO Tis dpa ein e€& aitov 6 
rovTo péd\Awy mpdocew. Lk. xxii. 23. 

See also Lk. xviii. 36, Acts xvii. 11, xxi. 33. 

162. Any Object clause introduced by any Interrogative word 
is regarded as a Dependent Question, and is constructed in accordance 
with the rules given above. The main verb need not have the meaning 
of asking a question at all. 

Examples: If the good man of the house had known at what hour 
the thief would come, he would have watched. 

ei 7det 6 oixodearorns moia pudaky 6 khemrys epxerat, eypnydpnoev 
ae Mt. xxiv. 43. 

They saw where he dwelt. 

elOov mov péevet. Jn. 1. 39. 

N.B. The Subjunctive Mood is never used in Greek, as in Latin, 
as the proper mood for dependent questions. 

If it is ever found in them, it is because it was in the question as 
asked by the original speaker, as for example in Acts xxv. 26, Lk. xii. 5. 


168. Dependent Exclamations follow the same rules as De- 
pendent Questions. See Mk. iii 8, xv. 4, Gal. vi. 11. 


7—2 


100 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


164, The following classes of verbs call for special mention because 


of the peculiarity of the constructions in the object clauses which follow 
them. 


165. Object clauses after verbs meaning to strive, to plan, to take 
heed, to effect. 

The usual construction in an object clause after these verbs in 
Classical Greek is dws followed by a Future Indicative. 

In the New Testament an Infinitive is sometimes found, and some- 
times a clause introduced by wa. See 190. 

Examples of the use of the Infinitive after such verbs are found in 
Lk. xiii. 24, Gal. ii. 10, 2 Tim. iv. 9. 


166. Object clauses after verbs denoting fear or danger, 


These verbs are followed by an object clause introduced by pn both 
in Classical and New Testament Greek. See 192. 


167. Verbs meaning to rejoice, to wonder, to be vexed, to grieve 
are generally followed by an object clause introduced by 67 with a 
verb in the Indicative mood. 

In Mk. xv. 44 and 1 Jn. iii. 13 a verb meaning to wonder is followed 
by a clause introduced by «i, as is often the case in Classical Greek. 


168. Verbs meaning to hope, to promise, and to swear are generally 
followed by an Aorist Infinitive. 


169. (c) Noun clauses standing in apposition to a noun or 
pronoun. 


Example: Pure religion and undefiled before our God and Father is this, 
to visit the fatherless and widows in their affliction, and to keep himself un- 
spotted from the world. 


Opnokela kabapd Kal dulavros mapa TH Oe xal rarpl airy éoriv, éwickér- 
TecOar dppavods kal xxypas ev TH OALWer avTay, domwtNov éauTdov Typely amd TOD 


Kégov. James i. 27. 
See also Acts xv. 28, 29, 1 Thess. iv. 3. 


(4) The Hpexegetic or Explanatory Infinitive 


170. The Infinitive may be used after a noun or adjective, 
especially those which denote ability, fitness, readiness, or need, in an 
explanatory sense, just as in English. 

Examples : Whose shoes I am not worthy to bear. 


ar A as 
ov OUK €imt ixavos Ta Urodnuata Bactdoa. Mt. ili. 11. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 101 


He that hath ears to hear, let him hear, 


6 €y@v Ora adkoverv, axovéro. Lk, viii. 8, 
Opportunity to return. 

Kaipov avaxdpyat Heb. xi. 15. 
Time for you to awake out of sleep. 

Gpa 75n bpas && Umvou eyepOnvat. Rom. xiii. 11. 


171. This Explanatory Infinitive is found even after verbs. See Acts 
xv. 10. 


The Infinitive with the Article 


172. The prefixing of an article to the Infinitive emphasises its 
character as a noun. When preceded by an article it becomes 
a declinable neuter noun, varying in case as the case of the article 
varies. 

The Infinitive may have a subject, object, or other limiting words 
attached to it. These words generally come between the article and 
the Infinitive, and form with it a phrase equiyalent to a noun. 

Examples: Phrase containing Infinitive with Article as subject of 
a sentence ; 

But to eat with unwashed hands does not defile the man. 
To O€ dvimros xepolv hayeiv od Kowoi Tov GvOpwrov, Mt. xv. 20. 

Infinitive phrase as object. 

I refuse not to die. 
ov mapatrovpat TO amodaveiv. Acts xxv. 11. 

Infinitive phrase in apposition. 

I determined this for myself not to come again to you with sorrow 
éxpiva yap €4avT@ TovTO TO pu) Mad ev AUTH mpos Lpas edOeiv. 


2 Cor. ii. 1. 


173. Infinitive phrase governed by a Preposition. 
Examples: And because it had no root it withered away. 
kal Oud TO pu) exew picav eEnpavOn. Mk. iv. 6. 
But take heed that ye do not your righteousness before men 
to be seen of them. 
mpooéxere S€ Thy Sixavocivny tpaev pur) woveiv Epmpoobev TaY avOpa- 
mov mpos TO Geabnvat avrois. Mt. vi. 1. 
And as he sowed some fell by the wayside. 


i Rey, =e 
kal ev TH oTeipew avrov b pev Erecev mapa THY dOdv. Lk, viii. 5. 


* 
102 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


The Infinitive with rov 


174. The Infinitive with the Genitive Article has a peculiar series 
of uses in which it “retains its Genitive force almost as little as the 
Genitive Absolute.” (J. H. Moulton.) 

It is used in the Septuagint and the New Testament exactly as if 
it were a simple Infinitive to express purpose, or consequence, or 
epexegetically, or even as the subject or object of a Finite verb. 


175. (1) Purpose. 
Example: For Herod will seek the young child to destroy him. 
pédrer yap “Hp@dns (ynreiv 1rd mardiov rob dmohécat avTo. 
Mt. ii. 13. 
In Lk. ii. 22, 24 the simple Infinitive and the Infinitive with rod are 
used side by side with exactly the same force. 
See also Lk. i. 76, 77 and 79. Compare Phil. iii. 10, 
This is the most common use of this construction. 


176. (2) Consequence or Result. 
Example: And ye, when ye saw it, did not repent afterwards so 
as to believe him. 
bpeis Oe Odvres ovOE pereweAnOnre VorEpoy TOU muoTEVTAL ALTO. 
Mt, xxi. 32. 
See also Acts xviii. 10; Rom. vi. 6, vii. 3. 
177. (3) As Subject or Object of a Finite verb just like the 
simple Infinitive. 
Example: And when it was determined that we should sail into Italy. 
as O€ expiOn rod amomheiv nuas eis rHv “Iradiav. Acts xxvii. 1. 
See also Lk. xvii. 1, Acts x. 25, xx. 3, 
And when we heard these things, we, and they that were there, 
besought him not to go up to Jerusalem. 
cs b€ jkovoapey TatTa mapexadodpey ipeis Te Kal of evTdmioL TOD pu} 
avaBaivew avrov eis ‘lepovoadnp. Acts xxi. 12. 
See also Acts ii. 12, xv. 20, xxiii. 20; James v. 17. 


178. (4) The Infinitive with rod is also used epexegetically 
(that is, in such a way as to explain the meaning) with nouns, adjectives, 
and verbs just like the simple Infinitive. See 170. 

Examples: And he sought a suitable time to betray him to them 
without a tumult. 

kal (iret evkaipiay Tod mapadovvat av’tov arep bxNov adrois. 


Lk. xxii. 6. 


~\ 
NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 103 


And seeing that he had faith to be healed.... 
kal day ote €yet riot Tov cwOqva. Acts xiv. 9. 
O foolish and slow of heart to believe.... 
°Q dvénrot Kai Bpadeis rh Kapdia Tod micrevev.... Lk. xxiv. 25 
He...evil entreated our fathers by casting out their children. 
ovTOS...eKdkwoev TOs Tarépas Tod Toveiv Ta Bpédn exOera adray. 
Acts vii. 19. 
See also Acts xxiii. 15, Rom. viii. 12, 1 Pet. iv. 17. 
179. (5) It is also used normally in its proper Genitive sense 
with nouns and adjectives, and also after verbs governing a genitive. 
Examples: In hope of partaking. 
em’ eAmids Tov peréxetv. 1 Cor. ix. 10. 
Wherefore also I was hindered these many times from coming to 


you. 
66 Kal evexomrouny Ta moda Tod eAGew pds twas. Rom. xv. 22. 


See also Lk. i. 9; 1 Cor. xvi. 4; 2 Cor. i. 8, viii. 11; Phil. iii, 21. 


THE USE OF CLAUSES INTRODUCED BY ta AND OTHER 
FINAL PARTICLES AS SUBSTITUTES FOR THE IN- 
FINITIVE 


180. As has been already stated a clause introduced by iva or 
Grrws is frequently found in New Testament Greek where an Infinitive 
might have been expected, and where an Infinitive would have been 
used in Classical Greek. Even in New Testament Greek an Infinitive 
can be used with exactly the same force as the iva clause in nearly 
every case. 

At the time when the New Testament was being written, clauses 
introduced by tva were gradually taking the place of the Infinitive in 
familiar speech, and in modern Greek the Infinitive has entirely dis- 
appeared and vd with a Subjunctive taken its place. 

Many of the older Commentators and Grammarians deny that iva can 
have any other meaning than that which it has in the Classical writers, 
namely that of purpose, and put forced interpretations on every passage 
where it occurs, to bring in this meaning. This position is now aban- 
doned as the result of modern research into the history of the language 
and the discovery of the Egyptian papyri, where the use of iva in senses 
other than that of purpose is common. The student should not try to 
force the meaning of purpose on ta unless the context obviously 


demands it. 


104 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


The uses of clauses introduced by wva and the other Final Particles, 
éros and py, are here grouped together for convenience of reference : 
the difference between New Testament and Classical Greek is so marked 
in this respect as to make the subject worthy of special study. 


181. The exact force of a clause introduced by iva must be inferred 
from the context, and not from the form of the clause. As in English, 
it is the natural meaning and not the form of a clause that we must 
consider before we try to analyse a complex sentence. 

Take for example Jn. ix. 2: 

paBBei, ris jpaprev, otros i) of yoveis adrod, iva rupdds yevvnO7 ; 
Rabbi, who did sin, this man or his parents, so that he was born 
blind ? 

It is obvious that, although the clause a rupdés yeryvnO7 is in form 
a clause expressing purpose, it cannot be so in reality, as it is unthink- 
able that the parents of the man would have sinned in order that he 
might be born blind. The clause must express result and be described 
as a Consecutive clause. 

The verb in clauses introduced by iva, émws and pn in the New 
Testament is nearly always in the Subjunctive Mood, but in certain 
cases the Future Indicative is used instead. 


182. Clauses introduced by Final Particles may be arranged under 
four heads, just as the clauses which take a Verb in the Infinitive 
Mood, see 136. 

(1) Principal clauses where the iva clause is used as a substitute 
for an Imperative Infinitive. 

(2) Adverbial clauses where the wa clause is used as a substitute 
for an Infinitive retaining something of its old Dative sense : 

(a) Final clauses. 
(6) Consecutive clauses. 

(3) Noun clauses where the iva clause is used as a substitute for 
an Infinitive used as a caseless verbal noun. Such clauses may stand 

(a) As Subject. 
(6) As Object. 
(ec) In Apposition. 

(4) Explanatory clauses used as a substitute for an Explanatory 

Infinitive. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 105 


(1) Clauses introduced by iva standing in the 
place of an Imperative Infinitive 


183. This construction is rare and not Classical. The verb is in 
the Subjunctive Mood. 
Examples : Nevertheless do ye also severally love each one his own 
wife even as himself, and let the wife fear her husband. 
mArjy Kai ipets of Kad” eva Exacros tiv éavTod yuvaixa ovTas dyaTdro 
as éaurdv, 7 dé yur?) va hoBnra tov avSpa. Eph. v. 33. 
: But as ye abound in everything...see that ye abound in this grace 
also. 
GX domep év marti mepiooevere...iva cal év ratty tH xapiTe 
TEPLOWEUNTE. 7 2 Cor. viii. 7. 
See also Mk. v. 23, 1 Cor. vii. 29, Gal. ii. 10, Rev. xiv. 13. 
For the use of the simple Infinitive in this sense see 187. 


(2) Adverbial clauses introduced by iva, etc. 


184. (a) Final clauses denoting the purpose of the action of 
the verb in the principal clause. (Quite Classical.) 

These clauses are introduced by iva or évos if affirmative, and by 
py or iva pr if negative. 

The verb is generally in the Subjunctive in New Testament Greek, 
and occasionally in the Future Indicative. (In Classical Greek the 
Optative is used after iva if the verb in the principal clause is in a past 
tense, but this does not occur in the New Testament.) 

Examples: He came that he might bear witness to the light. 

obros jAGev wa paptupnon wept Tov dards. Jn. i. 7. 
And their eyes have they closed; lest haply they should perceive 
with their eyes. 
kal Tos dpbarpovs aitav éexdppvoar, py wore idwow Trois 6pOarpois. 
Acts xxvili. 27, 
Judge not that ye be not judged. 
py Kpivere iva py KplOnre. Mt. vii. 1. 
For the use of the simple Infinitive in this sense see 138. 


185. (b) Consecutive clauses denoting the result of the action 
of the verb in the principal clause. (Rare and not Classical.) 
Introduced by iva followed by the Subjunctive. 


106 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Examples : 
Rabbi, who did sin, this man or his parents, so that he was born 
blind ? 
paPBei, ris paprev, odros 7 of yoveis adrod, va Tuprds yevvnO7 ; 
Jn, ix. 2. 
But ye, brethren, are not in darkness, so that that oe should 
overtake you as thieves. 
tpets dé, adeAdol, ovK ere Ev oKdrel, Wa 7) Népa vas ws Kdémras 
kaTeAdBy. 1 Thess. v. 4. 
See also 1 Jn. i. 9 (contrast the use of the Infinitive in Heb. vi. 10), 
Rey. ix. 20. In Heb. x. 36 the final and consecutive senses are 
combined. 
For the use of the Infinitive in this sense see 139. 


(83) Noun clauses introduced by iva, etc. 


186. Standing as Subject of a Verb. (Not Classical.) 
These clauses are introduced by iva followed by a Subjunctive, or 
rarely by a Future Indicative. 
Examples: So it is not the will of your Father which is in Heaven 
that one of these little ones should perish. 
oUT@s ovk eoTw Oédnua eumpoabev Tod rarpos Lpay Tod ev ovpavois 
Wa amdAnrat Ev TOY pikpOy TovTav. Mt. xviii. 14. 
My meat is to do the will of him that sent me. 
euov Bp@pa eo iva ro 7d OéAynpa Tod méuwpavros pe. 
Jn. iv. 34. 
Ye have a custom that I should release one unto you at the 
Passover, 
gore O€ cuvnbea ipiv iva éva drodiow tyiv ev TO Tacxa. 
Jn. xviii. 39. 
Here moreover it is required in stewards that a man be found 
faithful. 
de Aourdy Cyreirar €v Tots oixovdpuors iva miords Tis evpeO7. 
1 Cor. iv. 2. 
See also Mk. ix. 12, Acts xxvii. 42, Rev. ix. 4, 5. 
187. This construction is used especially as the subject of 
predicates meaning 2 7s profitable, rt is sufficient and the like, 
Example : It is profitable for you that one man die for the people. 
ouppéper byiv iva eis dvOpwros drobdvy Umép Tod Naod. 
Jn. xi. 50, 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 107 


See also Mt. v. 29, 30, x. 25, xviii. 6; Lk. xvii. 2; 1 Cor. iv. 3. 
For the use of the simple Infinitive in this sense see 142. 


188. Noun clauses standing as an Object of a verb. (Not Classical, 
except in certain cases mentioned below.) 


(a) Object clauses after verbs meaning to entreat, to exhort, to 
command. 
These clauses are introduced by iva or ézas followed by the 
Subjunctive. (Very rare in the Classics.) 
Examples: He asked that he would come down and heal his son. 
npora va xataB7y Kai idonrat adrod Tov vidv. Jn. iv. 47. 
If thou be the Son of God, command that these stones become 
bread. 
ei vids ef Tov Oeod, etme iva of AiOor obror dprou yévwvTa. 
Mt. iv. 3. 
Pray ye therefore the Lord of the harvest that he send forth 
labourers into his harvest. ; 
denOnre ovv Tod Kupiov Tod Oepispod Gras epydras éxBadn eis Tov 
Oepiopov avrov. Lk. x, 2. 
The simple Infinitive, which is the regular construction in Classical 
Greek after verbs of entreating or commanding, is also frequently used 
after these verbs in the New Testament. See 159. 
The infinitive is always used after xehevo and rdcco, 


190. (8) Object clauses after verbs meaning ¢o strive, to plan, to 
take heed, to effect. 
These clauses are introduced by iva rarely by dws, the verb is 
generally in the Subjunctive. 
(In Classical Greek the usual construction after these verbs is és 
followed by the Future Indicative.) 
Examples: And the chief priests took counsel that they might kill 
Lazarus also. 
€Bovrevoavro Se of dpytepeis iva kal rov Adlapoyv droxreaow. 
Jn. xii. 10, 
And when this letter has been read among you, cause that it be 
read also in the church of the Laodiceans. 
kal 6rav avayvoobA map’ ipiv 7 emiaroAn, momoare iva Kal ev TH 
Aaodtxéor exxA\noia dvayvacO7. Col. iv. 16. 
191. When the Object clause after a verb meaning to care for or 
to take heed is negative, pi is generally used instead of iva pn. 


108 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Example: Beware lest anyone deceive you. 
Bdémere pn Tis bas mravnoy. Mt. xxiv. 4. 
Verbs meaning to strive etc, are often followed by a simple 
Infinitive, see 165. 


192. (y) Object clauses after verbs denoting fear or danger. 
(Classical.) 

These clauses are introduced by py followed by the Subjunctive. 
_ They are negatived by ov. 

Examples: The chief captain fearing lest Paul should be torn in 
pieces by them. 

poBndels 6 xtALapyos py Staomacb7 6 Iladdos bm’ airav. 

Acts xxiii. 10. 
For I fear lest, when I come to you, I shall find you not as I wish. 
poBodpar yap pH mas eAOwyv ovx otovs Oédw eUpw vpas. 

2 Cor, xii. 20. 

198. When the object of fear is conceived as already past or present, 
and, as such, already decided, although the result is unknown to the 
speaker, the Indicative is used in these clauses both in Classical and New 
Testament Greek. 

Example: I am afraid of you lest by any means I have bestowed labour 
upon you in vain. 

PoBoduar buds uh ws eixy Kexoviaxa els buds. Gal. iv. 11, 

See also Gal. ii. 2, 1 Thess. iii. 5. 

194. (c) Noun clauses introduced by tva standing in apposition 
to a noun or pronoun and containing an explanation of the meaning of 
the noun or pronoun. 

This construction is very common in the writings of St John. The 
verb is always in the Subjunctive mood. (Not Classical.) 

Examples: And whence is this to me, that the mother of my Lord 
should come unto me? 

kai md0ev pou TovTo iva €dOn 7) pTHp Tod Kupiov pov mpds eye; 

Lk. 1. 43. 

Greater love hath no man than this, that a man lay down his life 
for his friends. 

peiCova tavtns aydmrny ovdels exer, va Tis THY Wuyiy aditod OF bmép 
Tav diiav avrov. Jn. xv. 13. 

For this is the love of God, that we should keep his command- 
ments. 

arn yap €oTw 4 aydrn Tov Ocov, iva Tas évToAds aiTod Tnpapev. 


Ldn savatoe 


i 


¥ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 109 


What then is my reward? That, when I preach the gospel, I may 
make the gospel without charge. 
tis obv pou €oti 6 pioOds; twa evayyeAdtCopuevos dddravov Oncw rd 
evayyéduov. 1 Cor, ix. 18. 
See also Jn. vi. 29, 39, 40, xv. 8, xvii. 3; 1 Jn. iii. 1, 11, 28, iv. 21; 
2Jn.6; 3 Jn. 4; perhaps Acts viii. 19. 
For the simple Infinitive used in this sense see 169 and compare 
James i. 27. 


(4) Explanatory clauses introduced by iva 


195. Closely connected with this last use is another where a 
clause introduced by iva takes the place of an Epexegetic Infinitive 
to explain or limit the meaning of a noun or adjective, or even of a verb. 

This construction is used especially with nouns and adjectives 
denoting authority, power, fitness and set time. 

Examples: Or who gave thee this authority to do these things ? 

7) tis co. COwxev Thy eEovoiay TavTny iva Tavita moths; 

Mk. xi. 28, 
The hour is come that the Son of man should be glorified. 
ednarvbev 7 wpa iva dofacO7 6 vids Tov avOpmmov. Jn. Xii. 23. 

See also Mt. viii. 8; Lk. vii. 6; Jn. i. 27. 

For the use of the simple Infinitive in this seuse see 170 and com- 
pare Mt. iii. 11, Lk. xv. 19, Rom. xiii. 11. 


196. The clause introduced by iva may also denote the cause, 
condition, or content of the action expressed by the verb. 
Examples: Abraham your father rejoiced to see my day. 
"ABpady 6 rarip tpav jnyadddcaro iva iy Thy HHEpay THY Env. 
Jn. vill. 56. 
(Here the clause introduced by iva gives the cause of rejoicing.) 
See also Gal. 11. 9. 
For the Jews had agreed already, that if any man should confess 
him to be Christ, he should be put out of the synagogue. 
Hn yap cuvereGewTo of “Iovdaios iva édv Tus avtov bpodroynon Xptorov, 
amoouvayayos yevnrat. Jn, 1x. 22. 
(Here the clause introduced by iva gives the content of the agreement.) 
See also Phil. ii. 2, For an infinitive used in a somewhat similar 
way see Acts xv. 10. 


ADVERBIAL CLAUSES 
197. Adverbial clauses are clauses that stand in the relationship 
of an adverb to some verb in another clause. 
Adverbial clauses may be divided into eight classes. (See page 22.) 


110 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


(1) Final clauses or clauses denoting Purpose 


198. A final clause denotes the purpose of the action of the 
verb in the clause on which it depends. 

Final clauses are introduced by the final particles iva or éras if 
affirmative, and by py or iva pr if negative, followed by a verb in the 
subjunctive mood in N.T. Greek. 

Examples: He came that he might bear witness to the light. 


nrGev iva paprupnon epi Tod partds. JDadats 
Judge not that ye be not judged. 
py) Kpivere iva jury KpiOnre. Mt. vii. 1. 


And their eyes have they closed ; lest haply they should perceive 
with their eyes. 
kal Tos OpOadpovs a’ray exdppvoar, py more iOwow Tots dpOadpors. 
Acts xxviii. 27. 
199. The future indicative is occasionally found instead of the sub- 
junctive. Lk. xx. 10. 
200. Many other kinds of clauses besides Final clauses are in- 
troduced by iva etc. in the N.T. See sections 180—196. 


201. A simple Infinitive, as might be expected from the fact that 
the infinitive was originally the dative case of a verbal noun, is 
sufficient by itself to form the verb in a final clause. See 138. 

We have similar parallel uses in English of a clause introduced by 
that aud a simple infinitive to express purpose. 

We may say either J sent my servant to call the guests. 

or I sent my servant that he might call the quests. 

Example: And he sent his slaves to call them that were bidden to 

the marriage. 
kal améarewev rovs SovAovs a’rov kahéaat Tovs KekAnpévous Eis TOUS 
yapous. Matt. xxii. 3. 


201a. Purpose may even be expressed by dare or os with the inf, 
Matt. xxiv. 24, xxv. 1, Lk ix. 52. 

202. The Infinitive with an article preceded by the prepositions els or 
mpos or even an Infinitive preceded by the Genitive of the article may be used 
as the verb in a final clause. 

Examples will be found in Matt. vi. 1, xx. 19, Lk. i. 77. 

See 175. 


203. The Present or Future Participle may also be used to form a final 
clause. 
Examples: Unto you first God having raised up his Servant sent him to 
bless you. 
vuiv mpOrov avacrioas 0 Geos Tov Ilatéa adrod dméorethey adrov evdo- 
yotvTa Uuas- Acts iii, 26. 


/_ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 111 


...I journeyed to Damascus to bring them also that were there unto 
Jerusalem in bonds. 
: ...cls Aauwacxdy émopevdunv, dEwv kal rods éxeice dvras dedeuévous els 
Tepovoadju... Acts xxii, 5. 


204. A Final clause may also be expressed by a relative clause with 
the verb in the Future Indicative. This construction is very rare, 
See Matt. xxi. 41, Acts vi. 3. 


(2) Temporal clauses or clauses denoting Time 


205. A temporal clause denotes the time of the action of the 
verb in the clause on which it depends. 

Temporal clauses are introduced by ére or ws meaning when, éws etc. 
meaning wile or until, mpiv meaning before. 


206. Temporal clauses are divided into two classes : 
(1) Those that refer to a definite event occurring at a definite time 
are called definite temporal clauses. 
Example: J saw him when I went to town. 
(2) Those that refer to an event or a series of events occurring 
at .an indefinite time are called indefinite temporal clauses. 
Examples: J saw him whenever I went to town. 
That is td say J went to town often and saw him every time. 
I will see him whenever I go to town. 
That is to say J have not been to town yet, and I do not know when I 
shall go; but, when I do go, I will see him. 
It will be seen that these sentences have a conditional force. 
The first might be expressed as follows. 
If I went to town I saw him. 
The second might be expressed as follows. 
Tf I go to town I will see him. 


207. In Greek these two kinds of clauses have quite distinct 


constructions. 

(1) Definite Temporal Clauses are introduced by dre or as 
followed by the Indicative as in English. 

Example: And it came to pass when Jesus had finished these words, 


he departed from Galilee. 
kal eyévero ore eréhecev 6 Inaovs Tovs Adyous TovToUs, peTHpEV ard 


ris VadwAailas, Matt. xix. 1, 


112 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


208. (2) Indefinite Temporal Clauses are introduced by ére 
followed by a verb in the imperfect or aorist indicative with a& or éedy 
when the clause refers to an indefinite number of actions in past time. 

ére and dy join together to form érav. 

Example: And the unclean spirits whenever they beheld him fell 
down before him. : 

kal Ta mvevpara Ta akdOapta Otay aitov eGewmpovy, mpooémimTov 


airé. Mk. iii. 11. 


209. Indefinite Temporal Clauses are introduced by ére followed 
by a verb in the subjunctive with dy when the clause refers to future 
time. 

Example: And whenever they lead you to judgement, and deliver 
you up, be not anxious beforehand what ye shall speak. 

kal 6rayv dyoow vas mapadiWovtes, ju) mpopeptmware TL AaANaTTE. 
wits Mk. xiii. 11. 

It will be noticed that dy is used in Greek when the word ever can 

be attached to when in English. 


210. There are a few instances in the N.T. where Temporal clauses are 
Indefinite in form, but Definite in meaning. 


Example: But days will come when the bridegroom shall be taken away 
from them. 


édevoovTat dé huépas Stay arap0F am avrav 6 vundlos. Mk. ii. 20. 
See also Lk. vy. 35, xiii. 28; Rev. viii. 1. ; 


211. Temporal Clauses introduced by és while or until. 
When éws means while, and the clause which it introduces refers 
to the same time as the verb in the clause on which it depends, it 
takes the Indicative mood, just as in English, 
Example: We must work the works of him that sent me while it 
is day. 
npas dei epydteo Oar ra epya Tov méuavros pe ews jpépa early. 
Jn. ix. 4, 
212. When éos means wntil, and the clause which it introduces 
refers to an actual past fact, it takes a past tense of the Indicative 
mood, as in English. 
Example: The star which they saw in the East went before them, 
till it came and stood over where the young child was. 
6 dornp, ov eidov év tH dvaroAj, mponyev aitois ews €dOdv 
emeotadn émdve ov nv Td matdior. Mt. ii. 9. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 113 


2138. When the clause introduced by éws depends on a verb 
denoting future or habitual action, and refers to the future, it takes 
the Subjunctive, generally with dv. 

Examples: There abide until ye depart thence. 


exet pévere eas dy e&éNOnre exeider. Mk. vi. 10. 
And goeth after that which is lost, until he find it. 
kal mopeverar emi Td drod@dds Ews evpy avTs., Lk. xv. 4. 


214. When the clause introduced by éws depends on a verb in 
past time and refers to an event which was thought of as future at 
the time when the action of the principal verb took place, it takes the 
Subjunctive without dy (Optative in Classical Greek). 

Example: He cast him into prison until he should pay the debt. 

€Badev aitov eis pudakiy ews arod@ Td dpedopevor. 


Mt. xviii. 30. 


215. as ov, éws drov have the same meaning as éws, but are never 
used with ay, F 

Clauses introduced by dypu, dyps od, dype iis nucpas, péxpt, méxpes od 
‘have in general the same construction as clauses introduced by éas. 


216. Clauses introduced by zp or rpiv 7, before. 

When the verb in the principal clause is affirmative the clause 
introduced by wpiv takes the accusative and infinitive construction. 

Example: Verily I say to thee that, in this night, before the cock 
crow, thou shalt deny me thrice. 

apnv éyo vou Ore €v TavTn TH vuKTL mply addéxtropa hovjca Tpls 

amapvnon pe. Matt. xxvi. 34. 

21'7. When the principal clause is negative the clause introduced by 
mplv takes the same constructions as clauses introduced by éws. 

But there are only two examples of such clauses in the N.T., Lk. ii. 26, 
Acts xxv. 16. 


In the second of these examples the Optative is Classical, as often in the 
writings of St Luke. 
218. Temporal clauses may also be expressed by a Participle, 
especially in the Genitive Absolute. 
Examples: And when he came out, he saw a great multitude. 
kal é£ehOav eidev modvy byXov. Mt, xiv. 14, 
And when they got up into the boat, the wind ceased. 
Kat advaBdavTwv avTay eis TO mOLoV €KoTaTEY 6 AveEpos. 


Mt. xiv. 32. 


N, 8 


114 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


219. Temporal clauses may also be expressed by Prepositions 
with the Infinitive and an article. 
ev ro =€os, Matt, xiii. 25; Lk. i, 21; Acts viii. 6. 
mpo trou=mpiv, Matt. vi. 8; Lk. ii. 21; Gal. ii. 12, iil, 23. 
pera ro=after, Matt, xxvi. 32; Acts i. 3. 


(3) Local clauses or clauses denoting Place 


220. Local Clauses denote the place where the action of the 
verb in the clause on which they depend is said to take place. 
They are introduced by ot, émouv where, ddev whence ete. 


221. Local clauses are divided into two classes just as Temporal 
clauses are. 

(1) Definite Local Clauses referring to a single definite place. 

(2) Indefinite Local Clauses referring to a series of places, or to 
some indefinite place, 


222. In the first class the verb is in the Indicative mood. 
Example: Lay not up for yourselves treasures upon the earth, 
where moth and rust do consume. 
py Onoavpi¢ere tpiv Onoavpovs emt ths yns, dou ons Kai Bpoors 


agavicet. Matt. vi. 19. 


2238. In the second class the verb is in a past tense of the 
Indicative mood with dv when the clause refers to a series of places 
where an act occurred in past time. 

Example: And wheresoever he entered into villages...they laid the 
sick in the market places... 

kat mov dy civemopevero eis K@pas...ev Tais dyopais éridecay Tovs 
ag Gevovvras. Mk. vi. 56. 


224. When the clause refers to an indefinite place where an act 
is expected to occur in future time the verb is in the Subjunctive 
mood with dv or éedav. 

Example: Wheresoever this gospel shall be preached in the whole 
world, that also which this woman hath done shall be told for a 
memorial of her. 

mov €av KnpvxOn Td evayyéiov TovTo ev bA@ TH KdgpH@, AadnOn- 
cera kal 0 €roincey avrn eis pyndouvoyv adris. Mt. xxvi. 13. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 115 


(4) Causal clauses or clauses denoting the Reason for 
the action of the verb in the clause on which they 
depend 


225. Causal clauses are introduced by émel, dr, ef’ &, didry, 
even etc. with a verb in the Indicative mood just as in English. 
Example: I forgave thee all that debt because thou besoughtest me. 
macay Ty dpedry exelyny apnKa cot, €met mapéxadecads pe. 
Matt. xviii. 32. 
226. A causal clause may also be expressed by 
(a) A Genitive Absolute. 
Example: And since he had nothing wherewith to pay... 
py €xovtos bé avtod arodovvat. Matt. xviii. 25. 


227. (b) A Participle agreeing with some word in the main 
clause. 
Example: Since he saw that it pleased the Jews he proceeded to 
take Peter also. 
iddv d€ dre dpeordy eotiv Trois “lovdaiois mpooébeto cuAdaBeiv Kai 
Ilérpov. Acts xii. 3. 


228. (c) An Infinitive with d:a and an article, or an Infinitive 
with an article in the Dative case. Matt. xxiv. 12, 2 Cor. ii. 13. 
229. (d) When as is prefixed to a Causal participle it implies that 


the action denoted by the participle is supposed or asserted to be the cause 


of the action of the principal verb. ; 
Whether it is the real cause or not is left doubtful, but it is generally 
implied that it is not the real cause of the action, 


See also Acts xxili. 20, xxvii. 30. 


(5) Consecutive clauses or clauses denoting Result 


230. A Consecutive Clause denotes the Result of the action 
of the verb in the clause on which it depends. 
Consecutive Clauses are introduced by sore followed by the 


Infinitive or Indicative. 


231. dore followed by the Infinitive expresses the result which 
the action of the verb in the principal clause is calculated to produce. 
This is the commoner form in the N.T. 
Example: Becometh a tree, so that the birds come... 
yiverat dévdpov date ehOciv Ta wereva,... 


Matt. xiii. 32. 
8—2 


116 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


232. Sore with the Indicative expresses the result which actually 
does follow on the action of the verb in the principal clause. 

Example: For God so loved the world that he gave his only 
begotten Son. 

otras yap jydmnoev 6 Oeds Tov Kdcpov, Gate Tov Yiov Tov povoyevn 

COWKEY.... Jn. ili. 16. 

See also Gal. ii. 13. 

But this distinction is not exactly observed in the N.T. 


233. dore often begins an independent clause with the meaning 
and so or therefore. Matt. xix. 6. 


234. Sometimes an Infinitive is used without @ore to express 
consequence, See sections 139 and 176. 
See Acts v. 3; Col. iv. 6; Heb. v. 5, vi. 10. 


(6) Conditional clauses 


235. A Conditional Clause and the principal clause with which 
it is connected make up a sentence which is commonly called a 
Conditional Sentence. 

In such a-sentence the conditional clause states a supposition and 
the principal clause states the result of the fulfilment of this 
supposition. 

The conditional clause is generally spoken of as the Protasis, and 
the principal clause as the Apodosis'. 

Example: If you do this you will become rich. 

Here Jf you do this is the Protasis and you will become rich is the 
Apodosis. 

236. The Protasis is introduced by «i, if. 

The particle dy is regularly joined to «i in the Protasis when the 
verb in the Protasis is in the Subjunctive Mood, e? combined with dv 
forms éay, rv, av. 

The negative of the Protasis is wy and that of the Apodosis is ov. 

This is the rule in Classical Greek, but in N.T. Greek od is often 
found in the Protasis when the verb is in the Indicative mood, es- 
pecially in conditions of the first class given below. 


237. The construction of Conditional sentences varies according 


as the time of the supposition is Past, Present, or Future. 


1 The Committee of Grammatical Terminology suggests the names ‘if 
clause” and ‘‘then clause” instead of Protasis and Apodosis, 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 117 


Present or Past Suppositions 


238. (1) Present or Past particular suppositions, implying 
nothing as to the fulfilment of the condition. 

When the Protasis simply states a present or past particular sup- 
position, implying nothing as to the fulfilment or non-fulfilment of 
the condition, a present or past tense of the Indicative is used in 
the Protasis: any part of the finite verb may stand in the Apodosis, 

Examples. Present time: 

If thou art the Son of God, command this stone... 
ei vids ef TOU Oeod, ei TO ALO TovTY... Lk. iy. 3. 

Past time : 

For if Abraham was justified by works, he hath whereof to glory. 
ei yap "ABpadp €& Epywv edicaroOn, éxer kavynpa. Rom. iv. 2. 


239. (2) Supposition contrary to fact. 

When the Protasis states a present or past supposition implying 
that the condition is not or was not fulfilled, the secondary tenses 
of the indicative are used both in the protasis and the apodosis. 

The verb in the apodosis nearly always has the adverb dv. 

The Imperfect denotes continued action. 

The Aorist simple fact. 

The Pluperfect (rare) completed action. 

The time of the action is implied in the context rather than 
expressed by the tense of the verb}, 

Examples. Present Time: 

This man, if he were a prophet, would know who and what the 
woman is... 
ovros el AY mpoPyrns, eyivwokey av Tis Kal moran } yuvy... 
Lk. vii. 39. 
If thou knewest the gift of God, and who it is that speaketh with 
thee, thou wouldst have asked him... 
ei des rv Swpeay tod Oeod, Kal tis eorw 6 éyov Gol,...00 dy 


Jnaive lO: 


qtnoas avrov... 
If ye believed Moses ye would believe me. 
el yap emiorevere Movoei, emiotevere ay pol. Jn, v.46. 
1 But as a rough rule it may be said that the Imperfect expresses an 
unfulfilled condition in present time, and the Aorist expresses an unfulfilled 
condition in past time. 


118 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Past time: 
For if they had known, they would not have crucified the Lord of 
Glory. 
el yap ¢yvcar, otk dv rov Kipuov ris ddéns €oravpocay. 
1 Cor, ii. 8. 
This construction is so unlike the English or Latin that it 
requires special attention. 
The form which such sentences take in English is no help 
whatever to translating them into Greek. 
The rule must be mastered and remembered. 


Future Suppositions 


240. ‘There are two forms of Future conditional sentences: 
(1) The more vivid form, 
(2) The less vivid form. 


241. (1) In the more vivid form the Subjunctive with éay is 
used in the Protasis, and the Future Indicative or some other form 
expressing future time is used in the Apodosis. 

Example: If ye have faith as a grain of mustard seed, ye shall say... 

€dy ExnTE TIOTW WS KOKKOV OLVATEWS, EPELTE TH OPEL TOUT... 
Matt, xvii. 20. 

242. The Future Indicative is sometimes used in the Protasis 
for greater vividness. 

Example: If we deny him, he will deny us. 

ei dpvnoopeOa, Kakeivos apynoerae Tas. AR Aiea, 0, WEP 

243. (2) In the less vivid form the Optative is used in both 
Protasis and Apodosis, av in Apodosis. 

Example: If you were to do this, you would be a good man. 

€i TovUTO Trovoins, ayabds av eins. 

N.B. This construction does not occur in its full form in the N.T. 

In the following example the Protasis only occurs. 

Example: But even if ye should suffer for righteousness sake, happy 
are ye. 

GW’ &i kat mac xotre dua Oixavocuvny, paxapio. 1 Pet. iii, 14, 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 119 


General Suppositions 


244. If the supposition refers to the occurrence of an act of a certain 
general class and the Apodosis states what is wont to happen if this act 
takes place at any time, the sentence is called a GENERAL SUPPOSITION. 

If it is a supposition in present time the Protasis takes édév with the 
Subjunctive, and the Apodosis takes the Present Indicative. 

Example : If any man walk in the day, he stumbleth not. 

édv Tis TepiTaTy ev TH Nucpa, ov mpookdmre.. Apey, Fats 

If the supposition is in past time the Protasis takes ef with the Optative 
and the Apodosis takes the Imperfect Indicative. 

Example; If at any time he had anything, he used to give it, 

el rl &xou, edldov. 
This construction does not occur in the N.T. 


The Conditional Participle 
245. A Participle may be used as an equivalent to a Conditional 


clause. 
It should generally be translated by a Conditional clause in English. 
Example: How shall we escape, if we neglect so great salvation? 
TOs hwels expevgdueda THikavTas duedjoavTes gwrnplas ; 
Heb, ii. 3. 
See also Lk. ix. 25; 1 Cor. xi. 29; Gal. vi. 9; 1 Tim. iv. 4. 
245 a. Mixed Conditional Sentences. 
Certain cases occur in which conditional sentences are made up of a 
Protasis belonging to one of the classes enumerated above and an Apodosis 


belonging to another. ; 
See Lk. xvii. 6; Jn. viii. 39; Acts viii. 31, xxiv. 19; 1 Cor, vii. 28. 


(7) Concessive clauses 


246. A Concessive clause denotes some fact which is regarded 
as likely to prevent or to have prevented the occurrence of the action 
of the verb in the clause on which it depends. 

These clauses are introduced in English by the words though or 
although, and in Greek by «i cai, édv kai: kai ei, cai edv with a Finite 
verb, or by xaimep followed by a Participle. 

Example: For although I am absent in the flesh, I am with you in 
the spirit. 

el yap Kal TH oapKl dre, GAAG TO Tvevpare adv piv eipl. 
Col. ii. 5. 

Though he was a Son, yet he learned obedience by the things which 

he suffered. 
kaimrep dy vids, guadev ap’ dv mabey tiv bmaxony. 


Heb, vy. 8 


120 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


24'7. «Kal ef and xat édv occur but rarely in the N.T. The difference 
between ef (or édv) kal and kal et (kat édv or cay) is that the former pair intro- 
duce a clause which states an admitted fact and the latter introduce a clause 
which makes an improbable suggestion, Compare the example given above 
with Matt. xxvi. 35: 

Even if I must die with thee, I will not deny thee. 
kav d€n pe olv col drobavely, od wh oe amrapyycoua, 

Compare also Jn. viii. 16. 

248. <A simple Participle may also serve to express a concessive 
clause. 

Example: And though they found no cause of death in him, yet 
they asked of Pilate that he should be slain. 

kal pndeuiay aitiay Oavdrov evpovtes 7TnoavTo Teiharov avaipeOqvat 
aurov. Acts xiii. 28. 
(8) Comparative clauses 

249. A Comparative clause compares the action or state denoted 
by the verb in the clause on which it depends with some other action 
or state. 

Comparative clauses are introduced by os, domep, xabas, etc. as or 7 
than followed by the Indicative as in English. 

Examples: Shouldst not thou also have had mercy on thy fellow. 
servant even as I had mercy on thee? 

ovk Eder Kal oe eejoas Tov avvdovAdY Gov, ws Kayo oe HrA€noa; 
Mt. xviii. 33. 
It is easier for a camel to go through a needle’s eye than for a rich 
man to enter into the kingdom of God. 
evUkoTma@tepoy éotiv Kdundrov dia tpnuatros padidos eicedOciv ij 
movo.ov eis THY Bactdelav Tod Oeod. Mt. xix, 24. 

Compare also Mt. xxiv. 27. 

ws in the sense of ‘‘as if” is sometimes followed by a Subjunctive, 
Mk. iv. 26; 1 Thess, ii. 7. 

ADJECTIVAL CLAUSES 


250. Adjectival clauses are introduced by the relative pronouns 
és and éa7is and the relative adjectives écos and oios, and qualify some 
noun or pronoun in another clause just like an adjective. The noun 
which the adjectival clause qualifies is called its Antecedent. 

For the rules which decide the number, gender and case of a relative 
pronoun see 60. 

251. When an Adjectival, or Relative clause, as it is generally 
called, refers to an actual event or fact it is called a Definite Relative 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK iP 


Clause, and the verb is in the same mood and tense as it would be in 
English, except in the case of relative clauses in dependent statements, 
commands, or questions: see 156, 159, 
Examples; After me cometh a man which is become before me. 
drigw pov épxerat dvnp os Eumpoobey pov yéyover. Jn. i. 80. 
The words which I have spoken unto you are spirit and are life. 
Ta pyuara a éy® eaAnka bly mvedua eoTw Kal (an eoTw. 
Jn. vi. 63. 
252. When a relative clause refers to a supposed event or instance 
and hence implies a condition, it is called an Indefinite or Conditional 
Relative Clause. In the New Testament such relative clauses 
generally take a verb in the Subjunctive mood with dy or éav. 
Example: Whosoever wishes to be great among you shall be your 
minister, 
GXN ds av OéAn péyas yevérOa ev vpiv ~orat tpaov Sidkovos. 
Mk, x. 43. 
This might be equally well expressed by a conditional sentetice: 
Tf anyone wishes to be great among you he shall be your minister. 
253. The Future or Present Indicative with or without dy is occasion- 


ally found in Indefinite relative clauses referring to the future. 
See Mt. v. 41, x. 32, xviii. 4; Mk. xi. 25, 


254. Adjectival clauses may also be introduced by the relative adverbs 
dre, when, and ov, whence. Such clauses are rare in the New Testament. 
They are distinguished from Adverbial clauses of time and place in that 
they do not fix the time or place of the action of the main verb. 

That is fixed already by some word in the principal clause which is the 
antecedent to the relative clause. 

Examples: And at even, when the sun did set, they brought unto him 
all that were sick. 

dias d€ yevouévns, OTe Educev 6 HALOS, Epepov mpods abrov mavras TOs KaKOs 


éxovras. Mk. i. 32. 
And he came to Nazareth where he had been brought up. 
kal nAGev els Nafapd, ov Av TeOpaupevos. Lk. iv. 16. 
PARTICIPLES 


255. <A Participle is a verbal adjective, sharing in the character- 
istics of both verbs and adjectives. 

As a verb it has a subject, and, if it is the participle of a transitive 
yerb in the active voice, it has an object. It has also tense and voice. 

As an adjective it agrees with the noun which it qualifies in 
number, gender, and case. 


122 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


256. A Participle may be used either adjectivally or ad- 
verbially. 

When it is used adjectivally it limits the noun with which it 
agrees, just like an adjective. 

It is generally best translated into English by a paiva clause, 
especially when it is preceded by an article. 

For an example see section 260. 

When a participle is used adverbially it is equivalent to an 
adverbial clause modifying some other verb in the sentence. 

Such participles are generally best translated into English by a 
suitable adverbial clause. 

The context must decide which kind of adverbial clause the 
participle in question is equivalent to: the participle does not in itself 
denote purpose, consequence, time, etc., but the context implies some 
such idea and the participle admits it. 

257. For the Participle as equivalent to a 

Final clause see 203. 
Temporal clause see 218. 
Causal clause see 227, 229, 
Conditional clause see 245. 
Concessive clause see 248. 

258. The Participle may also denote the means by which the 
action of the principal verb is brought about, or the manner in which 
it is effected, or the circumstances which attend its performance. 

Examples. Means: 

Which of you by being anxious can add one cubit to his stature ? 
tis d€ €& pay pepipvaev Svvarat mpocUeiva emi THY HALKiay adToU 
mHxXuy Eva; Mt. vi. 27. 
Manner: But others mocking said.... 
erepor dé SuayAevdovres edeyov. Acts ii. 138. 

@s is often inserted before a participle of Manner. 

Example: For he taught them as one having authority and not as 
the scribes. 

hv yap diSdrKwv avrovs as eEovciav éxwr Kal ody ws of ypaupareis. 
Mk. i, 22. 
Attendant Circumstances : 
And he taught in their synagogues being glorified of all. 
kal avrds edidackey €v Tais ovvaywyais aitav, do€atsuevos bad 
TavT@V. iaivaal os 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 123 


And they beckoned to their partners in the other boat that they 
should come and help them. 
kal Katévevoay Tois peroxos €v TH Erép@ Troiw Tod €AOdvTas oVA- 


AaBéo Oat avrois. IDS. 6, 7 
Take Mark and bring him with thee. 
Mdpxov avadaBav aye pera ceavTod. 2 Tim. iv. 11. 


The Participle of attendant circumstances is generally equivalent 
to a verb in a similar mood and tense to the principal verb joined to it 
by xai, and, as a rule, it is best to translate it so in English. 

See the examples given above: in Lk. iv. 15 the participle is 
equivalent to an Imperfect Indicative joined to é8/Sackev by cai. In 
Lk. v. 7 it is equivalent to an Infinitive. In 2 Tim. iv. 11 it is equiva- 
lent to an Imperative. 

For the Participle in the Genitive Absolute see 35. 


The Tenses of the Participle 


259. In accordance with the principles mentioned in sections 
108—112 the tenses of the participle do not denote time, but state. 

The time of the action must be gathered from the context. 

The Present Participle denotes action in progress. 

It may be used to express 

(1) Action going on at the same time as the action of the main 
verb. 

Example: And they went forth, and preached everywhere, the 
Lord working with them, and confirming the word with signs 
following. 

exeivor Oe e€eAOdvTEs ExNpvocayv mavTaxod, TOU Kupiov cuvepyovvrTos, 
kal Tov Adyov BeBarovvros dia TOY emaxoovOovvTav onpeiwv. 
Mk. xvi. 20. 

(2) Action identical with that of the main verb, but described 
from a different point of view. 

Example: This spake he, signifying by what death he should 
glorify God. 

rovro O€ eimev onpaivey roim Gavdrw Sogdce Tov Oedv. 
Jn, xxi. 19. 

260. The Present Participle may also be used simply to define 
its subject as belonging to a certain class, that is the class which does 
or suffers the action denoted by the verb from which it comes. In this 
case it becomes equivalent to an adjective. It is generally preceded 


124 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


by an article, and it is best translated into English by a relative 
clause. 
Example: Blessed are they which do hunger and thirst after 
righteousness, for they shall be filled. 
pakdpioe of mewavres kat Supavres tHv Sukavoctiyny, dtu adtol 

xoptac Onoovra.. Mt. v. 6. 

261. The Present Participle sometimes denotes continued action at a 
time before the action of the main verb takes place. The time of the action 


has to be inferred from the context. This use corresponds to that of the 
Imperfect Indicative. 


Example: For they are dead who sought the young child’s life. 

TeOvjkace yap ol fnrodvres Thy Wuxhv Tod macdlov. Mt. ii. 20. 

See also Jn. xii. 17; Acts iv. 34; Gal. i. 23, 

262. The Aorist Participle does not properly denote an act in 
past time, but an act regarded as a simple event without regard to 
its progress or completion. 

As however it is difficult to conceive of an action as a simple event 
except in the past, the Aorist Participle generally denotes an action 
which took place before the action of the main verb: but this past 
sense is by no means necessarily a part of the meaning of the tense. 

263. The Aorist Participle of antecedent action. 

The Aorist Participle is most frequently used of an action which 
took place before the action of the main verb. 

Examples: And having fasted forty days and forty nights, he 
afterwards hungered. 


‘ , € , 
Kal vnoTevoas Nuépas TecoapaKovra Kal TecoapdKovTa viKTas VaTEpov 


émeivacev. Mt. iv. 2. 
But he that had been healed did not know who it was. 
6 O€ iabeis ovK Ade Tis eoriv. Jn. v. 13. 


I thank God...for the grace of God that was given you. 
evxapioT@ TO Oe@...€ml TH xa pire Tod Oeod TH Sodcion ipiv. 
1 Cor. i. 4. 
264. The Aorist Participle of identical action. 
The Aorist Participle sometimes denotes action identical with that of the 
main verb, but described from a different point of view. 
In this case the action is obviously not antecedent in time to that of the 
main verb. 
Example: I have sinned in that I betrayed innocent blood. 
Huaprov mapadods alua dO@or. Mt. xxvii. 4. 
Compare also the common phrase dzoxpiOels efrev. 
The Aorist Participle of identical action most frequently accompanies a 
verb in the Aorist Indicative, but it also occurs with the Future: Lk. ix. 25; 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 125 


3 Jn. 6. It is also found with the Present and Imperfect: Mk. viii. 29; 
and with the Perfect; Acts xiii. 33. 
265. The Future Participle represents an action as future with 
regard to the time of the main verb. 
Example : Thou sowest not that body that shall be. 
ov Td oSpa TO yevnodpevov oreipets. 1 Cor. xv. 37. 
It also denotes purpose : 
It is not more than twelve days since I went up to worship at 
Jerusalem. : 
ov mAewous ciciv por nuépar SHdexa af’ fs avéBnv mpookvvyjcer eis 
‘IepovoaAnp. Acts xxiv. 11. 
See also Mt. xxvii. 49. 


266. The Perfect Participle denotes completed action. Like 
the Perfect Indicative it may have reference to past action and 
resulting state, or only to the resulting state. 

Examples: Behold the men that had been sent by Cornelius...stood 
before the door. 


idod of avdpes of drearahpuévor Ud TOU KopynXilov...eméatnoay éml 


roy mud@va. . Acts x. 17. 
Filled with all knowledge. 
meTANPOLEVOL TATNS THS yYOTEwS. Rom. xv. 14. 
But we preach Christ crucified. 
npeis O€ knpvocopev Xpiorov eatavpwpévoy. 1 Cor, i. 23, 


For the difference between the Present and the Perfect Participles 
compare together Mt. xxviii. 13 and Mt. xxvii. 52, also Mt. xviii. 12 & 13. 


266a. The difference between the Present, Aorist and Perfect 
Participles may be illustrated by the following (probably apocryphal) 
story. 

A certain bishop, renowned for his studies in the Greek tenses, is 
said to have been asked by a certain person whose zeal exceeded his 
discretion whether he was ‘‘saved.” The bishop is said to have replied 
“Tt all depends whether you mean ca(épevos, cwbeis or cerwopévos. 
I trust I am cafdpevos (in a state of salvation), I know I am codes 
(saved once for all by the death of Christ), I hope to be cecaapévos 
(delivered from all danger of falling by being received into Heaven)}.” 


1 Examples of the Present and Aorist Participles used in the senses 
mentioned above are to be seen in Acts ii. 47; 1 Cor. i. 18; 2 Tim. i, 9. 

The Perfect Participle of ww never occurs in the N.T. in the sense said 
to have been given to it in the story. 


126 A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


N.B. The time denoted by a Participle is always relative to that 
of the main verb of the sentence in which it occurs, and must be 
inferred from it. It is not relative to the time of speaking. 

See Lk. xv. 18 and 20. In the first of these two verses the time of 
the Participle dvaords is future with regard to the time of speaking, but 
past with reference to the time of the main verb ropetcopa. In the 
second verse the time of the Participle is past both with regard to the 
time of speaking and with regard to the time of the main verb. 

We translate the first J will arise and go, and the second He arose 
and went. 


THE USE OF od AND pi 


267. The rules for the use of the negatives od and py and their 
compounds in the N.T. are as follows: 

ov is direct and positive and negatives facts. 

p7 is doubtful and indirect and negatives conceptions and wishes. 

ov is practically always used to negative verbs in the Indicative 
mood even in the protases of conditional sentences where p7 is used in 
Classical Greek, but protases of conditional sentences denoting an 
unfulfilled condition generally take pj. See Rom. viii. 9; Jn. xviii. 30. 

In clauses introduced by py used as a final particle, and meaning 
lest, ov is always used as the negative. 2 Cor. xii. 20, See 192. 

py is always used to negative the Subjunctive (with the exception 
given above), the Imperative, and the Optative. 

pn is regularly used to negative the Infinitive even in dependent 
statements where ov is used in Classical Greek. Mt. xxii. 23. 

pn is regularly used to negative Participles and not confined, as it 
is in Classical Greek, to participles equivalent to conditional clauses ete. 

The use of py with a participle in the N.T. is not therefore to be 
taken as a sign that the participle is used in a conditional sense. 

There are only about 17 instances of the use of od with a participle 
in the N.T. 

As a rough rule it will suffice to remember that in the New 
Testament ov is used with the Indicative mood and py with the other 
moods. 

Successive negatives in Greek strengthen the first negative, if the 
second is a compound negative like odde/s. 

Example: He did not eat anything, 


ovK épayev ovdér. Lk, iv. 2. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 127 


But if the second negative is a simple negative, it retains its force. 
Example: It is not therefore not of the body. 
ov Tapa TOUTO OVK EoTLY EK TOD T@pMATOS. 
1 Cor. xii. 15. 
ei py and edy pr are used as fixed phrases in the sense of except or 
unless. i S€ pnye Means otherwise. 


MODES OF ASKING QUESTIONS 


268. Very often the fact that a sentence is a question is only 
indicated by the mark of interrogation at the end. It must be 
remembered that these marks have been put in by the editors of the 
text, and not by the original writers, as such marks were unknown in 
their days. 

Questions may also be introduced by the interrogative words ris, ei, 
motos, more, mas etc. and by ov and pn. 


269. When ov is used to introduce a question it shows that an 
affirmative answer is expected. (Latin nonne.) 
Example : Is not this the carpenter’s son ? 
Nonne hic est fabri filius? 
OVX OvTOS EaTW 6 TOU TEKTOVOS Vids; Mt. xiii. 55. 
2'70. When py is used to introduce a question it shows that a 
negative answer is expected. (Latin num.) 
Example : Does our law judge any man, unless it hear first from 
him ? 
Numquid lex nostra judicat hominem, nisi prius audierat ab 


ipso ? 
py 6 vopos hpav Kpiver Tov dvOpwamov éav pi) dkovon mpaTov map’ 
avtov; Jn. vil 5. 
py is also used to ask tentative questions to which the answer Wo 
is expected on the whole. u 
Example: Can this be the Christ ? 
Numquid ipse est Christus ? 
pnte ovrds eat 6 Xpioros; Jn. iv. 29. 


2'71. For Deliberative questions see 121. 


128 A SHORT SYNTAX OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


THE USE OF THE PARTICLE dy 


2'72. The various uses of the Particle dy in the New Testament 
are collected here for convenience of reference. 

We have no English word which corresponds to dy, the most that 
can be said is that it implies vagueness or uncertainty in the sentences 
where it occurs. 


2'73. Its uses may be divided into two classes. 

(1) Where it occurs after «i followed by a Subjunctive in the 
protasis of a conditional sentence, or after the relative words és, oios, 
cos, ore, érel, ov, Grou, €ws in indefinite relative clauses. 

ei followed by av becomes éay or ocessionally av. 

Gre followed by dy becomes érav, ewei becomes éreidav. 

N.B. After relative words, especially és, av is often written édv. 

These uses are explained in sections 208, 209, 213, 223, 224, 241, 252. 

2'74. (2) Where it occurs after a verb in a past tense of the 
Indicative or in the Optative mood in the apodosis of a conditional 
sentence to express the result of an unfulfilled condition or of a remote 
future condition. See sections 239, 243. 


275. The first part of a conditional sentence is sometimes left out 
or understood, and dv with a past tense of the Indicative or an Optative 
stands alone. This use is known as the Potential use of dv. Such 
sentences are frequent in Classical Greek, but rare in the New 
Testament. It is sometimes difficult in such sentences to say what 
the condition would have been, if it had been expressed. 

Examples: Wherefore gavest thou not my money into the bank, 
and I at my coming should have required it with interest ? 

dua ri ov« Swxds pov TO dpyvpiov emt tpdrelayv; Kayo eOdv odv 
TOK®@ Gv avTo émpaka. Lk, xix. 23. 
I could pray to God that...all that hear me this day might 
become such as I am, except these bonds. 
evEaiuny dv TO Oe@...mdvtas Tovs axovovTds pov onpepov yevéabat 
TovovTous Sroi0s Kal ya elu, mapexTos Tov Seopav TovTav. Acts xxvi. 29. 
See also Acts viii. 31, xvii. 18. 


276. dv occasionally occurs after éras in the New Testament. 
This is a relic of a Classical use of which we are unable to express the 
force in English, 

277. It also occurs with the Optative in Indirect Questions in 
Lk. i, 62, vi. 11, ix. 46; Acts v. 24, x. 17. 


129 


APPENDIX 


The Greek verbs are not, like the Latin, divided into conjugations 
with various endings. All the verbs in -w have the same endings, the 
differences between them being caused by variations in the stem. 

The verb Avw which is commonly given as an example in Greek 
grammars has but one stem Av- to which the tense endings are 
added. 

Most verbs however have two stems: the Verbal Stem from which 
most of the tenses of the verb and derived words are formed, and 
the Present Stem from which the present and imperfect tenses are 
formed. 

The verbs in the following table are divided into classes according 
to the changes which take place in the verbal stem. 

They include all the verbs which occur most frequently in the New 
Testament. 

The verbs in the last class are especially frequent and important. 


N. 9 


2A0T 
SAdITOG 
pues 
epensied 
Ti 

eiqe we 
yore} 
PATOL 
OP LTA 


YSIAL 


998 
UIseq 


uedo 


A SHORT SYNTAX OF 


Ivoy 

peo] 

10 OAlIp 
SuIUBOTL 


180 


alignst.0143 
aligprlaua 


alip.o713.43 


alighaagl 
ERS 


aliggydda 
alighynog ba 
aliguyanoga 


aligXehaale 
aligX 200 
aligXjoah 


alig.onorle 


aligXle 
‘SSUq JSLIOV 


‘oules 04} OTE Wo4s JUesoid 94} puUY Woys [eqIoA 94} YOIYM UL squoA’ “T SSRTD 


‘opunky ext, payesnfuoo ere ©D UT SqIdA 4SOTY 


worlns1.07.103 
morlowrl 
wwrl.o19 13. 


mrlhse2g 
wrrinddzsh 


‘ase “Jog 


pytuvhl poluvk 
DNAIL079b D.00310).3 
Diprla.ua 

1910.13 D.013.13 
polyrgl 

(qoojaoduny 0199,y) alripangl 
SPOR? 

Hues 2 

ppodhrh pspodha 


alrloyaog lu 

DA2ve2 

ali D3 d le 

(pp Oza 

DjO74p) 

vho2ap p310alt 


poxlixp Donor 
4 © a 


zu 
aokvit 


‘oy Jeg \sIIoy 


SddaA HO SASSVTIO 


oolunkn 
0031014 
opr. 
0.013 tt 
ooliyrg 
iprlooliaag 
Ore 
v1!0339 
ospodd 


oneve 
mrlozdy 


ee 
@O00ND 
i 


‘LN Ur osye 


wrlo.onoxp 


o3p 
ong 


opuvky 
¢ © 
ON3 L014 
ours 
p19 
ON2G 
twrlpang 
¥.0DQ19 
aorloX209 
5 
opndd 


mrloyaog) 


ouzyg 
mrloXdp 


omhioav 
4 « 


@Mn0xDvD 
‘ ¢ 


wp 
juoserg 


131 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Op JO oyu aligXnd.u3 wrk 129 1 vXnd n>» p3nd 19 o3ndu ooovdu 
warepoo.1d aligXadlua morhadlixa pXadluxa» ngadling o3zadun ov.oadun 


‘uleys queseid oy} Ut 
20 0} pousyos st yorum X ‘A ‘> Teangqns ev ur spue W9q8 [eqIoA oY} YOIYA Ul sqtoA “HP SSIO 


YAO SULIq, aligX313 a0%913 mrlo3aL OLMIL 
ley DNOLLIL 10.0313 1100.03 OLLI 

epry tgodxs 
aligadas marad ax ppadxax pispadxa ospadx o1ruad» 
qno yno alt0r333 Da\or39 osporrs OLLI 
yeoaor aligpayoxa.up pypaypraup @AYoYOUD O1LLAYDNOUD 


"u1e}8 queseid 94} UOJ 04 JoploO UL WoJs [vqtoA 044 0} 4 ppe YOIYM sqdoA “E SSBIO 


(‘OW PUG) 40.47.20 
OAvO] Dy\139V2404 oja\oL0» ©.1139\01LD% 
20p (‘10¥ pug) aoka 2 mrloznap ohasp 
‘a 9 41048 OV STOMOA OY} ELOY 4STIOe pUOdes oY} 4ydooxe 
s9su9} [[P UT 239 73 JeMOA SUC], JO SuogzYIp & savy YOIYA suIO4S oYNUT YIM SqIoA 'Z SSTO 


oodlys oxi, poyesnfaos ore 0 UT sqto A. 


Ty  t4prdlyus mrlodly 191 prodly 3a pooduys3 oooduyu modlyn . 
qr alighyx wmdliya pylyx3 D.O3\DNI ©.03\D™ 3D» 
w1008 13093 3%0Q 
*O304 OTT poyesnfuod OV >? UI SqAOA ASOT 
Op Jo exvuL aligluo.wa mont liy0 129 1b p»lyou3 u voluous ooliou ©7101 
eal] ali} ‘yay ‘4} ‘U3 ‘e} “puy yuosorg psi); Oe). op) 


Suuveyy *"sSUq (SIIOy ‘ssBq ‘Jtog “yoy ‘jlo 4sLIOW emngn iy queserg 


em00eq alighasha mrlarshar paohsd alirlo ash mrloolash 
Ty al gapsy2up DA19L43I LD OAILNOLY 
. 4 .7 4 © - © 


wnoakyk 


mrnoaih 


@a}3LxOUD 


"da ‘an ‘dr ‘ay ‘d> ‘a> ut sute4s Wodg ‘oda ‘maa ‘od? ‘mar ‘odra ‘wara ut syuasold “E WOISTAIC. 


odiX 


oamp 


anda 
, 
01D 
ve 


OV\240 


Org 
REI: 


ojndx 
ooo 
oyituvg 


quaserg 


eotofer alidnXa wrloolidnX 
[Oy Moys alravep3 maaoand 
(SUILOJ “J,°N 94} ere osoyy) voligdaya woligdax 
ures pavgd9»3 @avgd>» 
is KeMme oxe} aligdlt wd pvdlu pols odp 
4 ‘-dd pue -ap Ul STIO}s [VqIOA WOT, potUIOy dw puL mam ur syuoseld ‘Z MOISTAIC. 
S pues aliyp103 tor YD.L.03 DAYDLOI DY131.03 @OV2L0 
a momyy ——alighyg)3 mrlloygleg) p»lryse aoyng)2 org 
a eounouue aligy2hhte mnyakrle payahhh pyahhle ovyeatin 
ae 
‘quoserd oy} UI YY SseM0deq YOIYM Y UL SuIpue siuojs ‘T WOTSTATC. 
oe ‘d ‘a “ ‘y publ] @ UI spue TWoe}s [eqtoA O44 Yorum UI sqJeA “9 SSPTO 
<q 
‘opLung oy] pezesnluo0s ore “LN oy} UL ©) UT sqaoA 4SOTT 
ond 
fio vhodxax p3pdx2 wwrlo3nd xa 
OARS aligo.02 1071.00 .03.0 DxXO030 D.0©03 ©0009 
esydeq  alip.011.u¢/> mw .or1.0¢)3¢) DOLL E/3 O071.uUD¢ 
Sulnvayy “SSUq 4SIIOV ‘sSUq ‘Jlog qoV ‘flog 4STIOV Chaauhansy 
nN ‘m3 ul sounqny qyim AA to A ur Surpue suoys Woy 10 ‘oO ut sornqny 
WIM Q Ul Surpue swuoys wo powsoy ore osey} Guoserd oy} UT ©) UI SuIpus squoA “¢ SS¥TO 


133 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


pug alig2da2 pxldas aodas oO das oxoidas 


MOUS aligowahs mrlowaha proahs amaks atloowmak oxomahik 
esvetd pode .03dD x.030D 
9Ip aoavg?uD mrlaoapgoup @xolagoup 


“Wo}s yUeserd O44 WILOJ 0} WOYS [qIeA Ot} 0} ¥07 IO ¥O pp YOIYM SqdA °8 SSelO 


uoddey aoXa.13 wrloZn3L oanXhas 

Ulva] pxligndart aognns mrlooligor oavgand 
‘gooj40d 9} Ur UOTywoIdnper Jo peoysuT yuoWsne eTqnop ‘oy Te4S [eqtoA 

exe4 aligplye “ mr 13 ppl aogny2 mrlopliy oangrny 


‘T@MOA OY} 1oyJe poppe Sl TeINzINS 10 
jeiqet @ otogoq 4 ro 1 04 SoSuYyO YO 4 JaqzouR FOYsS ST UloIS OT} JO [OMOA 4sey oud JT 


YULIp DAO 19M 01.3 moron. u Omit 

o3 pxlig/ag) alig)3 awno.olig) oawg 

eseva1our auigh3al pok3al ooli3qn wap3ow 
aosdod 

urs pxlisdvnlu polidpnl oolisdory oapidoip 


‘moys quosord oy} WILOJ 0} WO4s [eqLeA OY} 0} 4D JO 4 ppe YY SqIoA “L SSBID 


koysop ald pape nds? odagh od}329 
Mos alidp..03 wridn..03 nd13 14.03 od3L0 od13.4.0 
espnt aligndx3 arid 43% D410 194 paid x2 oad oaidx 
osnore alig dak qorldatlds prdaklida ndiahls odahs odyoha 


Sulavayy “s8Bq JSLIOV *ssBq ‘jl0g yoy “Ja0g 4S11OV ernyn iy queselg 


A SHORT SYNTAX OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


134 


reeq 
Joys 


998 


kes 

OAvy 

40 

03 10 oulo0o 
oye} 


pxhaale 


aligXaak vXoalias aorhaals 
Dg10u3L aopn.23 
vxvdoa 

aligpo oxvdoa 40013 
aliglidda 

aligadda malidra paldis 4011)3 

aligX3y> mrlhay2y D33\2 

aoX13 qoozaoduay vxuX.02 aoX 03 

aokna 

DQANEN? FOOXE 

aligzdii- a0V13- 


‘SUIUPOT STULS OY} JO SWO}s [eqIOA JOUTISIP [eIOAES 


010 
kc 


mrlosro 


woz 

EEN 

O32 
wrnloknop 
mrlo0.0n3aV> 
@Y2- o.olidip 


oda 
oXonu 


ondo 
é 2 


OAK 
oXa 
©1993 
arloXd3 


@301D 
@ 2 


WoI povaIoZ sesue} Joyyos07 Suiyqnd Aq poursoz ore sqred osoym sqtoA ATIOOJFOG ‘OT SS¥TO 


keg 
el 
eovid 

purys 
0} 9esneo 
9AIs 


Moys 


OALSIOF 


foysep 
SUIUBOTL 


ali yooyrodury 
ak qoojzrod ay 


aligs13 wrap 34 DN199IL p»ligs 
alto 
aligp1.09 mrlp1.03 pxlito3 poli109 
aligog> m1l0929 DEIR EM 
(‘1d pag o140q) 131393 
aligacpp w1amz2pp pxlipp 
DXOKYPLP “PII “LOW puz 
alirloyoun 
D03YOuD 

“ssUq JSIOy “SSBq ‘J10g OV ‘19g 4SIlow 


a UL SqIOA "& SSPTO 


awrloo03 
fe 
ool Q 


oolkso 
y 


098 


313Q 
NN 


@OvYoOLDdD 
2 t 
©.0>\OuD 
a1nyn iy 


duh 
ThE) 

Y at 3 
mMlupi1 


mili107 
111E19 
124139 
Inlaa139 


Crore 


mayyoup 
mlayyoup 
quoserg 


APPENDIX I 


ILLUSTRATIVE PASSAGE FROM THE NEW TESTAMENT. 


The numbers in the foot-notes refer to paragraphs in the Syntax. 


*Avipp O€ tis ev Katoapia lovduare Kopynduos, Exarovtapyns ex omeipns 
a ’ a ‘ , 
THs Kadoupévns “Iraduxns, evoeBns Kal *phoBovpevos Tov Oedv atv marti 
~ » > ~ a D\ , \ n a \ , 3 a A 
T@ OtK@ avTod, ToLdv Ehenwoovvas ToAAAS TO a@ Kai Sedpevos 2rod Oeod 
ey A a a 
Ova mravtds, eidev ev opdpate havepOs, woel wept wpav evdrny THs Hépas, 
¥ a e 
dyyedov Tov Oeod *eiaedOdvra mpds aitov Kal eimdvta ait@ KopyyXe. 
€ aad , > Le baa oh , J Ve , > 
6 O€ drevicas aiT@ Kai euoBos yevdpevos eimev Ti éotiv, Kipte; etmev 
~~ , b , , 
d€ ait@ Al mpocevyai cov kai ai Ehenuootva cov SavéBnaar eis pynpdcuvoy 
a“ a a Q EA 
eumpooGev Tov Oeod. kal viv Sréuyov avdpas eis "Ildmmny Kal Swerdarepyar 
, , é 3 ~ , iy t , ’ 
Siuwva twa Os émekadeira: Iérpos: otros EeviCerar mapa tive Sipwve 
Bupoet, 7 €or oikia mapa Oddaccav. ws dé arndOev 6 ayyedos 86 
ry . ~ , , ca A. ”~ 4 , > a ~ 
Aatév aita, hovncas dvo Ty oikerOv kal orpatidtny evoeBn TaY 
4 > a ‘ >? , og > - > s 
MpookapTepovvT@y aiT@, Kal eEnynodyevos dmavta avrois améarethev 
> ‘ ° ‘ rs ox 6é > , 9 50. 4 2 , ‘ ~ 
avtovs eis thy ‘Idmmnv. Th dé emavptov %6do.ropovvTav éxeivay Kal TH 
an , 
mode eyyi(ovtay avéBn Térpos ert ro Sapa MrpocevEacOa epi dpav 
” ¢ 
extnv. éyévero b€ mpdomevos Kali 7Oehev yevoarOa- mapackeva(dytay 
d€ avtav éyévero em avrov exaracts, kal! Gewpet Tov ovpavoy Vavemypévov 
lal -~ > Lal 
kal kataBaivov oxevos Te ws 6Odvnv peyddny, Técoapow apxais Kaénevov 
emt ths yns, ev & Mimnpxev mavra ra TeTpdroda Kal éEprera THs ys Kal 
Y a > a :¥ > , ‘ \ >? , 14? / , 
meTewa TOU ovpavov. Kal eyévero havn mpos avtdv !’Avaoras, Ilérpe, 
1 gydpuare 41. 2 poBovpmevos 260. 3 r00 Ocod 34 (5). 4 eloed- 


Obvra...kat elrdvra 262,150; these aorist participles have a present sense with 
reference to the main verb: contrast with drevicas kal éugoBos yevduevos 


below, see 263. 5 avéBynoav 105. 6 réupov, verdmeuwac 125, 81. 
7 @ 39. 8 6 AadGy 260. 9 SdocmopodyTwr éxelywy 35. 10 rpocevEacbar 
138. ll Gewpet 88. 12 dvewypévoy 266, 150. 13 bripyey 


10. M4 dvacras Vicoy Kal dae, participle of attendant circumstances 258, 


s 


136 APPENDIX 1 


Ovcov Kal pare 6 S€ Ilérpos eirev Mydapas, Kupte, Ore ovd€émore Serer 
may Kowov Kal dd@aprov. kal @avy maw ek Cevne pes pos avtov A 6 
Oeds Resco apea ee ov a Ikolvov. tovro b€ éyévero emt rpis, Kai evOds 
c r= , © , 
dvednppon TO oKEvos eis TOV ovparéy. Os dé ev €avt@ Siymdper 6 Henpas 
187i av etn 7d papa 6 Meider, idovd of dv dpes ot *dmearahpevor bm TOU 
KopvnAlov ESOL SesarnSiaDE cS THY olkiay TOU Zijsavos éméotnoav emt Tov 
muAGva, Kal Pavnoavtes émuvOdvovTo et Zipwv 6 émixahovpevos Térpos 
evoade Eevitera. Tod dé Iérpou dvevOvpovpévov mepl Tov dpdparos cimev 
rd Lveipa “180d dvdpes dvo0 Cnrodvrés oe GANA dvaoras KaTdBnO1, Kal 
co E ‘ ’ > , 
mopevov avy avrois pndev Siaxpivdpevos, Ste eyo améotadka avrovs. 
> > a - € 
caraBas S€ Wérpos mpos rods dvdpas eimev “180d yd eis bv (nreire: tis 7 
airia Sv fv mdpeote; of S€ etmav Kopyndtos Exatovrdpxns, avnp Sikatos Kal 
Pe y , iA , ¢ beg a ria) ~ > id 
poBortpevos rév Cedv, paptupovperds Te Vad ddov Tod EOvous Tay ‘lovdaiwr, 
> , 6 € wee aN ce 23 , 6 , > \ cs > a 
€xpnpatiaOn bd dyyédov dylov ™peramépacGai oe eis Tov oiKkov avTov 
kal dxovoa priwata mapa cov. ecloxadecdpevos ovv avrovs e€évicev, TH 
dé €mavpuv dvacras eEnOev civ aitois, Kai Tes TOV adeAPav TOv amd 
>? , Ce) > Led col Sy > tA is a F) \ , ¢ s 
Idrans cuvidOov ait. tH dS€ emavpiov eiondOer els rHY Kacapiav: 6 de 
Kopynatos *4v mpoodoxav avtovs, cuvKadeodpevos Tos ouyyeveis avTov 
? Ip Y 
> , , ~ ~ 
kal Tovs advayxalous didous. ‘Qs dé éyévero rod eiaedOciv Tov Iérpov, 
‘ lol 
cuvayvrTngas avT@ 6 KopynAdtos mecay emi Tovs wodas mpooektynoev. 6 Oe 
‘ 
, > \ a > va . 
Ilérpos iyeipev avrov *%réyav “AvdornOt: Kal eyo aitos dvOpamds elm. 
Kal guvoptAGy aiTe eiondAOev, kal edpioxer cuvvednAvOdras modXovs, ey TE 
Merits : : 
mpos avrovs ‘Ypeis emioracbe ws abéuirdy ear avdpi lovdaim ckohAac Oat 
x , > 4 > y 
i) mpocépyerbac addopirAm: Kapol 6 Ceds CMekev "pndéva Kowdy 7 
> / ww 
axd@aproy déyew GvOpwrov: S16 Kal dvavtippnres HAOov perameppbeis. 
muvOdvopa ouv Tine hoyo j Oé pe; Kat 6 nrtos &pbn Amd 
mn yo perermépryacbé pe; Kat 6 Kopynrwos én *Amd 
‘ © , s Ul Les 7 E) 
TeTapTys nuépas péxpe TavtTns THs wpas Aunv Bray evarny mpocevxopevos 
> “a aT. ‘ > ‘ > \ * > , by fol a 
€v T@ olk@ pov, kai iSov advnp €oTn evomidv pov év ea OjTt Aaympa, Kai 
, , > , € 
dno Kopyndce, Meionxovadn cov 4 mpocevyy cali ai éAenpoovva cov 
> A > , a a > 
envycOnoav evamiov Tod Ocod. méuwyov ody eis “Idmmnv Kal peraxdreoat 
/ a > r ’ ze 
Zipwva os emkadeirar Ieérpos: obros Eeviferar ev oixia Siuwvos Bupcéws 
ay , 2 Lol > cA \ * , aA 
zoos Odracoav. e€aurns ody emreuwa mpos oé, ov Te Kaos 30 esr oina-as 
; e's ; aoe ; B re 
Mapayevopevos. viv ovv mavTes Hueis evamiov Tov Ceod mdpeoper 


1 epayov 105. 16 éxabdpicev 105. W kolvov 127. 18 +i ay ely 
161. 12 eldev 100. 20 dmecradpévor 266. at Stepwrhoav res 263, 
22 Eevlferac 160. 3 ueraréupacbar 159. 24 nv mpocdoxav 114, 
%® rob elaedOe rov Iértpov 177. 26 Néywv 259. 27 undéva Kowdy Aéyew 
d&vOpwirov 267, 145-148. *8 rhv évdrnv (understand wpav) 18. 9 elo- 
nKovadn...€uvjonoay 106. 30 érolnoas 105, 51 rapayerduevos 264, 


APPENDIX I 137 


> a a ”~ 
dxovoat mavra ra mpooreraypéva wou bd Tod Kuplov. *Avoitas dé Mérpos 
A , - > > , 
TO ordua eirev “En” adnOeias catadapBdvopa ort ovK Eotw mpoowmodnp- 
¢ , > > > ‘ »” , 
m™s 6 Oeds, adr’ €v marti EOver 6 PoBovpevos adrdy Kai éepyatdpevos 
’ > sag , cal - 
Suxacoovvny Sextds air@ eoriv+ Tov Adyor dy amwéareidev Tots viois "IopajrA 
> t Re 3 Nu 3S a a 2 
evayyeArCouevos eipnynv dia “Incod Xpiorod: obtds €otw mavtav Kupuos. 
c ~ wm A , ta > a Aa 
pets oidare Td yevopevoy pjua Kad’ drys Tis “Iovdaias, apEdpevos amo Tis 
, ‘ a > Ls > cal 
TadiAaias pera 76 Barriopa 6 exnpvéev “Iwdvns, Incodv tov amd Nalapéd, 
© ” > A , a ios 
@s Expioev avtov 6 Oeds Tvevpart ‘Ayi@ kat Suvdper, ds SupOev evepyerav 
ee a 
kal i@pevos mavtas Tovs KaTaduvacTevopévous bd Tod SiaBdrou, OTe 6 Oeds 
> Ss a © a na na 
HY MET aUTOV* Kal Huets paptupes mavtav dy eroingey ev TE TH yopa TOY 
> , < ’ a 6 a 
Iovdaiwy cal ‘Iepoveadn: ov Kat aveikay Kpeudoavres emt EvdAov. Todrov 
6 cbs av > fod , c , 4 4) > A > a ia 6 > 
Hyeipev ev TH TpiTn nuépa Kal EOwKev adrov eupavy yevérOat, ov 
N a - - , A a 
mavtt T@ Aa@, aAAa paptvow Tois BarpoKexeiporovnpévois Ud TOU Ceod, 
€ Lal o o a 
np, oirives cuvediyomuev Kal ouveriopev ait@ ** pera TO dvaorHvat avTov 
> ~ ‘ U cr , fol fol 
€k vexp@v* Kal mapryyerev nuiv knpvéa TO a@ kal Stapapripacdar sre 
hd > ’ a a , a 
ovrds €oTw 6 >a@picpevos Ud TOU Ceod Kpiris CavTwy Kal vexpov. Toi7@ 
, a a ” a tal a 
mavTes of mpopyrat paprupovow, apeow dpapriav *°)daBeiv did Tov dv0- 
> a Y = a 
pearos avrov mavta Tov miorevovta cis airév. “Ett NadovvTos Tov Ilérpou 
Le ~ a a 
Ta pnpata Tatra é€mémecey TO Ivetpa TO “Aylov emt mavras Tovs akovovras 
B 
> , a o a ca 
Tov Adyorv. Kai eLéornoav of €x wepitopns mistol Goo ouvvynOav To 
Ilérpw, dru kal emi ra €Ovn 7 Swped rod “Ayiov Ivetparos éexxéyurat: 
t? Y 
4 > col , , 
jxovoy yap Vaitav darovyvTav yAoooas kal peyadvydvrav Tov Cedv. 
7] 
> , , o , n ’ al 
rote amexpiOn Ilérpos Mire rd vdop Svvara. xwddtoai tis *rod py 
Barria 67 b ¢ 6 Tvev 6 "A {0haBov a i npeis; 
vat TovTOUS, olrwes TO TIvedpa 7d “Ayiov M€dAaBov ws Kat Hpeis; 
mpooérakey S€ aitods év TO dvdpare "Incot Xpiotod BanrioOjva. tore 
> U > A > Cal ¢ , if A t; 
npoTncav avtov émimetvar uépas twas. Acts x. 


82 dy 63. 33 rpoxexerporovnuevors 266. 34 pera rd dvacrivat abrdv 219. 
35 Opiopévos 266. 36 \aBeiv 145-148; the infinitive seems to represent a 
timeless aorist in direct speech 151, 152, 91, 105. 87 qitGv NahovyTwv 
34 (8). 38 ujre 270. 39 ro5 wy BamricOjva 175, 34(5), 178; the 
two ideas of purpose and prevention seem to be combined here, = *° &AaBov 
105. 


APPENDIX II 


The following selection of passages from Christian authors of the 
first two centuries has been added to this book in the hope that it may 
be useful to those who wish for some further knowledge of Greek than 
that which can be obtained from the study of a book whose contents 
are so familiar to them in an English version as are the contents of the 
Greek Testament. 

In language and construction these passages very closely resemble 
the Greek Testament, but their subject-matter is unfamiliar, and this 
makes the study of them far more valuable as an exercise than the 
study*of passages, the general meaning of which is well known. 

References have been given in the footnotes to the paragraphs of 
the Syntax which explain the constructions which occur in these 
passages so far as they seem to stand in need of explanation. 

A trauslation of the more uncommon words is also given. 

It is hoped that these selections may prove interesting and valuable 
as affording first hand information about the beliefs and practices of 
the Christians of the first two centuries. 


AN EARLY ACCOUNT OF THE ADMINISTRATION OF THE 
SACRAMENTS, FROM THE “TEACHING OF THE TWELVE 
APOSTLES.” DATE ABOUT 100 ap. 


Ilept d€ rod Bartioparos, ora Barticate: Taita mavta mpoeiTovtes 
Bamricare eis ro Gvopa Tod Tarpds Kal Tov Yiov Kai rod dyiov Ivevparos 
év vari (avTt. *edv dé pn exns Vdap Cdr, eis GAXo Vdap Barrioov: 3ei S 

1 Cf. Matt. xxviii. 19. 2 day dé wh exns 241. 3 el 5 ob dbvacat. 
This sentence if fully expressed would run e 6’ od dtvacat ev Wuyps Barrifew, 
év Oepuw Barricov. The Present indicative with e/ is used here in exactly the 


same sense as the Subjunctive with é4y above. For ov in the Protasis of a 
Conditional sentence see 267. 


APPENDIX II 139 
a 
ot Stvaca ev Wuxpa, ev Oepud. cay S€ duddrepa py Exns, &xeov els Thy 
Kearny Tpis Udwp eis dvopa Tarpos kai Yiod cai dylov Mvevparos. mpo Oé 
tod Bantiopatos mpovnorevodt@ 46 Barrifwy Kai ®6 BamtiCsuevos Kai ef 
tives Gddot Odvavra. Kehevers S€ vyoreioa Tov BawriCspevov Smpd pas 
7) Svo. 
46 Barrifwy, for the meaning of a Present participle preceded by an 
article see 260. 5 6 Barrifduevos, Tov Bawrigduevoy, for the use of the 


Present to denote an action desired see 86. § po puds 4 So, understand 
nuépas, and translate one or two days before. 


‘ x a a , o > , 2 - .Y a 
Hept dé THs evxapioTias, ovTw eixapioTHoate: mpatov mepi rod morn- 
ay. ~ . a , > , a 
plov: Evxaptotoipév cou, ldrep nuav, tmep tis dyias dumédov Aaveld rod 
maidés cou, lis eyvapicas nuiv bia “Inood tov maidds cov: coi f dda eis 
tovs ai@vas. mepl dé rod *xAdoparos: Evxapiorodpév cot, Idrep jpav, 
imep ths Cans Kal yvaoews, lips eyvapicas nyuiv dia “Incod rod matdds oou- 
3co01 n Sdga eis Tos aidvas. Gomep jv TodTo 47d KAdopa SSterKopmicpévoy 
erdva Tav dpéwv Kal Savvaybev eyévero Ev, ovT@ GvvaxOnTa cov 7 exKAnoia 
amo TOY TEpaTay Tis ys eis THY Iv Baorelav: 6tt cod éotiv 7 Od€a Kal 
c , A > a a > ‘ 3A vf 8 ‘ ‘ , ‘ 
n Svvapis dia “Incod Xpiarov eis rovs ai@vas. “pndels b€ hayérw pnde 
, > A aA > ’ iz col 2 > < , > a” , 

mutT amd THs evxapioTias tpadv, addN ot Barticberres cis dvopa Kupiov. 

ann! 'S \ ’ ” ¢ s 8Mn d6 vo a ’ 

kal yap mept Tovtov elpnkev 6 Kupios: 8M dare TO dytoy Tois Kvot. 
pera O€ 7d YeumdnoOnva ovtTws evxapiotnoare’ Evxapiorotpév oon, 
Ildrep dye, bwep tov dyiov dvdparés cov, 10d Katreoxnvaoas ev Tals 
capdiais nay, Kal Urép THs yyaoews kal mictews Kal dOavacias, lijs 
eyvapioas juiv dia “Incod tov maidds cov: coi 7 ddéa eis Tovs aidvas. 
ov, S€omoTa mavToKpdrop, ékticas Ta mavTa evexev TOU dydpatds Gov, 

, ay A P25) ~ b) 6 U > > 5X 10”, 
tpopny te kat morov edwxas Tots avOpamos eis drddavow Miva cor 
evyapioTno@ow, jpiv b€ Ueéyapicw mvevparixny tpopyy Kal wordy kal 
(anv aiaviov dia tod maidds gov. mpd mavtov evxapioToipey oor Gre 
bY > 4 ‘ c 8 , ° ‘ 2A , 6 K , 12 Aa > 

duvaros €f av: cot 7 dSdéa eis Tovs ai@vas. pynoOnrt, Kipte, rns ex- 
KAnolas gov Brod picacOa adtiy amo maytds movnpov Kai Tehevoa 
abriy év th aydmn cov, kal civatov aitiy amd Tav Tecodpoy avépor, 
1 7s, for assimilation of Relative see 63. 2 kddoparos, cf. 1 Cor. x. 16. 
3 Understand éozl. 4 k\doua, Broken bread. 5 ny dteckopmicuevor, 
Periphrastic Pluperfect 114, translate was scattered, see 99. © cuvax dev 
263, 218. 7 undels 6¢ dayérw, for the use of the Present imperative to 
forbid the habitual doing of an action see 128, let no one ever eat or drink.... 
8 uh dGre, for the use of the Aorist subjunctive to forbid the beginning of an 


action see 129. 9 gumrdnoOjvat Ist Aor. Inf. Pass. from éumlumdnue: for 
const. see 219. 10 iva 189. 1 éyaplow 2nd sing. Ist Aor. mid. from 


xaplfouat. 12 ris exxAnolas 34, 13 700 picacOat 174, 175. 


140 APPENDIX II 


Nepy dyacbeicay eis ry ov Bagireiav, hy Hroimacas adth: tt God eoTw 
7 Stvayus Kat 7 Sd€a eis rovs aidvas. éAOérw xdpis kal mapeOérw 6 Kdopos 
obros. aoavvd ro ed Aaveid. ct tis dyids €or, VepyécOw: et Tis ov 
éori, peravocira. “papav aba. adpnv. trois d€ mpodpiras emitpémere 
edyapiotety doa Oédovoww. 

14 thy dyacbetoay with adryy, her that has been sanctified 71, 262. 


15 éoyécOw, for the force of the Present imperative see 125. 16 ox 267. 
17 napa 40d, Chaldee words meaning Our Lord cometh, cf. 1 Cor. xvi. 22. 


4 A “ , 6 , nt , a ‘ > , 
Kara xupiaxny O€ Kupiov cvvaxGévres khacate aproy kal evxapioTioare 
mpoeEopohoynodpevot Ta mapanT@pata bpav, ldmws KaOapa 7 Ovoia ipaov 
> cal be + A 2 > , \ oN, , > ~ A AGE c Cod 
ye mas dé exov TH *appiBorlav pera TOV éraipov avTov py TuvEOETo vpIy, 
8 C4 = ~ ov A 67 € ‘ c cad A , > c 
€ws ob diaddaydou, iva pr Kowwby 7 Ovoia tpov. avtn ydp éoTw 7 
c 6 - ec A , > ‘ , ‘ , 4 , 6 , 
pnOcioa bad Kupiov: “Ev ravti ror@ kai xpdv@ *mrpoodépe por bvoiav 
6 ‘ r \ , see, ie Ko NC Nor a 6 \ 
xabapdv: drt Baordeds péyas eipi, Aéyer Kipios, kal rd Cvopd pov Oavpacrov 
ev Tots €Ovect. 
me > ¢ Cas > , ‘ , > , ~ , 
xElporovicare ovv éavTois emiokdmous Kai Stakdvous a&iovs rod Kupiov, 
” 5 n APN , ove BO 6 - \ , con 
dvdpas mpaeis kai adiAapyvpous Kai adnOeis Kal Sedoxyuacpévous: wtpiv 
yap °Xecroupyovar kal avrol Ty Aciroupylav Tov mpodnray xat didacKddov. 
a A n a 
py ovv Simrepidnre adrovs: avtot yap eiow of TeTiunuévor tpdv pera TOV 
mpopyntav Kat SWarkdrwv. édéeyxere S€ aAAnAous py €v py; GAN ev 
> , ¢ + > lel > fp > -~ a” , 
eipyvn, @S EXETE EV TO EvayyeNi@: Kat TavTL doToXOvYTL KaTa Tov érépoU 
ny ‘ Xr r Y, be C vat y col 2 , o = , A ‘ > 4 
pndeis Nadeir@ pyndé map’ bpdv akovéra, Ews ob petavonoyn. Tas dé evyas 
c col ‘ ‘A > ¢ 
UpSv Kal Tas Ehenpogvvas kai wdoas Tas mpdkes oVTws moinoaTe, ws exeETE 
? fol > ld a , ¢ cod 
ev T@ evayyeAl@ Tod Kupiov nav. 
; : 
1 Grws 198. 2 dudiBorlav a dispute. 3 ws ob 218, 215. 4 tpoa- 


gépev Infinitive used as Imperative 137, cf. Malachi i. 11, 14. 5 Nevroup- 
yovor THY NetTovpylay cognate accusative 17. 5 Saeplinre, see Urepopdu. 


APOSTLES AND PROPHETS IN THE EARLY CHURCH. 


Tlepi b€ rév droordd@y Kal mpopnrdy card rd Sdypa Tod evayyediov 
ovtas momoare. mas b€ dmdorodos lépxdpevos mpds pas dexOnrw ds 
Kuptos: ob pevet O€ ef py 2hépav pilav: édv dé 7 Xpela, kal ry addAnv: 
Tpeis Oe €av peivyn, Pevdorpopyrns eariv: e&epxdpevos 5é 6 dmrdarodos 
pydev NapBavérw ei pi dprov, %€ws ob taddicbj+ eav Se apyvpwov airn, 
evdorpopnrns éari. kal mavra mpodpyrnvy Aadodvra ev TvEevpare oJ 


1 épxdpevos when he comes 259, 218. 2 nuépav ulay 18, 


tains 
213, 215. 4 avhicOy he find shelter. me 


APPENDIX II 141° 


meipaoere ovde Staxpiveire> maca yap dpaptia dpeOnoera, atrn d€ 4 
duapria ovK adeOnoera. Sod mas Sé 6 Aardv ev mvevpate mpopyrns 
€oriv, ddd éav exn robs rpdmovs Kupiov. "Amd ofv Trav TpoTeav yvo- 
aOnoerat 5 Yevdorpodyrns Kai 6 mpopiyrys. Kal ras mpopyrns opitov 
Tpamelay ev mvevpate ov pdyerar am” airijs: ei Sé phye, Wevdorpopyrys 
coriv, mas S€ mpodpyrns Sdoxov tiv ddyOeav ef & SiddoKes Sod rorei, 
Wevdorpodnrns eariv. was d€ mpopyrnys TdeSoxywacpévos ddnOwos 8 roid 
eis mvoTHpioy KoopiKdy exKAnolas, pu) SiddoKav dé moveiv doa adros roel, 
ov KpiOjoera eh tydv- pera Ocod yap exer tv Kpiow: woadvrws yap 
eroingav Kai oi apyaior mpopyta. %bs & av cian ev mvevparte- Ads por 
dpyvpta } Eerepa tiva, ovK axovioerbe Mavrot: éav S€ wept GAAwv Nigrep- 
ovvTa@v ein Sovvat, undels adrov KpivérTo. 


5 ov mas 5€ 6 Nady but not every one that speaketh 260. § od 267. 
7 Sedoxipacuévos 266. 8 rody etc. if he does aught as an outward mystery 
typical of the Church; for the Conditional participle see 245. 9 ds 8 ay 
ely 252. 10 qurod 34 (3). UL gorepovvTwy that are in want 260. 


EXTRACTS FROM THE EPISTLE OF CLEMENT, BISHOP 
OF ROME, TO THE CORINTHIANS, WRITTEN ABOUT 
95 A.D. 


Tor MartyrpomM oF PETER AND PAUL. 


"AN liva ray dpyaiov troderypatav mavo@peba, *€AOwpev. ert rovs 
éyytora yevouevous GOAnrds: AaBapev THs yeveas Nuav Ta yevvata bro- 
Seiypara. Ard (ydov kal POdvoy of péyorou Kal Suxardrarot orvAo edi0- 
xOnoav xai gas Oavarov 7OAncav. AdBaopev mpd dpOadrpav jpady rods 
dyabovs dmoordAous: Ilérpov, ds dia (ydov ddixov ovx eva ovdé Svo adda 
mArclovas 2imnveycev movous, kal ovT@ paptupjoas émopevOn eis Tov 
dpedopevov témov ths dons. Ara Cyrov kai epi Taidos vropovis 
BpaBeciov timédeEev, émrdxis Seopa gopécas, puyadevbeis, ABacdeis, 
knpué yevomevos ev te TH avaroAy Kal ev TH SvoeL, Td yevvatoy THs miaTEws 
a’tod KAdéos edaBev, “Stxarcoovynv Suddéas Gdov Tov KOgpoV Kal emt TO 
réppa tis Svocews eAOdv* Kal paptupyoas Semi Tov ryoupéever, TovTws 
dan\Xdyn Tod Kdopou Kal eis Tov Gyov Témov EmopevOn, Umopovns yev Opevos 


péyeotos Simoypappos. 


1 iva ravowpueba 198 but to pass from.... 2 Owuev 119. 3 barn- 
veyKev, See Vropépw. 4 Sréderéev from brodelkvume pointed out, 5 dukawo- 
ctvnv diddtas bdov Tov kdopov 19; for the participles see 263. 8 érl rap 
Hyounevwv before the rulers. 7 obrws amndAddyn Tod Kécpov so he departed 


from the world 34 (5), see dmah\doow. 8 vroypaumds pattern. 


142 APPENDIX II 


Tor RESURRECTION. 


‘ - 
IKaravonoopev, dyarntol, mas 6 Seaomdrns emideikvura *dinvexas 
ca i 2 ‘ > \ , 4 
nutvy Srnv pédAdovoav avdotacw eoecOa, hs THY amapxiy emomoato TOV 
fA a cal 2 of w, ‘ s 
Kupiov "Incodv Xpiorov ek vexpav tavaotinoas. iWwpev, ayamnrol, THY KaTa 
Kaipov ywopévny avdoraciv. nuépa kal vvE avactacw npiv dndovow: 
bal ’ a fe th 
Kouarat 7 vv, avioraranpépa’ 7 Népa Arevow, vvEé emépxeTar. AaBapev 
a 5 , 
TovUs Kapmovs: 6 omdpos Ts Kal Sriva rpdoroy yivera; %€EjOev 6 oreEipov 
a a A “a 
kal €Banev eis Tv ynv ExaaTov TOV omeppdtoy, drwa meodvTa Eis THY yHY 
Ye col £ a fh 
Enpa kalyupva Siadvera. cir ex THs Suadvoews 7 peyaderdtys THS mpovoias 
tov Seomorov dvictnow avd, Kal €k Tov évds mAclova av&er kal expéper 
Kap7ov. 
16, i / <a A , > - 7 > - Ve 
Waopev TO mapadoEov onpetov, TO yuvdpevov ev Tois dvarodtKols TOrTaLs, 
Toutéoti Tois mept THY “ApaBiay. Opveov yap éeotw 6 mpocovopdtera 
ShoiviE: rodro povoyeves Umdpxov Ch ern TevTaKdo.a’ yevopevdyv TE HON 
A > ‘ 9 a > 6 ~ > , 10 \ c ~ “a 3 ON / ‘ 
mpos amodvow *®rod amodavety avtd, MonKkdy éavT@ mote ex ALBdvov Kal 
{, cr - col 
opvpyns Kal Tay Aowwav apopdreyv, «is ov ™aAnpwbévtos Tod xpovou 
eioépyeTar Kal TeheuTa. onmopéevns S€ THs TapKds OKaANE TiS yevvarat, 
a > Sy aS 40 con t r > , 14 lal 
ds ex ths Pixuddos rod BrereheutnKkdros (wou avarpepdpevos 14 rrepodvuet: 
> - o a ~ 2A 
eira  yevyatos yey douevos aipe: Tov onKOov eKEivoy Oov TA daTa TOU mpoye- 
, > / \\ a / 16 rd > A co > a U ov 
yov bros €oriv, kal tadra Bacrdlav 1 diavier amd ths ApaBixns x@pas ews 
- , ¢ 
Tis Aiyvmrov eis THY Aeyouevny “HAvovrodw: kai “npépas, Brerdvray 
, 18 > A > XN A ~ HAL \ i@ > 4 ‘ oe > 
mavreav, Bémimras emi rov Tod nriov Bopov riOnow avira, Kat ovras eis 
c — a , - 
Wrovmricw amoppa.. ot ovv lepeis emiokémTovTar Tas avaypadas Tov 
xpovev Kal evpicxovowy avTov mevTakoc.ocrov erous memAnp@pévou eAn- 
AvOévat. 


1 xaravonowmev 119. 2 Sinvex@s continually. 3 ri wéd\dovcay ava- 
oracw éceobor 144-148, 112. 4258. ° rlyarpdmov 22. §& é&%)Oev...éBarev 
Gnomic Aorists 95 note. 7 dvaroXrkots Hastern. 8 dotné the Phoenix. 
9 rod drobavely 176. 10 onkov a coffin. 11 r)dnpwOévros Tod xpébvou 35. 
12 (xuddos gen. of lkuds moisture. 13 rereNeuTnKdTos 266. 14 rrepopuet 
puts forth wings. 15 vevvatos lusty. 16 S.avder takes its journey. 
7 juépas 29. 18 émimtds Aor. part. from émuméroma I fly to. WY rovmicw 
back aguin. 


APPENDIX II 143 


THE PRAISE OF LOVE. 


‘O €yov ayi fy X, D 1 1 tov X v aN 
Xov ayinrny ev Xpusct@® womodrw ra tov Xpictov mapayyéApara. 
A a > , ~ col , > , cal 
Tov Seopov this ayamns Tov Ceod ris dvvarae eEnynoacOa; Td peyadciov 
bed aX ) > ~ , > A > a“ iY LA ; 2 4 2 ‘ i > , 
THs KaAovis avrov Tis apKkeros e€eurety; TO Vos eis b dvdyer 7 aya 
> - coal - ~ 
lavexdupyntov éeotw. aydmy KOoAAG jas TO Oe@: *aydrn Kadvmrer 
wANnGos duapti@v* aydrn mavtra avéxerar, mavta paxpobvpet: ovdey 
8 , 2 > , > ‘ « , > , ‘ > a > La 
Bavavooy ev aydrn, ovdev tmepnpavoy: ayann oxiopa ovK exe, ayarn 
> , > ’ , -" 3 c / > a > / > I 
ov oTaciatel, dyamn mavtTa Tote ev dpovoia: ev TH aydmy erehemOnoay 
, oe x a ~ , > / > ‘\ 7 2 > kod a” 
mavtes oi exAeKTOl TOU Geov Sixa ayamns oidey evdpectoy EoTLY TO CEQ: 
> Eee 4 ’ Lp ies € 8 t 8 \ \ eee a ” \ 
ev ayarn *mpocedaBero nuas 6 deordtns: Sia THY ayarny, hv €oxev mpos 
) cad ec ~ col 3 a ’ nn 
nas, TO aiwa avtov edaxev imep mpav mays Xpurres 6 piece npev év 
OeAnpate Ccod, Kal THY GdpKa Urép THs ts Nay Kal Thy Woxnv vmép 
TOV eer Ov. 
Opare, ayarnrot, was péya Kal Oavpaoroyv eorw 7 aydrn, Kal Tis 
TedeLoTNTOS avTHS OvK eoTiv eEnynots: Tis ikavds ev avtH evpeOnvat, et pH 
, t > a” 
Sots av xarakiwon 6 Ceds; SewpeOa ody Kal airopeOa dd Tov édéous 


auto 6°, > > LA ec 66 ov ve ri > 6 / + 
v, wa ev ayamn evpeOOpev Oixa ‘mpockAlcews avGpamivyns auepot. 


1 dvexdujyntov, unspeakable. 2 dydan Kadvrrer 1 Pet. iv. 8. 
3 Bdvavooy coarse or vulgar. 4 apoceddBero took us to Himself. 5 ods 
ay karakiboy 252. 8 va év dyary evpedGmev 189. 7 mpookNoews 


dvOpwivys the factiousness of men. 


Tur APOSTOLIC SUCCESSION. 


10i dr doToAor Hiv einyyeAicOnoav amd Tod Kupiov "Incov Xpucrod, 
"Inoots 6 Xpuctds amo Tod Geod ekeméudOn. 6 Xpiords odv dd rod 
@cod, kal of dwdaTo\o ard Tod XpiaTov: eyévovTo odv auddrepa eitdkTws 
€x Oednpatos Meod. mapayyedias ody AaBdvres Kai mAnpoopyOérres dia 
Ths avagtdcews Tod Kupiov jay ‘Incod Xpiorod kai *rictwdévtes ev TO 
Ady@ Tod Ccod pera rAnpohopias mvevparos dyiou e&nOov, evayyeAiCspevor 
3rHy Bacirelay Tod Ocod péddrew epyecOa. Kata xopas otv Kal médeis 
knpvocovtes *xabicravoy Tas amapyas aitov, dokiysdoavtes TO mvevpari, 
eis émurkdmovs Kai Siakdvous Trav peAAdvT@Y mioTEvVELY. Kal TodiTO ov 
Kaas, ex yap 57 moAdOv xpdvav eyéypanto mept EmtoKdTray Kal Ovakdvev: 
1 of drbarodo Huiv ebnyyedlcOnoay amd... The Apostles received the Gospel 
for us from... . 2 mistwhévtes being fully persuaded. 3 rhv Bactrelay 


pédrew epxec Oar 145-148, 4 xaOloravoy Tas awapxds they appointed their 
firstfruits (i.e. their first converts),..to be bishops and deacons. 


144 APPENDIX II 


ovtas ydp mov déye 7 ypapn: *Karaotnow Tovs éemickdmous avTav ev 
Suxkavocvvn Kal Tovs Staxkdvous aitav év miore.. 

kal of amdarodon nuav eyvwcayv dia Tod Kupiov juav “Incod Xpiorov 
drt Epis ~arae é€mi rod dvdpuaros ths émurxomys. Ava TavTny ovv Tip 
airiav mpdyveow SeiAnpdores Tedeiav Katéotnoay Tovs * mpoeipnwevous, Kat 
Suerakd emimoviy Seddxaow %éras, eav xoynOaow, diadcE@vTa Erepor 
Sedoxipacpévor dvdpes tiv Necrovpyiav a’tay. Tovs ovv xaraorabévras 
tm éxeivov i) perakd vd érépav éAdoyipwv avdpav, cuvevdoxnodons THs 
exkAnolas mdons, Kal AetTovpynoavras auéeumT@s TO Trotuvi@ Tov Xpiorov 
pera Tarewodppociyns navxyws kal dBavaiows, pepwaptupnuévous TE mod- 
Rois xpdvois Ud mwavTav, TovTovs Mov dixaiws vopitouey amoBddrdcoOa 
Ths Aetroupylas. dpuaptia yap ov puxpa npiv eorat, cay Tovs auéumT@s Kat 
doiws mpooeveyxovtas Ta SHpa THs emicxoTHs amoBddopev. paxaptot ot 
2 poodoumopnaavtes mpeaButTepot, oirwes Béyapmov kal tehelav eoxov 
Thy avadvow: ov yap MeddAaBovvra pn Tis avTov’s petacTnon amd Tod 
iSpupévov avrois térov. 

5 xaraotHow Is. Ix. 17. § ei\npéres Perf. part. act. from AawBavw. 
T apoecpnuévous Perf. part. pass. from mpodéyw. 8 uerakd émimovyy dedwKaow 
afterwards they provided a continuance. 9 Srws, éav KoyunOwow 198, 241; 
the subject of xorunPwow is the bishops and deacons. 10 GBavatows 
without vulgar ostentation, modestly. 1l 9% dtxalws to be taken together, 


unjustly. 12 rpoodaropnaavtes Who have gone before. 13 €yKapmov 
fruitful. M4 evAaBodvra: for they have no fear lest... 192. 


CLEMENT REBUKES THE CORINTHIANS, 


*AvaddBere tiv éemicToAjy Tod pakapiov HavAov rov dmoorddov. Th 
mp@rov vpiv é€v apxn Tod evayyediou eypawev; em’ adnGeias mvevpatiKas 
leméores\ev tpiv mept avtov Te Kal Knda re cal "AmoANO, 281d TO Kal TéTE 
3rpookNices tuas memoujcOar add’) mpdocKduors exeivy Arrova duaptiav 
ipiv mpoonveycev *rpocekAlOnre yap droord\ols pepaprupynpévors Kal 
avdpi Sedoxiyacpév@ map aitois. Syuvi dé karavonoare tives tyuas &dié- 
orpevav kal 7rd cepvov tis mepiBonrov piraderdias tyav Séuelwoav. 
aicxpd, ayamnrol, kal Niav aicypd, Kal dvd&ia tis ev Xpiora Saywyis, 
dxoverOa thy BeBaordtny kal adpxaiav KopwOiav exxAnoiav Ov év 7) dbo 
Tpdowra oracid(ew mpos Tos mpeaButépovs. Kal avtn f akon ov pdvov 

1 éréorei\ev he charged you. 2 Gia 7d werorqoOar 228, 96, 97, 111. 
3 mpookNloes parties. 4 rpocexNlOnre ye were partizans of. 5 puri dé 


karavonoare... but now mark you who they are that have prevented you... 
§ duéorpeyav 105. 7 70 ceuvdv the glory 71. 8 aywyiis conduct. 


APPENDIX II 145 


> € a > , > A Q > Lal - 
eis nas €xopnoev GAG Kal eis Tods %érEpoKhiveis Umdpyovras ap Har, 
o , > a? , 
Wdore cal Braognuias emipéperOar TH dvdpare Kupiov did rv iperépay 
: 2 a 
adpoovyny, éavrois Sé xivduvov émeEepydferOat, 
NeEdpopev ody roiro év rdxyer Kal mpoomécwpev to Seomdry Kat 
4 € ¢ eae @ ov , ? CL a. 
kAavo@pev ixerevovtes airdv, Gras ihews yevdsuevos @émixaraddayy jpiv 
Se ey ‘ A a Xr , € cal € A > AY 13 >? uu 
kai emi tny cenvny tris piradeAdias judy dyviv dywynv “dmroxatactnon 
eas ‘ 
neGas. mvAn yap Suxawcivyns Mavewyvia cis anv atty, xabds yéypamra: 
*Avoi€aré poe mvAas Stxatoov iva eiaedAOay ev avtais e£opodoyn D 
€ poe mvAas dixatoovvns, iva ciceAOdy ev aitais Eopodoynoopat TO 
: x é A x 
Kupio: atrn 1) mvAn rod Kupiov, dixaroe Peicehevoovrat év ait#. Toda 
ody mudav dvewyuiay, 7 ev Sixaioctvyn aitn eorlv 7 ev XpioTa, ev 7 
pakdpio. mavres of etoeAOdvtes Kal KatevOivovtes THY mopeiay aitav év 
dovdrnre Kat Suxavocvyyn, arapaxws mavta emiredovyTes. FTw Tis TLOTOS, 
tw Suvatos yvaow e€eiretv, jtw copds ev Staxpice Adyar, tw 'yopyos 
Pd >, s , , \ n ma ® ¢ 
€v Epyols, Tw dyvds. TocovT® yap paAov rarewodpove dete, do@ 
Soxet paddov peifov eivat, cal (nreiv rd "Kowwpedés waow Kal py TO 
€auTov. 
9 érepoxdweis opposed. 10 Gore 231. 1 édpwuev from éalpw. 
12 érixataddayy 2 Aor. pass. subj. émixatadAdoow that He may be reconciled to 
us. 13 Groxaracryjoy Ist Aor. subj. act. from dmoxablornur that He may 
restore us to (él) the seemly and pure conduct.... 14 dyewyvia 2nd Perf. 


part. act. from dvolyvume. 1 elcehevcovTat, see eloépxopat. 16 yopyés 
strenuous. 17 kowwerés the conunon advantage. 


A VISION OF HERMAS CONCERNING THE CHURCH. 


Hermas was a Roman Christian, the brother of Pius, Bishop of 
Rome (142-157), according to the Muratorian Fragment. 

He imagined himself to be favoured with a series of revelations 
which were made to him by an ancient lady who declared herself 
to be the personification of the Church. 

In the introduction to the Vision given below he describes how he 
was commanded to meet this lady in the country and how she made 
him sit beside her on a couch, and then revealed the Vision to him, 
that he might report it for the edification of his brethren. 


Kai lémdpaca paBdov tiva Aapmpav héyer pots Brérers péya mpaypa; 
a“ , , ? \ > a , 
Aéyw abrn: Kupia, ovdev Brera, éyes por- “1Oov ovyx opas xarévavti cov 
, ty ie , t cal 
muipyov péyav oikodomovpevov emt VOdrwv AiOois Terpaywvois Aaumpois; 


1 érapaca Aor. part. from émalpw. 


N. 10 


146 APPENDIX II 


. , € a a , col , 
ev rerpaydveo dé dkodopeiro 6 mupyos td tev é veavioxay Tov €AnhvOd- 
- By, 4, > ~ , ft € ‘ > 
Tov per avtns: Gdaw d€ pupiddes avdpav mapépepov idovs, of pev - 
s nied as , ee 
270d BuOod, of S€ ék tis yijs, Kal emedidovy Trois é& veavioxois. exetvor Oe 
‘ > lol an , , Ld 
ehdpBavov kai @xoddpovy~ Tovs pev ex Tov Budod AlBous Ehkopévous mavTas 
. , < s a > \ , 
ovtas éridecav eis THY olkKoSomny: nppoopévor yap joav Kal cuvepovovy 
Ps = ~ Meme > a > , ba 
37h dppoyn peta Tov érépwv AiBov: Kai ovTas *éxoAdvTo adAndais, Sore 
a > A c °° ‘ a yz c 
Thy dppoyny adirav pr) paiverOa. epaivero dé 7 oikodoun Tod mUpyou ws 
, ‘ > A 
€& évds AiOov @xodopnpévyn. rods S€ Erépous Aidovs rods Pepopévovs amo 
U cA 
ths Enpas Tovs pev adméBaddov, tors de eridovy eis tiv oixodounvs GAdovs 
> a , » 4 , 
dé xaréxomrov kat éppimtov paxpav dro Tod mipyov. drow dé Aidor 
a n~ > lol > ‘ > 
moot KUKA@ TOD MUpyou EkelvTO, Kal OUK ExpOVTO avtois eis THY OlKO- 
A a \ RE a7 
Sounv: joav ydp ties e& adrdv Séywpiakdres, erepou b€ *oxopas ExovTeEs, 
‘ ue ‘ c , 
dAdo O€ SkexoNoSapévor, dAdoe S€ AevKol Kat SorpoyyvAo, pur) AppoCovres 
° \ ,’ ra ”* rv de [ wer. rid « , a av amo 
eis THY olkodouny. © €BAemov Oé Erépovs AiPovs purTopévouvs paKp 
a A > cod ol s: ‘ 
Tov mvpyou Kal épxopévous els Thy dOdv Kal pn pévovtas év TH 6d@, GAAa 
a LY 
Wxudsopévous eis THY avodiay: érépovs dé emt mip eumimrovtas Kal Kato- 
pévous: érépous b€ mimrovras éeyyds vddrev Kat pr Suvapévous kvdioOnvat 
a ° A 
eis TO VOwp, UKaimep *OeAdvr@v KvAcOnvar Kal eAGeiv eis Td VOwp. 
a > , v4 t Meer , , 
dciEaod por tadra HOedkev Barorpéxerv. éyo ath: Kupia, Ti por 
a ‘ > A , 
opedos taita Méwpakdre kal pr yiwooKkovTe Ti éoTw Ta mpdypata; 
tal a > A 
dmoxpibeiod por Neyer MIlavodpyos ef dvOpamos, Oéhov ywooKey Ta 
¢ * a . 
mept Tov mupyov. Nat, pypi, xvpia, iva rois adeddois avayyetha, Bai 
fe 6 ¢ 
dkovoarres yiwooKkwow Tov Kiptov ev moddy Od&n. 1) O€ en: *"Akovoovrat 
‘ / > (A bé > > col , .Y 8é 17 r , 
fev modQol: axovoavres O€ tives €€ aitav xapnoovta, tives dé ™Kdav- 
govrat+ GAdd Kal otrot, eav akovtowow kal peravojowow, Kal adrot 
a \ “ ’ - , 
Xapnoovra. dkove ody tas mapaBohas Tod mipyou: amoKxadiwa ydp cot 
, - > 
mavTa. Kal pnkéeTe pou KOmous mapexe TeEpt dmokadvews: ai yap amoKa- 
, , > > , 
hers adrae réos Exovow+ memAnpopévae ydp eiow. aA od maven 
> , > ro f > 8 \ > © . ¢ a Bnré 
aitoupevos amoxadvyeis: avaidys yap et. 6 pev mupyos bv Bréres 
, (s > , > i > rx , € > 6 c , \ a ‘ \ 
oikodopotpevoy, eyo eis 1 “ExkAnoia, ) opOciod coe Kal viv Kal rd 
, a na > , 2 , ‘ a #. \ > ’ 
mporepovs & dy ody Oedijons emepota wepl Tov mipyov, Kal amoxadupa 
2 Buvbds the deep. 3 +p apuoyh in their joining. 4 éxohNavTo they 
adhered. 5 are 231. 6 éWwpiaxdres mildewed ; for the tense see 266. 
7 oxiopnds cracks. 8 xexodoBwpévor too short 266, 9 orpoyyvAo. rounded, 
10 kuALomévous els Thy dvodlay rolling to where there was no way ; for the force 


of the present tense in these participles see 259 (1). N kalrep 246. 
L dehévrwy a genitive absolute irregularly introduced, see 35; the proper 
case would be accusative agreeing with \iOous. 13 arorpéxew to hurry 
away. 14 éwpaxdre Kal wh ywwoxovrt, observe the force of the tenses. 


15 ravotpyos insatiable. 16 kal dcovoaytes,.., understand tva. WV khav- 
covrat Future from xAalw. 


APPENDIX II 147 


° a ‘4 - « , pia 
got, wa xapys pera TOv dylwv. Aéyw abr: Kupla, éemel Arak aéidv pe 
18 © ’ ~ , > * 
yynT@ Tov mavra por amoxadvWat, dmoxdduvwov. 17 b€ éyer por: 1°O 
dA > , , > i > 
€ay évdexntat wor aroKahuPOjva, droxadkupbncera. pdvov 7 Kap&a cov 
\ A A ma” \ A LU 4 
mpos Tov Qedv ifrw Kal pr ~dupuynoes & dv idys. emnpdtnoa adrny: 
a + > ‘ c , > ’ ‘ - , 
Akan eres ert vddreov @koddpnrat, kupia; Eid oot, pyoiv, cai 7d 
a aes n 
mporepoy, Kat ex(ynteis emmehOs: ex(nTrdv ovv evpioxers thy aAnOear. 
ee 2 a. Ny > 
diari obv emt iddrov @xoddunrat 6 mipyos, dxove> dre h Cot tydv Sid 
LA > UJ ‘ , - ~ 
Udaros €odOn Kal cwoOjoera. ™reOepedwrar d¢ 6 wipyos TO phpari rod 
4 ‘ > / > tol cot 
Tavroxpatopos kai evddov dyduaros, *xpareira b€ tad THs aopdrov 
Suvdpews Tod Seamdrov. 
> ‘ , > A , , col saad 
amoxpwleis Kéyw airy: Kupia, peyddos cat Oavpaords exer To mpaypa 
a c ‘ ’ a ~ = 
TovTo. of dé veavioxot of E€€ of oixodoporvres tives eiciv, Kupia; Otroi 
> cog a ~ ~ a , ec a 
eiow of Gyior Gyyehot TOD Geod of mpGro xticbévtes, ois mapédaxev 6 
, a \ , > A a A 
Kupios macav tHv xtiow attov, avéew Kal oikodopeiv Kal Seomdlew THs 
’ \ , > a 
Ktiaews taons. dia tovtay ovv redecOnoerat 1) oikodopy Tod muUpyov. 
c ‘A a 
Oi dé erepor of wapapépovres rods AiOovs tives eioiv; Kal avrol ady.or 
wy col a 
ayyedot Tod Geod: ovror S€ of EE *bmepéyovtes adrovs eiow. ouvrehe- 
’ > « > ‘ Aa , ‘ t ¢ a > Ud 
oOnoerat ovy 1 olkodopn Tov mupyov, kal madvres 6p0v evppavOncorvra 
~ , o > , > 
KUKA@ Tod mupyou Kal So€dcovew Tov Cedv, Gri ereAéoOn 1 oixodopt TOU 
, > , a “~ 
mupyov. émnpatnaa avtiy héyav: Kupia, #Oedov yvava tov AlGov rH 
ul ul} 
bd ‘ A o fod , > r 
eEodov cai tiv Svvapiy attdv, moramn éeotiv. amoxpiOetod pou éyer- 
> oe A > 3 > , 7 ¢ > Lot rt ES 
Ody ote od é€x mavrT@v adéwworepos et iva oor dmoxadupOn: ardor yap cov 
0 Yue 
, > e » ral 
mporepot elow Kal BeAriovés cov, ols eet droxadvpOnvar ra dpdyara 
raira> ddd iva doéacb7 Td dvopa Tov Ocod, gol dmexahipOn Kal dmoKa- 
q be ’ 7 
, , cad -~ 
AuPOjoerar did rods Swdyous, ros StaroyiCopévous ev rais kapdias avrav 
> 
¥ a - } Z rs A 
ei dpa éoriv Taira }) ovK éoTw. éye avrots tt Taita mavta éeatly adn 
ON, 
aS , j 
Kal ovdev eE@bév éativ ths adnOcias, GAAa mavta ioxvpa kat BeBaa Kal 
67 eOepedtmpeva €oriv. 
ww a Wy Gets ri6 a « , > \ > 8 Ld € bY 
dxove viv mepi "rév Aiday Tov UmaydvTay eis THY oikodounY. oi pev 
> a iS 3 x 
ody AiBoe of Terpdywvot kal AevKol Kal cuppavodyTes Tals dppoyais aitav, 
otrol eiow %80f dmdorodoe Kal emiokomot Kal OiddoKadot Kal didKovor of 
mopevbévres Kata THY GEuvoTnTa TOU Ocod Kal emicxomnoavtes Kai Oida- 


18 pynow 2nd sing. Ist Aor. mid. Hyéouat. 19 § édy évdéxnrat... 
whatever is possible to be revealed to thee shall be revealed. 20 Supuxnoers, 
the Future used in a prohibition instead of the Aorist subj. 129, doubt not, 
James i. 8. 21 61a Udaros 1 Pet. iii. 20. 2 rePeuweNwrat 97, cf. 1 Cor. 
ibis Ah, 23 kparelra it is sustained. 24 Srepéxovtes adtovs elow are 
superior to them. 25 rhy é£odov the end. * refeuediwpéva 266. 7 roy 
Nowy r&v braybyTwr... the stones that go to the building. 28 ol améaro\ot, 


cf. Revelation xxi, 14. 
10——3 


148 APPENDIX II 


col ¥ a~ a Cd a a 4 
Euvres kali Siaxovnoavres dyvas kal cepvas Trois exdEKTOIS TOU O¢od, of pev 
Bxexounpévot, ot S€ ere dvrTes* Kat mavrore Eavtois cvppwvicavtes Kai ev 
c ca ae 2 ” A ZAANA a» 8 A a > a 2 5 i, ~ 
€avtois eipnyny €oxov Kat addAnd@y iKovov: dia TovTO ev TH oikodomy Tov 
mupyov cuppavovow ai dppoyal airav. Of dé €x rod Budod EAxdpuevor kat 
a o Cal > n~ A 
emitibépevor eis THY OlkOdomiY Kal GuppwvovrTes Tals dppoyais ai’Ta@v peta 
a i ge , a + > a (i aes: / iy ? c 
tov érépav Aidav trav {dn @xodounpévav tives cioiv; Odroi eiow ot 
r} 2 a > , ~ , ‘ be et A rib ‘ 
maOdvres evexev TOU dvdpatos Tov Kuplov. Tovs de erépovs iPous rovs 
ta > A oe Cod , Lol , > , ‘ a ‘ 
dhepopévovs amd ths Enpas Oédkw yvavar tives eioiv, Kupia, edn: Tovs 
, Cd , 
pev eis THY oikodopiy bmdyovras Kal  u7 AaTopoupévous, TovTovs 6 Kvpuos 
eSoxipacev, dtu érropevOnaay ev tH evOUTHTe TOD Kuplov Kal karwpOacavto 
\ 2 ‘ > a € Ce td ‘ s > > \ 4 
Tas évroAds aitov. Of dé adydpmevor Kal riOéwevor eis THY oiKodopny Tives 
elciv; Néou elo é€v tH miores kal miotoi. vovOerodvrar 5é bmrd Trav 
dyyédov eis TO dyaboroteiv, Sudte ebpéOn €v avtots movnpia. Ods dé *aré- 
A Vie tea iG 5 pa dee Od ’ > 26 £ , x PN 
BadXov kai epimrovy, tives eioiv; Ovdrot eiow “°nwaptnkores Kat Oé€dovtes 
an a > S a“ tt 
peravonoas did TovTo paxpdv ovx amepidnoay ew tod mupyov, Ste 
G aa 
evxpnorot ecovrat eis THY oikodouny, eav peTavonowaw. oi ody péddovTES 
peravoeiv, eav peravonowory, iaxupol €covta é€v TH wioTer, €av viv pera- 
, > Ld , ry - c o >\ de aN On c > 8 Ll > v3 
vonowow €v @ oikodopeirar 6 mupyos. edv Oé TeAeoOH 7 oixodopn, ovKére 
+ , > > »~ a” , 4 a ~* ‘A fod 
€xovow romov, GAN’ Egovra ExBorot. pdvov dé ToviTo €xovow, mapa TO 
; 
mupy@ Keto Oat. 
N: dé 81 , 4 A c , > A A Ul 
tovs 6€ !xatakomropévous Kal paxpdy pumrtopevouvs dd Tod mupyou 
Oéders yravat; ovroi eiow of viol THs dvopias: émiorevaoay O€ ev Uroxpicet, 
Las} > > cal a 
kal maoa movnpla ovK améarn aw avTav~ 1a TOUTO OvK ExoVTLY GwrTnpiar, 
Ort ovK eloly eVxypnoror eis oikodopny dia Tas movnpias avrav. Sia rovro 
> a 
ouvexdmnoay Kat méppo amepipnoay dia thy dpynv Tov Kupiov, ore mapwp- 
yoav aitév. rovs dé érépous ods Empakas modAods KEtpévous, p7) Umdyovras 
, = ‘ 
eis tiv oikodopny, obror of péev eiywptaxdres eiciv, of Seyvaxdres TH 
A A > , > > . r 
dAndeav, pr émimetvavres d€ €v airy pndé *xodA@pevoe Tois dyios: Sa 
a cA , ? © ny a ‘A wy iz > ‘ is , > 
TovTo axpyortol eiow. Oi d€ rds oxXLopas eyovres Tives cioiv; Odroi eiow 
> , Cal - 
of kar d\Andov ev tais Kapdias Exovtes Kal pa) elpnvevovtes ev EavTots, 
ANG , o él 4 aA er hy Seas INADA td (2 « 
ddA mpdowmoy eipyyns Exovres, dray b€ dm’ ddAjhov dmoxephrwcw, ai 
, > a - , > > 
movnpiat avTav ev Tais Kkapdias eupévovow. avrar ovv ai ox.opai eiow ds 
a € rie € be nN ’ - [eae , \ ‘Y 
éxovow of AiBor. ot dé KexooBwpévor, ovrol elow memioTevKdTes pev Kal 
\ a A * 2 - , Sgro ” ae) 
TO mhelov pépos Exovtes ev TH Stkavogvvy, Tiva S€ pepy Exovow THs dvopias: 
A ~ G lol 
dud rodro F KodoBol Kal odx ddoredeis eioiv, Of dé NevKol Kal orpoyyvAor 
‘ > ‘ co 
kal pn Gppocovres eis Ty oikodopryy tives eloiv, Kupia; droKxpiOeiod por 
29 wh Aaropoupévous that are not cut. 80 dméBaddov Kal éplarrou 89. 


31 karaxorropévous broken in pieces, p. 36, note. 82 KoAN@EvoL TOtS 
aylos 43. 53 kooBol too short. 


APPENDIX II 149 


7. , a > 
Aéyet> “Ews more powpds ef kal dovveros, kal mavra éemepwras kal ovdev 
n m” - A a 
voeis; ovToi ciaw ExovTes pev miotiv, €xovtes dé Kal mAovToY Tod ai@vos 
, g , - A A a > ~ ‘ SS ‘ 
Tourov. drav yevnrat OdiWis, did tov wAodrov aitav Kal dia tras mpay- 
pareias amrapvodvrat Tov Kipiov airav. Kai amoxpidels atti Aéyw* Kupia, 
, > ” ” >? \ ? 5 , y f 34 ~ 
more ovv eypnoTo EcovTat eis THY oikodounyv; “Orav, dyoiv, *4mepixomy 
= a a 4 a a 
aitév 6 mottos *6 Wuyaywyay avrovs, Tore evypnaToe EvovTa TO Cea. 
a 7 ce rié c DN PRY \ co ieee in > > a 
Gotep yap 6 dios 6 otpoyyvAos eay pn) weptkoT7 Kal amoBadn e& avTod TL, 
¢ a - 
ov dvvara Terpdywvos yevérOat, ovTw Kal of mAovTodvTes ev TOUTM TO 
IA 2X A om > a < ed > , Led , * 
aidvi, €av un mEptKoT] aiTav 6 mAovTos, ov SvvavTaiT@ Kupio evxpnorot 
> a ~ ~ oa > , wy ~ 
yevérOa. ard ceavrod mpdrov yabt: Gre émdovrets, Aypnaros Hs* viv 
dé eVxpnoros ei Kai aPéru n Con. ev t yiveoOe TO Oew@* Kal ya 
Seu x Py t Kal @MEAMMOS TH C@Nn. EeVXPHOTOL yiveT @ Ocw* Kal yap 
‘ > A a > col ~ 
av aitos ®ypaoa ex Tav aitav Aidov. 
‘ ‘ ee 2 , a A A > A a i ry , 
Tods dé érépous AiGous, ods cides paxpdy dm Tod mupyou pirTopéevous 
kal mimtovtas eis Tv 6ddv Kal KUALoMEévoUS eK THS dOOd eis Tas avodias: 
- , >? c , , > A ‘ ko] , “3 ont 37 > , 
ovrot eiow of mwemiotevKkores pév, amd Oe ths Sipvyxlas aitrov * adiovow 
Thy 6ddv at’Tdv tiv adnOiwnv: Soxodytes otv BeAriova dddv Sivacba 
evpely, wAav@vTat Kal TadatTwpodowy: mepimatodvTes ev Tails avodials. oi 
~ r > 
b€ mimtovtes eis TO UP Kal Kaidmevot, OvTOL eioty Ot els TeAOS AToaTAaYTES 
Tov Qeov Tov CGvTos, Kat ovKére avTois avéBn emt THY Kapdiav TOU peravonaaL 
NS a A ~ 2 
Oia Tas émOupias Tis agedyelas aitayv Kal Tov Twovnpiav dv cipydoavTo. 
tovs O€ érépous ro’s mimtovras eyyis tov vddrov kal pr Suvapévous 
fod > A LA s ~ , ° , D4 f b c ‘ / 
Kudio Onvat eis TO VOwp Gees yyavar tives ciciv; ovTol eiow of Tov Adyov 
> co ‘ s ee rd 1 + ~ , a. oa 
axovoavtes Kal Oédovres Barrio Onva: eis TO Gvopfa TOU Kupiov: eira dray 
ee, a > Ay 
avrois €AOn cis pvelay 4 dyvorns THs aAnGeias, peravoovory, Kal mopevovrat 
maw orice tov emOupiav avtav T&v Tmovnpav. érédecev ovv THY 
eEnynow tod mipyov. %dvadevoduevos Ett aitiy emnpatnoa, ei apa 
A AY 
mavres of AiOor odrot of amoBeBAnpEevor Kal pr) Gppocovtes eis THY oiKkodopny 
a” » ca ¢ 
Tov mupyov, ef CoTw avrois peTdvota Kal Exovowv Tdmov eis Tov mipyor 
s a i 
rovrov. “Exovow, pyoiv, perdvorav, Gdda eis rovTov Tov mupyov ov Svvav- 
» Aa 
Tat dppooa. érépm d€ rom@ dppdcovow Todd eAdTTOVL, Kal ToUTO Gray 
-~ fe € A -~ > col 
BacavicOGow Kali éxmAnpoocwow Tas nuepas TOV dyapti@v avToy. kal 
~ A cr ~ 
dua rovto perareOnoovra, Ste peréAaBov Tov pnuatos Tov Otkaiov. Kal 
ca a cal cal > lel 
rére avrois oupBnoerat petareOnva éxk Tov Bagdvey aitay, eav avaB7 emt 
, col lod > 
Thy Kapdiay airy ta epya & eipydoavTo movnpd. eav O€ py avaBy emi thy 
KapOlav avtay, ov ca fovrar dia THY oKAnpoKapdiay aiTav. 
34 qepixomy ab’ray 6 mAovTos when their wealth shall be cut off, 209. 
3 6 Wuxaywyay that leads away their souls, 86 ypaca thou art taken. 


37 ddluvaw they abandon. 38 oy 63. 39 avatdevoduevos being still 
importunate. © perareOjoovTa they shall be changed. 


150 APPENDIX II 


A SELECTION FROM THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO PETER, 


This was discovered in a cemetery in Egypt in 1886. It is of a 
docetic character. The fragment begins with the account of Pilate 
washing his hands, and ends before the appearances after the resurrec- 
tion. The text is reproduced here by kind permission of Dr Robinson, 
Dean of Wells, from his edition published in 1892. 


; , 

of Oe AaBovtes Tov Kupiov @Oovv avrov tpéxovres kal Eheyov 1 Supapev 
Tov vidv tod Oeod eLovoiav 2aiTod exovtes* Kal moppvpav 2aivTov mepié- 
Baddov, Kai éxaOicay aitov emi Kadédpav Kpicews éyovTes Atkaiws Kpive, 

a a 3 / , a. a > ‘ a > lA ~ 
Bacwred Tod "Iopand. Kai Tis adtdv eveykav orépavoyv akdvO.vov EOnKev 
a co col ~ va a al lj 
éml THs KeaAjs Tod Kupiov. Kal érepou oT res evémrvov avtov tais byect 
kal G@Adot Tas tovayovas ai’rod Sépamiray’ Erepor Kadduw Sévvocoy avrov: 
> ie Dae os = 
kal tives avrov TéuaortiCov Aéyovtes Tavty TH Tiny Tipnow@pey Tov vidv Tov 
Oeod. Kal ijveyxoy dvo Kakovpyous Kal éoravpacay ava pécov at’Tav Tov 
Kvpiov. avrds dé eo1wma ws pndey movov éxav®. kal ére dpOwacav rov 
\ > a a S > © \ a > “ ‘) , 

otavupov eméypavrav ore Odrds eotiv 6 Bacideds Tov "Iopand. eis O€ Tis 
TOY Kakovpyov exeivov a@veidicev avitTovs Aéyov “Hyeis did Ta kaka G 
errouoapev ota mer dvOanev* odTos b€ TaTHp yevopnevos TaV avOparav Ti 
> . i , 
nodiknoev bpas; Kai dyavakrncartes em’ ait@ éxédevoay Piva 1 yy oKeoKo- 
7767, U6mras Bacavicopevos amodavo. iv dé 2peonuBpia, kal oxdros 

, a A > re) la - \ 20 - 13 Ul Yt ” > \ 
katéoxe wacav THY lovdaiav’ Kai €GopvBovvro  unsrore 6 HALos edve, €meLdy 
ere e(n* Kai Tis avtay eimev Iloricare aivtov yoAny pera O€ous: Kal Kepd- 

> a ae be > , , € , , € J. , 
gavres emotiaav. kal 6 Kuptos aveBdnoe Aéyav “H Suvapis pov, 7 dvvapis 
ON t ‘ > N > p \ B 2 a \. 14.7 

prov kareAenpas pe. kal elroy avednpdn. kal tore awéomacay rovs 47} Aous 
amo TOV xEL—pv Tov Kupiov, Kai €Onkav aitov emi THs yns* Kal 7 yn Taca 
eceioOn, Kai PoBos péyas eyévero. rote Atos Edapwe Kai evpeOn dpa 
> , e > , de c “le 8 ~ ‘ 15§ § , Lod ik \ \\ La > a 
evatn* exapnoav O€ of ‘lovdaiol, kal Pdedakact TH “loonh 7d copa adrod 
o > A é , 3 67 16 6 7 > ef > 6 ‘ >? , 
iva avro Ody, emerdn 18 Oeacduevos nv 60a ayada eroinoey. 

1 ctpwmev 119. 2 avrod 28. 3 airév 19. 4 ovaydvas cheeks. 
5 épamicay struck. 8 &yvocov pricked. 7 éuaorifov beat. 8 auvros... 


éxwv: this passage shows that this Gospel was written in the interest of 
those Gnostics who taught that our Lord was a man only in appearance, 


and never really suffered anything. 9 wa 189. 10 un oKehokomnOn 
that his legs should not be broken. 11 Grws...dmobdvor that he might die 
in torment, 184. 12 neonuBpla noon. 13 unmore...édve lest the sun 
had set, 193. 14 ous nails. 15 Gedwxacr 96. 16 Geagapevos nv: 


this is a curious periphrastic tense made up of the aorist part. and the 
imperf. of civa:: translate had seen, 114. 


APPENDIX II 151 


‘ x A , 
AaBav dé rov Kupiov Edovoe kai Meihnoe owvddvi cai elojyayev eis 
mm a 
iiov ragov, xadovpevor xijrov “lwond. 
auvaxdévres dé of ypapmareis kai Sapioaior cai mpecBvrepa mpds 
a\AnAv > , a - Xr \ ag , \ , \ , 
ndous, akoveavtes Ste 6 Aads Gras yoyyvfer kal Komrerar Ta orHOn 
, oe - ~ ~ , ° , » 
A€yovTes Ort Ei r@ Oavatrw avrod ravra ra péyiota onpeia yéyovev, 1idere 
oe , 8 , > e > nO c fos , \ kg \ * 
ore mogov Sikaids eotiv* ehoBnOnoav ot mpecBuvrepor kal 7AGov mpos Tov 
TlesAGrov Sedpevor avrod xai éyovtes Tapddos npiv otpariwras, iva 
gvdrakoot 7d Yyvi UTOU emt TpeEis Tpe, j INCL i padnrat 
Hvjpa avTov emt Tpeis nuéepas, pyjmore eAOdvTes of paOnrai 
avrov khéYroow aitdv, Kai UmoAd8y 6 Aads Ort ex vEeKp@v dvéaTn, Kal 
TOMT@TW Huy Kaka. 
© NY ra ran) > ”~ 2 A , A a 
6 d€ Hetharos eOwxev avrois Ierpaviov tov Kevtupiova peta orpariwrav 
0 DY ‘ \ ‘ . ‘ \ > ~ 5X6 , ‘ = 
vAdooew Tov Tagov’ Kai adv adtois FAPov mpecBirepor Kal ypappareis 
emt TO pyjpa, Kai *kudicavres NiOov péyay pera Tod KevTupl@vos Kal TOY 
OTpaTL@TOv Guot mavres ot dvres exer EOnKav eri tH Ovpa Tov pynpaTos’ Kal 
2 eméxpioav Extra ohpayidas, kal Boxnvay éxet wyEavtes epidakav. 
* ’ ~ > 
mpotas O€ emupaoKovtos Tov caBBarov AAdev ByAOsS amd “IepovcaAnp 
s 5 : A 
kal THs meptya@pov, wa wot TO prnpciov eoppayiopévov: rH dé vuKri 47 
erépookey 7 Kupiakn, PuvAacoovTay Tov oTpatiaTav ava dvo dvo Kara 
povpav, peyadn pavn eyévero év TH ovpava, kal eidov avoryOévras Tovs 
ovupavovs kai Ovo avdpas xarehOdvras exeiOe, modd déyyos exovTas, Kal 
~ lal col , 
emiatdavras TS Tape: 6 Sé AiBos exeivos 6 BeBrnpévos eri tH Oipa ap’ 
lol , , > 
éavtod KvAioGeis emexapnoe mapa pépos: kat 6 radhos nvolyn, Kal 
auorepor of veaviokot eiondOov. 
an ~ , 
iddvres ov of oTpaTi@rat exeivor eEvmvicay Tov KevTUpi@va Kal Tovs 
mpecBurépous* mapnoav yap kal avrot pvAdcoortes. 
~ > - A 
kat eEnyoupéver adtav a eidov, radu dpdow e€ehOdvtas ard rod radov 
Cag a» 8 ‘ \ 8 ao ¥ o 27 a 6 a \ ry) A > rv 6 i. 
Tpeis avdpas, Kal rovs Ovo rov eva™ UropOovvras, Kal oravpdov dxodovbovyTa 
avrois: Kai Trav pév Ovo Ty Keadry xwpovoay péxpt TOD odpavod, Tod dé 
ta a , - 
8 vepaywyoupnévov Um adtdav tmepBaivovoay rovs ovpavovs: Kal avis 
A 2 , , rn , AU €: ‘ 
ifkovov €k Tav ovpavav heyovons Exnpvgas Tois Koywpevois; Kat VaKon 
A a“ , > , o~ 
HKovETO aro Tov aravpod %ért Nai. “GuverKxémrovto otv ahAndous exeivor 


W eidyoe cwddue wrapped him in linen. 18 jSere...dikatos éoTw see how 
righteous he was. 19 uyjua tomb. 20 pdudrdooew 138. 21 Ky\l- 
cates rolling. 2 éréxpicay éexta oppayidas they stamped seven seals, 
23 oxnviy whcavtes pitching a tent. 24 érépwoKev 7 Kuptaky on which 
the Lord’s day was dawning. 25 dvd dvo dvo two by two, 26 rapa 
wépos on one side. 27 S7opOotvras supporting. For the construction of 
the whole passage see 140. 8 ye.paywyoupuevou of the one led by the 
hand. 29 ru 158. 30 guveckémtovTo they were consulting 


together. 


152 APPENDIX Il 


- ~ -~ » , e ~ 
dredOeciv kai éupavioa tadra To Metkdr@. kai ére *!Scavooupévav aitav 
> \ 
gaivovra madi avoiybévres of ovpavoi, kal dvOpamds tis KateOwv eis TO 
pvipa. 
fea! > , c ‘ A , \ + A ~ 
ravra iddvres of wept TOY KevTUpl@va vUKTOS eEoTmevoay mpos IleAGTor, 
> , \ / a Ee tA A 2 t fi oe - 
apévres tov trahov bv epvAacoov: kal éfnynoavto mavta dep eidor, 
4 ~ > a 
Zayovidvtes peyddws Kal déyovtes *"AAnOGs vids Hv Oeov. amoxpiOeis 6 
° yy a a ~ ~ ~ ~ cr a 
TleAaros épy “Eya kadapev Tov aiparos Tov viod Tov Geod: tpyiv dé ®radra 
edogev. eira mpooedOdvtes mavtes ed€ovTO avTOU Kal TapeKdAovy KeAeVTaL TO 
kevTuplave kal Tois oTparioras pndev eimrety Geidov. Suppéeper yap, paciv, 
npiv 4opdjoa peylotny duapriav éumpoobev Tod Geov, Kal put) Eumeceiy eis 
- a ~ an 2 8 ‘ ‘ Xr 67 > aN > ix jen a 
xeipas Tov Aaod Trav "Iovdaiwy Kat AiacOjva. ekéAevoev ody 6 IletGros TS 
kevTupiove kal Tols oTpati@rais pndev eimeiv. 
31 Siavooupevay while they were thinking thereon. 32 d-ywriGvres 


being distressed. 33 raitra édotev this seemed good. 34 6o\foa 
to incur. 


APPENDIX II 153 


THE CHRISTIANS IN THE WORLD, BY AN UNKNOWN 
AUTHOR, PROBABLY OF THE SECOND CENTURY. 


\ N »” - ~ * 
Xpioriavol yap ovre yj ovre havy ovre eeor 'diaxexpipévor trav 
a“ ‘ae > ~ 
Aouray ciciv avOporerv. ovte ydp mov wéres idias Karocxovow ovre 
, x A 
2Stadéxtr@ tivl mapnAaypévy ypOvra ore Bio 3 rapdonpoy daoKovot. 
> ‘ > , . A , 
ov py emwoig roi cal ppovrid: *rokumpaypdvev dvOpareav paénpa 
a ta > iN © , 2QN - 
TolovT avTois eotiv evpnuévov, ovdé Sdyparos avOpwmivev Smpoecracw 
domep eviot. Karotkovytes b€ modes “EAAnvidas te Kai BapBdpovs os 
o > x U 6 ‘ 6 Los} > / 26. > r 6 a »~ > od 
€xagtos exAnpadn, kai ®rois eyywpio eOecw axodovOovvTes ev te eoOAri 
kal Ovairy kal T@ oir@ Bio, Gavpactyy Kat dpodroyoupévas rapddok& 
oe 7] “at t Ps Paar poAoyoupev@s mapadogov 
is ”~ ¢ col , , ~ 
evdeixvuvtat THY KaTdoTacLW THs éavT@v modTelas. marpidas oiKodow 
Paes > > < yf v4 , c - ‘ 4 > iz 
idias, aAN’ ws mdpoixor- petéxovot mdvT@v ws moXirat, kal wavO bo- 
pévovow ws Edvors maca Eén rwarpis eat aitay, kai maca marpis Eévn. 
yapovow a@s mavtes, Texvoyovovow: ddd’ ov pimtovat Ta yevvapeva. 
tTpameCav kowiy mapariGevta, add’ ov KowTHy. é€v capi Tvyxavovaty, 
>? > > A , a” > \ od , > 25 > a ig 
GN’ ob kara cdpka (Gow. emi ys diarpiBovow, add’ év oipay@ modurev- 
ovtat. meiGovra Tois @piopévots vopors, Kal Tots idiots Biows vikdou Tovs 
vopous. ayarGot mavras, kal td mavt@v Si@kovrat. dyvoodvrat, Kal 
katakpivovrat: Oavatotvta, kal (womo.wvyTat. mTwxevovact, Kal mdovuTi- 
Covet modXovs: mavT@v totepovvTal, Kal ev maou mepiccevovow. att- 
povvrat, kal ev tats atipias Sogafovra- BrAacdnpovvrat, xat dukacovvra.. 
Aowopodvrat, Kal evdoyovow: LBpiCovra, Kai TipGow. ayaborowdyTes 
c ve 
@s Kakot KoAd(ovrat: Kodaopevor xaipovow ws (woroovpevot. rd 
"lovdatwv ws dAAdpvAct modepotvTa Kai bd “EAAnvav dwxovra, kal 
thy aitiav tis €xOpas eimeiy of picodvTes ovK ExovTw. 
dmdas & cimeiv, rep éotlv é€v capate uy, Tor eioly &v Kdop@ 
~ a cal c 
Xpioriavoi. éomaprat kata wayTav Tdv Tov Gapatos pehGv 7) Wuyn, Kal 
Xpistiavol Kara Tas Tov Kécpou modes. oiKEl pev ev TH TopaTe Yoxn, 
-~ ¢ > col 
ovk gore O€ Ex TOU TaHparos: Kal Xptotiavol ev KdoTp@ OiKOvTW, OvK eiol 
5é ek Tov Kocpov. adparos 7 uxy ev Opat@ ppoupeirat TO Gopare: Kal 
, 2 ~ > ‘A “~ 
Xpurriavol ywaoKxovra pev dvtes ev TH Koop@, adparos d€ aitdy 7 
h a \ - ie, a) 
OcooéBera péver. pucel ty uxny 7 cap§ Kai modepet pndev adixoupévn, 
x a a Fa ‘ \ 
dudre 2rais Hdovais kaveTat xpjoOat* picet Kali Xprotiavovs 6 Kdapos pndey 


1 Giaxexpyuévoe eloly are distinguished. ® duaréxry wapydraypuery a 
different dialect; this is the object of xpdvra: which is followed by a dative 
case. 3 rapdonuov extraordinary. 4 rodvrpayubvev ingenious. 


5 mpoecraow Qnd Perf. from mpolornuc are they masters of. 8 roils eyxwpiows 


éfeo., for case see 43. 


154 APPENDIX IL 


cl -~ 3 , € 4A ‘ ~ > bo} 
adixotpevos, drt rais jSovais dvrirdocovra. 1 uxy THY pLoovoay ayaTa 
~ a > , 
odpka kal ra péAn* Kal Xptotiavol rods pucovyTas ayaraow. Téyxéxetorat 
Be rm ‘ 
uév 4 ux? TO copart, cuvéxer O€ ait? Td TGpa* Kal Xprotavol kaTéxovTat 
a fol A \ A , > , € 
pev as év ppouvpa TO kdopg, adroi dé auvéxovor Tov KdcpOY. addvaros 7 
if s apenas 
ux év Ovyte oxnvepare Karotkel* Kai Xpiotiavol mapotovow ev @ap- 
5 a , cans 
rois, THY €v ovpavois apOapoiay mpoadexdpevot. Kakoupyoupevn oLTLoLs 
cal a , > € 
kal worois 4 Wuyy Bedriodrat: Kal Xproriavol cohadpevor Kad” npepav 
~ - » , a > 
mAeovdtovot paddov. els TooavTny avtovs rakiv Eedero 6 Oeds, Ty ov 
- , 
Oemirdy avrois mapatnoac Oat. 
> \ peel © + AA a 3 > - 666 Doe 6 \ 
ov yap émiyeov, as &pnv, evpnua Todt’ avtois mapedoOn, ovde Ovythy 
2 , , A > Lol > A@ vde > 6 th 8 = , 
érivotav puddocew ovtas afiotowy eripedas, ovd€ dvOpwrivav Soixovopiay 
pvotnpioy memiotevytat. aN airds adnOds 6 mavtoxpdtwp Kal mayto- 
, Nee one: , > Eas > a \ iAnd ‘\ \ NG 
ktioTns Kal adpatos Oeds, a’ros am’ oipavGv tHYv adnOecav Kat Tov Adyov 
, ca 
rov aywov Kai %drepwdnrov dvOpamous evidpyce Kal éyxareotnpige Tais 
kapdiais ait@v, ov Kadawep ty Tis eixdoeev GvOpwros, Umnpérny Twa 
, a w+ x aa 10 = 8 , bY Rien, »” 
mépyas 7) yyeAov 7) apxovra H twa Mrdv duemdvT@y Ta émiyera } Tia 
- oa tA > 
Tov Umemiorevpévav Tas év ovpavois Siorxnoets, AAN adrov Tov TexviTny 
‘ \ ~ oe Ce ‘ > A ”* a \ / 7 
kal Snutovpydv Tov Odor, @ Tos ovpavodrs Exticev, O THY Oddaccayv idiots 
e , . cal 
dpos evéxdevwev, Mod ra pvornpia mioTds wavta pvddooe: Ta oToOLXELa, 
, cal fod € 
map ov Ta pérpa Tv THs nuépas Spdpav Aros eiAnhe Pvrdocev, o 
a , \ , , @ a SY wed Chee 
meOapxet oehnvn vuxtt paivew KehevovTl, & mweOapxel Ta doTpa TO THs 
/ > a ’ i] 
cednvns akxodovdodyvta Spdum, & mavta diaréraxtar cal Sidpiotar Kal 
G D > \ \ Vang) > - a \ \ a cs 
UmOTETAKTaL, OUpavol Kai Ta Ev OUpavois, yn Kal Ta ev TH yn, Oddacca Kal 
A > a 6 r , “ 27 JA A ? 4 LY > , A > fn 
Ta €v Ty Oadaoon, TUp, anp, GBvocos, Ta ev trpeor, Ta ev Baber, TA ev TO 
peragv* rovrov mpos avto’s améoteev, dpa ye, as avOporav dv ts 
r > S ¢ 
Aoyivaito, emt rupavvids kal PdB@ Kal KaramAnker; odpevodv: GAN’ ev 
> sot oh « rv \ i ey s »” © Ni 
emlewela mpavTnte ws Bagwre’s méurr@v vidv Baciéa ereper, ds Oedy 
+ pe < A > fal Ul a” < , a < / 
emeupev, ws mpos avOpwmous emeuer, os calwv érepev, os reiOwr, 
= , / \ > fod cod yy n 
ov Piatdpevoss Bia yap ob mpdceoti TS OcG. Creuev ds Kardv, ov 
0 4 c > a p 
Sidkov: Emeupev ws dyamGv, od Kpivav. meu er yap adrov xpivovta, 
kal ris avtov THY mapovoiay UmoaTHoETal; 


7 éyxéxNevorat Perf. pass. from éyxdelw. 
dmepwoyrov that surpasses the wit of man. 0 rov dverdvrwv of those 
that direct.... U remoreupevav...dtorxnoers 20. 


h teri Ul the el ‘aithfull fie nee 
whose mysteries all the elements faithfully observe, 13 Bia ydp for force 
is no attribute of God, a ncced 


; 8 olxovoulay memlorevyrat 20. 


APPENDIX II 155 


THE MARTYRDOM OF IGNATIUS BISHOP OF ANTIOCH. 


The Acts from which this selection is adapted are not strictly 
historical, but are probably based on a sound tradition. 

Trajan was apparently not in Antioch at the time at which the 
trial of Ignatius before him is placed by the writer, and, if Ignatius had 
been tried by him, it is not likely that he would have written to the 
Romans asking them not to intercede for him that his sentence might 
be commuted, because there would have been no appeal from the 
sentence of the Emperor. 

The tendency to bring together celebrated persons living at the 
same era is common to all writers of historical romances. 

What is certain in the story is that Ignatius was Bishop of Antioch 
and that he suffered martyrdom in Rome by being thrown to the beasts 
about 107 a.p. 


» A a 
Aptt Seapévov tiv “Papatwvy dpxnv Tpaavod, “Iyvdrtios, 6 rod 
> , 2 , r) , eK > , 1> , \ > , 
droortodov lwavvov pabyntns, avnp amoaroALKds, léxuBépva ty éxKAnolav 
*Avtioxéwy emiped@s. *Awpyoavtos odv.mpos ddrlyov Tod Swwypod, nvdpal- 
\ CN a a > , > , 44 \ bY i! \ ¢ 
vero prev %ert TH THS EKKANTias agadevTa, *ijoxadAev Oe Kad EavTov ws 
4 A 67 ° A > a > td \ bo i, ~ 
pyre ths Sdvtas eis Xpiorov ayarns ehawapevos, pnd THs Tedelas Tov 
padntrod rd€ews. verdes yap thy Sia paprupiov yevopévny 6podoyiav 
8eloy a’tov mpocoxetcovcav T@ Kupio. Oey Téreaw oddiyots ere mapa- 
’ Lod > , \ 8 4 , , A iz , , , 
péveav TH exkAnoia Kat §vxvov Oikny Geixou Tv Exdatov Patifwr dudvowav 
Oia THS TOV Geiwv ypapdv eEnynoews, ervyyavev *t@v Kar evxny. 6 peV 
ov Tpaiavos évvdr@ eres THs avTov Baowdeias, emapOeis emi TH vixn TH, 
Kara SKvdGv Kail Aaxdv, KatnvdyKkafev mavtas rovs evoceBds Cvras 
} Ovew 7 Tedevrav, 6 O€ “Iyvdrios rote, PoByels Umep ths *AvtTioxéwv 
éxkAnolas, éxovoiws iyyero mpds Tpacavov didyovta pev Kat’ éxeivoyv Tov 
Katpoy Kata Thy “Avridxeav. as d€ Kara mpdcwmov airod earn, elmev 
ait@ 6 Bacireds Tis ei, Kaxodaipoy, tas huerépas omovddtav trep- 
Baivew, cat érépous avareiOev iva kax@s adrodovvTat; 

‘1 éxvBépva was guiding. 2 Awdjcavros growing milder. 3 él Ta THs 
éxkAnolas acahetry at the tranquillity of the church. 4 Hoxaddev he was 
grieved, © dyTws real. 8 qetov avtov mpocotKetodoay would rather con- 
summate his union with.... 7 érecw odtyos dat. of duration of time, cf. 
Jn. ii. 20. 8 Nvxvou dixny Gelkov like a divine light. 9 ray Kar’ edxny 
his desire. 10 kaxodatuov, this is difficult to translate so as to keep up the 
play on the word in the reply of Ignatius. It properly means possessed 


with an evil genius, poor wretch. Ignatius uses it as if it meant first possessed 
by an evil spirit, and secondly grievous to, or potent against evil spirits. 


156 APPENDIX II 


6 88 "Iyvdrus etrev Oidels UOcopspov dmoKaNei kaxodaipova, apeatn- 
kaot yap ard trav Sovdwv Tod Oeod Ta Saypdvia. ei S€ dre TovTos émaxAys 
eiut, kal Kakdv pe mpos Tovs Saipovas dmoxaheis, cuvopohoy®. Xpiorov 
yap txov érovpdviov Bacidéa, Tas ToUT@Y KaTahv@ émiBovdds. 

Tpatavos eirev: Kal ris €ort Oeopdpos; “lyvarios amexpivaro: ‘O Xpiorov 
éyov év orépvois. Tpaavos eimev+ “Hpets ody cor dokotpev Kata vovy pn 
éyew Oeovs, ois Kai xpaueOa cuppdxors mpds Tovs moAepious; “Iyvdruos 
eimev+ Td Sapdvia rev Over Ocovs mpocayopevers * rravapevos. eis yap 
éort Geds 6 roujoas Tov ovpavoy Kal ynv Kal Thy Oddacoar, Kai mavTa Ta 
év avrois, Kal eis Xpiorés “Incods 6 vids Tod Oeod 6 povoyerns, ov THs 
Baorreias 2 dvaiuny. Tpaavds eimev> Tov oravpodévra héyets emt Tovtiov 
TAdrov; “Iyvaris etrev? Tov dvacravpacavra thy euny Guaptiay pera Tov 
ravTyns evperod, kal macav Bearadicdcavta Saipovixjy wAdvqy Kal Kakiav 
bird Tovs wédas Tv aitov ev Kapdia hopovvtay. Tpaiavos cimev- Sd odv 
év éavtd épers tov oravpwbévta; “Iyvadrws eimev> Nai: yéypamrat yap: 
€vorknow €v avtois Kat éumepirarnow. Tpaavos amepnvaro- “Lyvariov 
mpocerd&apev Tov ev EauT@ éyovta mepipépe Tov eoravpwpevoy, Séopu0v 
tiwd oTpati@ray yevopevov, dyérOa mapa Thy peyddAnv ‘Popny Bpdma 
yevnodpevoy Onpiay eis répyrw rod Snyov. tavrns 6 dyws paprus éma- 
kovoas THS admopdaews peta xapas eBdonoev> Evyapiotw cot, Séomora, 6re 
pe Tedela TH mpds oe dydry Tywjoa KaTnElwoas, TO drogTOAM Gov IlavAw 
décpors cuvdnoas ordnpois. Tadra cira@y, Kal per edvhpoovyns mepibéwevos 
ra déopa, mpooevéduevos mporepov Urep THs exkAnolas, Kal tadtyv } rapa- 
Oépevos pera Saxpvov To Kupio, domep ’xpis émionuos dyéAns kaAjs 
jyobpevos, Mime Onpidovs otpariwrixys Sewdrnros cvvnpragero, Onpiows 
aipoBdpos emt tv “Poyny amaxOnodpuevos Srpds Bopdv. otras mpds thy 
‘Popny adikopevos Spos mapa TO vag mapeBANOn, Sore Tov dyiov pdprupos 
Lyvariov mdnpotoba thy émOupiay Kara Td yeypappevov> erOupia dixatov 
Sexrn: iva pydevi rav adeApdy MeraxOys did THs gvAAOYAs TOD 20 Newrdvou 
yéevynrat, kabas ev TH emiaToAR THv idiay émeOiper yevéer Oat TedEiwowv. pova 
yap ta *rpaxitepa Tov dyiov adrod enpavav mepieheihOn, Grwa eis THY 
"Avridxerav amekouicOn, kai ev iv@ xatéOn, Onoavpds ariuos bird rhs év 


11 Geopdpov the God-bearer, this was a name given to Ignatius in the 
Church. 12 ravipevos in error; dvalunv may I be partaker. 13 kara- 
ducdoavra condemn. 14 drephvaro pronounced sentence. 15 rapabeuevos 
...7@ Kuply committing it to the Lord. 16 xpios érlonuos a distinguished 
ram. 1 $id Onpusdous orpariwrixhs Sewdrnros by the ferocious violence of 
the soldiers, 18 arpos Bopay to feed blood-devouring beasts. 19 eraxOis 
burdensome. 2 NewWavou of his remains. l rpaxurepa the harder parts. 


APPENDIX II 157 


T® paptrupt xadpiros tH dyla exxAnola KxatadeipOevra. To'twv adirémrat 
‘ \ 4 >? rg 

yevopevor, peta Saxkpv@v Kar’ oikdy Te mavvuxicavres, Kai moAAG pera 

22 , \ , , \ ¢ 2: , 
yovurhioias ral dejqoeas mapakadéaoarvtes tov Kipiov *adnpopdpnoat 

il en ee ; 

Tovs doGeveis uas emi rois mpoyeydvoow, pixpdv apumveaartes, of pev 
> , > ‘ ‘\ pa! r 

eEaigyns éeriotavra cal *repirtvccdpevov tuas éBdémopev, of 8é mad 

, c ‘ € “~ 

MT POTEVXOpEVvoy UEP Nua@v TOY paKkdploy “lyvatiov, GAdor Sé *®oratdpevov 

© > c bed « > ~ ’ - Sad 

tp’ patos ws ex Kaudrou moddod mapayevopevoy, Kal mapeordra TO 

, x - - a 

Kupig. pera woddns toivuy xapas ravra iddvtes Kal cupBaddvres Tas 

a ~ > , ’ ~ nn a 

ders TOV dveipdrav, tuvncavtes Tov Oedv Tov SoTipa Tav ayabayv, Kai 

’ oY c ‘ , 

Paxapioavtes Tov aytov, epavepooapuer tpiv Kal THY Huépav Kal Tov xpdvoY, 

7 . 3 : B 2 ee: 

wa KaTa Kalpoy Tov paprupiov cuvaydpevor KOLW@YGpEV T@ GOANTH kat 

/ a a 
yevvai@ pdaprupt Xpiorod, karamarnoayt. Tov didBodov, Kai Tov THs udo- 
-“ > , , / > a 3 “a na , € cat 

Xpiorov emiOupias rehedoavre Spdpov év Xpioto “Inaov tO Kupio npar, 
Die ee \ > 2 a mete , \ \ , \ Gx ite of ’ > 

du’ ob Kai pe ob TH marpiny Sdéa kal rd Kpdros civ TH dyio mvevpart eis 

al@vas. 


2 vovuxdiclas with bending of the knee. °3 rdnpopopyoat, Lk, i. 1. 
24 trepimTucdOmevoy embracing. 2% grafduevov bp liparos dripping with 
sweat. 


THE MARTYRDOM OF CARPUS. 


This passage is adapted from the Proconsular Acts of the martyr- 
dom of Carpus, Papylus and Agathonice who were put to death in 
Asia either in the persecution of Marcus Aurelius or in that of Decius. 


évOnpovvtos tod dvOumdrov év Iepyau@ mpoonxOn ait@ 6 pakapios 
Kdpmos, paptus tov Xpiotov. 6 b€ avOvraros !rpoxabicas ey Tis Kary; 
6 O€ pedkapwos py: TO mparov xai eEairepov Gvoua Xpsotiaves, ei d€ 76 ev 
TO Koop Cyreis, Kdpros. 6 avOdimaros elnevs 2"Eyvaoral cor mavT@s 
Ta mpooTdypata Tov Avyovotav *mepi Tov deiv ipas oéBew rods Oeovs 
Tovs Ta ravra SwotKodvtas> Obey cupBovrev@ cor mpocedGey Kal Odoat. 

Kdpmos eirev> "Eya Xproriavds eit, Xproroy rov vidy Tov Oeod oéBopar, 
rov €dOdvra ev borépois Kaipois Emi gwoTnpia Huey Kal putdpevoy nyas *rhs 


1 rpoxabioas having taken his seat. 2 &yvworat 10. 3 epi Tov 
deiy 173. 4 ris whavys 84 (5). 


158 APPENDIX II 


mAdyns Tod StaBdrov, Torovrors b€ eidwAows ov Oa. sroier 6 Oédes+ Ewe yap 
ddvvarov Pica °KiBdnros pdopaci Sapdvev-+ oi yap Tovtois Ovovres 
Spowor adrois ciow. 6 d€ avOiraros Oupwbels epn+ Ovoare Tois Oeois Kal pi) 
popaivere, 6 Kdpros eimev: Oi (dvres Trois vexpois ov Ovovow. 6 avOv- 
maros eimrevs Oi Geol Soxodcivy aor vexpoi eivat; Kdpros cimev> Gédeus 
dxovoa; ovrot ovre GvOpwmor dvtes more eCnoay “iva Kal dmoOdvwar Oéhets 
dé padeiv dre ddnbés eore rodT0; dpov Tiv TYsny cov am’ airdy jy Soxeis 
mpoohéperv avrois, kal yv@on ore ovdéy ciow VAN ys dmdpxovta Kai TO- 
xpsvm POetpopéva, 6 yap Oeds nuav axpovos dv Kal rods aidvas roumoas, 
aités GpOapros cal aivios Siapéver, 6 airos det Ov, pyre avEnow pyre 
pelwow emidexopevos* ovrot d€ Kal yiyvovra td avOparey kai Pbeipovrat, 
as env, rd Tov ypdvov. 

To d€ Typyopevey Kal araray adrovs py) Oavpdons: 6 yap didBodos ar’ 
apxis meray éx ths evddEov avrod ragews, oikeia poxOnpia tiv mpos Tov 
avOpwmov Oeod Soropyiv mwodéper Kai Kararie(opevos rd Tav dyer, 
TovTos dvtaywvitera. Kal mpoxaracKevdter modépous Kal ®mpodkapBavev 
dmayyéret Tois dio. dpolws Kal €k Tov Ka@ juepav juiv cuvpBawdvror, 
dpxaidrepos dv 7G xpdve, Mdromepdoas Ta cuvpBynodpeva mpohéyer, dep 
avros péANet Kakorrolety. 

éxer yap ex THs Mdmroddoews Tod Geod rHv adsixiav Kai rd cidéva, Kal 
kata ovyxopnow Oeot meipdfer tov dvOpwmorv, (nrav mravijoa |Mris 
evoeBelas. meioOnre ovy pot Ore ev paraidrnTi ore Ov puiKpa. 

6 avOvmaros eimev: Ilo\da edoas oe ddvapqoa eis Bracdypiav 
Pyayov oe Tov Gedy Kai tov SeBactav: iva ovy pur) emi wreidv co rpw@xXopHon, 
Aves, i) Ti éyers; _Kdpros eimev: ’Advvaroy drt Ovo, ov yap mwmore COvea 
eld@dos. edvOds ody Exédevoey adrov Kpepacdévra BE<ecOa. 6 dé Expatev: 


13 


Xptoriavds cit. emt modd S€ Eeduevos Exauvev Kal ovKére toyvoev 
Aadjoa. Wav dé 6 avOvmatos tiv imepBaddoveay avTod Smopoviy 
kedever adTov (OvTa “kajva. Kat Karepydpevos Eomevde emi To dudu- 
Oéarpov, Oras Taxéws amadAayy TOU Kdcpov. 


5 KBdprows pacuacw Saudvwv to false phantoms of demons. 6 Wa Kal 
amobavwot 185. 7 xpnomeve to give oracles, 8 gropyiv love. 
9 rportauBavwr being ready beforehand. 0 Gdromepacas having 
experience of the things that happen to us day by day through being the 
most ancient of creatures foretells what is to come to pass. Ll gropacews 
Tov Oeod the sentence of God. 2 76 eldévar knowledge 172. 13 Kare 
ovyxwpnow Peod by the permission of God. tris eboeBelas 34 (5). 
15 d\vaphoae to talk nonsense. 16 eéeoar to be torn with hooks. 
7 xafvar Aor. pass. inf. from calw. 


APPENDIX II 159 


Kat 8 zpoondobels eis To EvVAOv 6 Kapros ™rpocepediacev: of Se 
Ie 
cal > ‘ ”~ > ~ ‘ > a > , Ly 4 
mapeot@res exmAnoodmevor EAeyov atir@: Ti eoriw dre eyéhacas; 6 Se 
: = 20 td \ ’ , eS ap La BY UE Os A 
fraxdpios eimev: *°Kidov tHv Sdéav Kupiov kat exapny, aua dé xal vpor 
dmadXaynv Kal ovK clue péroxos Tov tuerépwy Kak@y. Tadra cio Kal 
2 a \ - 2 > \ a) , > a 
mpooepopevov Tod mupds mpoonvéaro Aéywv: EvAoynros et, Kupte “Inood 
a a in 
Xpioré, vie rod Oeod, Gti karngiwoas Kal ewe Tov duapr@ddy Tavtns cov THs 
pepidos, kai TovTo eimay amédaxey THy Woyny. 
18 rpognwels being nailed, 19 rpotemedlacev smiled. 2 Eldor... 
éxapnv 9d. 


160 APPENDIX II 


THE MARTYRDOM OF POLYCARP, BISHOP OF 
SMYRNA, a.v. 155, 


~ > , 

*O 8€ Oavpaotdraros Tlohvcapmos 176 pév mpOrov dkovoas ovK €ra- 
paxOn, add’ éBovdrcro *xarad méAw pévews of d€ mdeious ereHov avrov 
breEedOciv. Kat tretqrOev eis aypidiov od 2paxpdv dméxyov amo tis 

, LY , ? >? , 4 , ‘ c , vde o 6 n 
modes, kal SuérpiBe per dAiyov, 4viKTa Kai Nuépav ovdev Erepov © roy 
}} mpocevyduevos wept mdvt@v Kat Tv Kara Ti oikoupévyy exKANnoLov- 
érep fv atvnOes alta. Kat mpocevxdpevos ev drtacia yéyovev Sapo 

al cat a - ~) a 
TplLOv Huepov Tov ovdAdAnPOjvar adirdy, xai eidev 7d 'rpooKkepddatoy avrov 

e! - 5 
trd mupds Karakatopevov: Kat orpadels eimev mpos Tovs adv aita, SAci pe 
Cavra *Kanvat. : 

QA 10 > , co , > 14 . , 3 or > , 

kat Merimevdvtay tay (nrovvtT@y avrdv, peréBn eis Erepov aypidioy: 

\ DOE > , c a > , ‘ ll X i , rd 
Kat ev0éws éméatnaay of (nrovvtes aitév. Kal pr evpdvres cvvehdBovTo 

, , 2 1 ¢ , c Ne . 123 ry NS 207 
maiddpta Ovo, a TO Erepov BacaviCdpevoy wporoynoev: Hv yap Kat adv- 
vatov Nabeiv airdv, émel Kai of mpodiWdvTes adrov oixetds UmnpXov. Kal 

, wt 
185 eipnvapyos, 146 KexAnpopévos rd aird dvopa, “Hpwdns emdeyduevos, 
Zomevdev eis TO oTadiov avtoy eicayayeiv, iva exeivos pev Tov tov KAnpov 
16 > , x a §: f © be 8 / > A a 17 > ~ 
dnaption, Xpiotod Kowwrvds yevdpevos, of O€ mpoddvres adrov ty MM avrod 

a , 

Tov lovda tmdcxorev Tipwpiay. 
Zyovres odv Td maddpiov, tT} mapacKeun epi Seivov a@pav e&jAOov 
ay Oe : q p 7 
co col ‘4 a > Cas qa 
WSioypirar Kal inmmeis pera Tov ovv7Owv adrois Str@V, ws emt AnoTHV 
tpéxovres. Kal de ths Spas ovveredOdvres, exeivov pev etpov ev tive 
, i € , > ‘A > A 
Sopario Katakeipevov tmepdo- Kaxeilev Se nOvvaro eis Erepoy xwpiov 
s > : ; ; A a ; 
dmedOeiv, adX od« nBovdnOn, eimav: To OéAnpa Tov Oeod yevécbo. 
19 > , > / \ 6 X , 6 > Lal 6 ti aA 
dkovoas ovv mapdvras, KaraBas dcedéxOn adrois, Oavpativtay trav 

, ‘ aN ’ > a“ 205% > 6é: ot) v2 A > 
mapovrayv tiv nrrKiay avtod Kal rd edorabés, ei Trooavtn orovd) Fv 

“~ lol ~ - , < c 
Tov svAAnPOnvar rowodrov mpeaBuTnyv avdpa. cvOéws ovv adtois éxéNevoe 


1 76 ev mporoy at the first, adverbial acc. 22. 2 kard wodkw in the 
city. 3 uaxpdy, understand 6ddv 18. 4 vixra Kal Nuépay 18. 5 rows 
259 (1). 6 apd rpiav ucpwv three days before he was taken; the second 


genitive has an ablative force, starting from, or reckoning from the day when 
he was taken. See J. H. Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 101. 7 apoocxepddatoy 


a pillow. 8 Sei we CGvTa Kahvar 142, ® xahvas 2 Aor. inf. pass. from 
kalw. 10 érripevdvTwv persisted 35. 1 uh ebpdvres 267. 12 Fy 
yap ddbvaroy Nabetv atrév 142. 18 elpnvapxos the captain of the police. 
M4 kex\npwuevos Perf. part. mid. from xdypdw who had allotted to him the very 
same name. 15 7d avré 53. 16 daraprlon fulfil. W avrod rod 
"Tovda 51. 1B Siwyuirar police. 9 dxovcas otv mapdyras 150, 


2 evoradds constancy. 21 el rocavTn orovdy jv 167. 


: 


APPENDIX Il 161 


mapareOjnva ™ dayeiv cai mee ev exeivn tH Spa, Bécov av Bovdovrat: 
> , »\ ? , o - a 
e€ntnaato 8€ abrovs, 4iva déc0w aitd Spav *rpds rd mpooedéacba 
10 col col de > LA Q , rd) a é 
adea@s. Tadv Se erirpeyrdvr@v, orabels mpoonvéaro mArnpns dv tijs yapiros 
~ a 7 © » , a ‘ bon) 

Tod Ocod ovtas, Sas emi dio dpas pu) SivacOa oryjoat, Kal exadjnrrecOat 
4 > - , col ~ Bi a 
Tovs dakovovras, modAovs Te peravociv eml ro EAnAvOévar emt rowdroy 

27 Acompenn mpeaBurnv. 
> ‘ éé , ‘ U , 28 , *, 
emet O€ more KaTémavoe THY mpocevxnY, pynpovevoas Bdmdvtwv Kal 
A ; ape Z 
Tv TaToTE TUUBEBANKOT@Y avTO, pLKPOY TE Kal peydor, éevddéwv TE Kal 
> , ~ ‘ , -~ a 
adddfov, cat mdans tis Kata THY oikoupevny KaboArKHs éxxAnolas, THs 
¢ 4 , ey ed Y bi 31 N Ey > \ r 
&pas eAOovons tov ekévat, 6v@ Kabicavtes adirov ifyayov eis Thy modu, 
a BB , aN x ¢ , > Lod c > , ‘H t 8 ‘ c 
ovtos gaBBarov peyddov. Kal tarnvta ait 6 eipnvapxyos “Hpwdns cal 6 
A > ~ LA a ‘ Gé > A > ‘ 29 ‘ ~ 30 ” 
marnp avtrov Nix7rns, ot Kai petrabévtes avrov emi ®riv Kapodxav * éreov 
fa} , ‘ re x Ti A x > 2: col 31K la cr 
mapakabeCopevot kai Néyovtes: Ti yap kaxdv éotw eimeiv, 9! Kipios Kaicap, 
lol , , 
kal eriOvoat, *xal ra tovrois adkdAdovOa, kal *Siac@lerda; 6 dé Ta peév 
a > Bi , > - > , ‘ oe ” > r n 
Tp@ra ov‘ awexpivato avrots, emievovtwy be aitov epn: OV pédAw Trotetv 
& cupBovreveré por. ot dé, *arorvydytes Tod meioa airdv, Sewa pnuara 
éeyov Kal pera djs > Kady, Urov, *6¢ jyTa aT TH f 
y) peta orrovdns *Kabypouv airdy, Sas KatidvTa amd THs Kapovxas 
> A 37 ‘ > , \ A >? , 38 < > ‘ , 
amooctpa *'ro avtikynuoy. Kat ph emotpadeis, Bas ovdev rerovbes, 
5 , ; 
mpoOvpas pera orovdns emopevero, aydopevos eis TO orddioy, OopvBov 
4 Z p 
TyAtkovTou bvTos ev TO aTadig as pnde axovoOnvai tiva SvvacOa.. 
-~ , ‘ \ a , 
To d€ THodvukdpr@ eiowvre eis rd orddiov pov e€ ovpavov eyévero- 
a 
“Ioxve Tlodvcapme xal dvdpifov. kat tov pev eimdvta ovdels eidev, tiv 
d€ hoviv trav nyetépav of mapdvtes eovoav. Kal Nowmdv mpocaxGévtos 
> a 66 Ss , > , 39 7, inf Av WN 
aitov OdpuBos jv péyas dkovodvray *%6rt ToAvkapmos ovveidnmrat. 
, Sas > ¥ > , 40 ¢ > 6 iA 41 > > A CA . cal 8 ‘4 
mpocaxbévta odv aitov avnpara *°6 av@vmaros, *ei aires ety: Tod be 
~ tol > , '} \ ig 
dporoyovrtos, ereev apveicba éywov, AidéoOynTi gov THy Hrixiay, Kal 
K » \ , 
érepa Tovrots dxddovda, as eos avrois héyerv: *”Opooov tiv Kaicapos 
> <7 , > - 
_ToXNY, peTavdnoor, elrov, Alpe rods abéous. 6 5€ TloAvKapmos ®eyBpidet 


22 dayeiv kal meiv, examples of the dative sense of the infinitive 133, 171. 
3 goov av Bokura 252. 24 tva dow 189. 2 arpods TO mpocevEar au 
202. 26 ws equivalent to wore so that 230. 27 Oeompemh venerable. 
23 grdvtwy 34 (7). 29 xapodxay carriage. 30 ZrrevOov tried to persuade 
him 90. 81 Kupios Katoap, cf. 1 Cor. xii. 3. 82 kal rd, TobTous dKbAovba 
and more to this effect. 33 Scacdtecdar middle voice 81. 34 daroruxévres 
failing to persuade him 34 (5). 35 xadjpow from Kadaipéw made him 
dismount. 36 ws for wore 230. 37 dytixvnpwoy shin. 388 ws obdev 
merrovus, ws comparative as if he had not suffered anything. 89 rt 
Todvxapros cuvel\nmra: from cvdAdayBavw 96, 97, 153. 49 dvObmaros the 
proconsul. 41 el adrods ety 51, 161. 42 8uocov 1st Aor. imper. act. 
from dpyupe. 48 éuBpbel TY mpocwrw with a solemn countenance ; éuBpidet 
is a predicative adjective 76. 


N. 11 


162 APPENDIX II 


T@ mpoowr@ els mdvta tov dydov Tov e€v <? crete spe eOvioy 
épBrEas Kai émiceioas avrois THY xelpa, oTevagas Te kal dvaBheypas eis 
rov ovpavdv, eimev: Alpe rovs aOéous. éyketpévov dé Tou av ONT ET OE Kal 
héyovtos: “Opocor, Kal dmodvw ve- Aowddpyaov Tov Kprerr ow , ea 6 Hols 
kapros: ’Oydonxovra kal €& ern dovdedw aire, Kal ovdéy pe nOdiknoev: Kat 
mas Sivapa Prachypnoa tov Baowréa pov, Tov cacavTa pe ; ; 

émipévovtos 5€ mdAw aitod Kal NéyovTos, “Opocov vy Kalo-apos Tox, 
dmexpivaro: Ei “xevodo€eis iva dudcw thy Kaivapos tuxny, os ov déyets, 
mpoomotet dé dyvociv pe Tis elt, pera mappynoias dKkove, Xpiorvavds eipe. 
el d¢ Oédes Thy Tod xpioriaviopod pabeiv Adyor, Sos juépav Kal dkovoov. 
én 6 dvOvmaros* Ieicov tov djpov, 6 b€ Modvxapros eimev: 3¢ pev 
kav Adyou A€l@ca: *Sedidypeba yap dpxais cat e€ovoias tixd Ocod 
Treraypévats Tysy KaTa TO MpoonKoy THY py BAdmrovoay Huds, dmovépev* 
€xeivous S€é ovx a&liovs nyovpat TOV amrodoyeio Oat avrots. 

6 5€ avOvmatos cimev* Onpla exo, Toros ce mapaBadG, éav py pera- 
vonons. 6 d€ eiwev: Kddet: 8 dpuerdderos yap nuivy 7 awd Tay Kpeitrovev 
éml Ta xeip@ peravoia* kaddv O€ petatidecOar dmb Tav yader@y él Ta 
Sixaa. 6 5€ maduvy mpods adrév: Tupi ce mom Saravynbnva, «i *rav 
Onpiov Karadpoveis, éav pr) petavonons. 6 dé TlokvKapmos: Tip dredecis 
Td mpos @pav kardpevov Kal per’ ddiyov cBevvipevov: dyvoeis yap TO THs 
peddovons Kpicews Kal alwviov Koddvews Tois doeBéou THpovpevov mip. 
G@AXa ti Bpadvvers; épe 6 Bovdrer. 

tavra d€ kal €repa melova héyor, ©Adpaovs Kai yapas éveripmdaro, 
kal TO mpdcwmoy avrovd xapitos éemAnpovro, dare ov povoy pu) TUpmEeEW 
TapaxGevra vb TeV Aeyouévav mpods adtov, GAAd TOUVayTiov Tov avOvmarov 
exoTHvar méuypat Te Tov EavTod KypuKa, ev péo@ TO oTadim Kynpiéat Tpis* 
TloAvKcapros @poddynoev éavrdv Xpioriavoy eivat. tovrov AexOévros bd 
rod Knpukos, Grav rd mdyOos eOvav re Kai “Iovdaiav rév thy Spipvav 
katokouvtav “axaracxéro Oupd Kal peyddrn pov émeBda: Odrés eorw 
6 tis ’Agias Siddoxados, 6 marip rav Xpiotiavav, 6 Tov fperépav Oedv 
kabaipérns, 6 moAdovs SiddcKev put Ovew pndé mpookuveiv. tadra déyovres 
émeBowy kal npatoy rov "Aoidpyny Pdurroy, iva émapy ro TloAukdpr@ 


“4 xevodotets thou thinkest vainly. 4 wWva dudcw, an extension of the 
use mentioned in 180 and 189 ete. 46 kdv=xal dv I should have thought 
thee worthy of discourse ; the apodosis of an unfulfilled conditional sentence 
with the protasis suppressed 239. 47 SediddyucOa, Teraryuévaus, for the 
tense see 96, 266. 48 duerdberos inadmissible. 4 ra&v Onpiwy 34 (8). 
50 Odpcous kal xapas 34 (2). 51 gore 230. 52 axaracxérw ungovernable. 
8 wva...€rapy 189, érapy 2 Aor. subj. from éraginut. 


APPENDIX II 163 


, , » ‘ 2: , - 
Aéovra, 5 dé ey “yr elvar eLdy aire, emesdi) memdnpdeer Ta Kvvnyéora. 
Fes z in 
tore edokev adbtois duobvpadsy éemiBojoa, dore roy TWodvKaprov (avta 
a 28 4 55... a , DEN a , 
katakavoa, eee yap “rd ths Gavepwbeions ext tod mpooKedpadaiov 
> , x a 
omracias mAnpwbjva, dre dv add Katdpevov mpooevydspevos etrev 
>? ‘ cal ‘ > ~ cal ~ Lal an a 
emtotpadels tois olv aire microis mpopynrixas: Aci pe (OvTa Kajvat. 
s > ’ A a A 
Taira ov pera TogovTov Taxovs eyévero, “Oarrov i) éedéyero, Tor 
4 5 fe 
dxAw@v mapaypnya ovvaydivtav ex te Tov "“épyactnpiov Kal Badaveiwv 
LA x - cr ~ 
fvXa cal Shpvyava, pddicra "lovdaiwv mpobvipos, os bos adrois, eis Tatra 
broupyovytav. dre dé 7 8mvpKaia frousdobn, amobé  éauTo ma 
apy - Bey Mrupxaid HrotpdcOn, drolépevos éavrg mdvra 
A ; ; 
Ta indria kal hucas THY C@vyy, éreiparo Kal “brodvew EavTov, py mpdTEpov 
tovto toy Sia rd det ExaoToy Tay mistav omovddtew Biaris Tay.ov 
~ ~ > an 
TOU Xp@Tos av’Tov aYntar> mavTl yap ayabns Evexey todereias cal “apd 
THs modas exekdopnto. cvOéws ody ait@ mepreriOero Ta mpos THY Tupav 
Nppoopéva bpyava, peddAdvrav b€ aitav Kai ©mpoonrody eiwev: "Aderé 
pe otras: 6 yap Sovs iropeivar rd wip doce Kal yapis ths tuerépas ex 
cal GA > , 66 7 > Lal fod a 
Tov Hrov dodadeias “adoxuATov émmeivar TH Tupa. 
© ‘ > a , , . vom! © Se eae \ “~ 
oi b€ od KabnAwoay pév, mpocédnaay Se aitov. 6 dé dricw ras xEipas 
moujoas kat mpoodebels, Gaomep Kptos émionpos ék peyadov moysviov eis 
‘ ig 4 x a Coin , > (2 2 \ 
mpoopopay, dd\okavtapa Oextov T@ OCe@ Hrouacpévoyv, dvaBréeWas cis tov 
s ay ~ ~ 
ovpavoy eimev: Kupte 6 Geds 6 mavtoKxpatwp, 6 ToD dyaTnToU kai evAoynToU 
i, , > ~ a , > = A ‘ na 3 , Y , 
matovs gov Inoov Xpiorov marnp, Ov od rHv wepl cov ewiyvwaw cidnpapev, 
875 Geos dyyéhov kal Suvdpewv Kal mdons Ktivews maytds Te Tod yévous 
” ~ , -~ eo tA a 
Tov Stxalwy ot (@ow evaridy aov: evAoy@ ae, Ort Karn§i@ods pe Tijs 
a cal ‘ > kod -~ 7 
npépas Kal Spas ravrns, Srov AaBeiv pe pepos ev apiOu@ Tav papTipev év 
a , o =e At, ey? a > , a N , 
T@ mornpi Tov Xpiotod eis dvdaraow (wis aiwviov uxis Te Kal goparos 
, > e t » , , , 
ev apOapoia mvevparos dyiov: év ois ™ rpoadeyOeinu cvamidy cov onpepov 
2 , , ‘ bpd * , ‘ t ‘ 
€v Ovcia wiom Kal mpoadexty, KaOws mponToipacas Kai mpoedhavepwoas Kai 
a \ / 
emAnpooas, 6 awevdns Kal drnOivds Geds. Sta TovTO Kai Tepi TdvTwY CE 
ivO, cé evAoya, oé So€dlw da Tov aiwviov Kat émoupaviov apxepéws “Incov 
aivd, cé evrAoy&, o€ SoEdfw did Tov aiwviov Kai éroup pxeep o] 
A ~ > e ‘ > iad \ A ¢ , / 
Xpiorod, dyamnrod cov matdds, Ov’ ob cor ov aiT@ Kai mvevpate dyiw ddéa 
a“ a cal > Ul 
kal viv Kal eis Tovs péAAovTas aiGvas. apunv. 
Rl] , ‘ > a A > ‘ \ , ‘ > , © a 
avarépwavros 5€ aitov TO duny Kat mAnpooavtos Thy edynv, oi Tov 
54 ui evar éfov adr@... 145, 156. 55 70 rijs...dmtTaclas the matter of his 
a! 2 : : 3 
vision. 56 OGrrov 7 édéyero quicker than words could tell. 57 épyaornpiwy 
kai Badavelwy workshops and baths. 53 dovyava faggots. 58 mupKaid 
the pile. 60 éauT@ 38. 61 jrodvew to take off his shoes. COG 
7O del... 228. 63 gor7us...ayrat, a dependent deliberative question 121, 
162; rob xpwréds 34 (1). 64 apo 77s modds even before his hair became 
white. 65 rpoondodv to nail. 66 doxudTov unmoved, 87 6 Ocds 13. 
88 tof AaBely 177. 69 mpocdexelyv 131. 
11—2 


164 APPENDIX II 


rupos dvOpwror eEyav Td mip. peyddAns de exAappdons prods, mea 
eiSopev, ois ieiv €600n* of Kal ernpyOnpev cis TO avayyethat rois Rovsrois ra 
yevoueva. 7d yap wip @xapdpas cidos ™ roca, dorep ™306vn a Notov 
ird mvevparos mAnpoupéryn, KUKA@ TepLeTeixiTEV TO TOpa TOU pdprupos: 
kal Av pécov, ody os oapé Katopévn, GAN os xpveds Kal iépyupos ev kapive 
mupovpevos. kal yap evodias Trooavtns dvtehaBipeba, as ABavwrod 
mvéovtos #) &AXov Tivds TOY Tipioy apopdrov. 

mépas odv iSdvres of dvopor “py Svvduevov airod Td GHpua bd Tov 
mupos ®damavnbqvat, éxédevoav mpocedOdvra aire Koupéxtopa ™ mapa- 
Bioa Eupidiov. Kal toiro moimoavtos, é&jdOe mwdrnOos aiparos, Sore 
BaragBéoa TO mip Kai Oavpdoa mavta tov bxdov, ei TOTAaLTH TIS 
Suahopa perafd rav re dmwictwv Kal tev éexdextOv: dv eis Kal ovros 
yeyover 6 Oavpacioraros, €v Tois KaP” nuas xpdvors biddoKados drroorohuxds 
kal mpopntikds yevopevos, emicxoros Tis év Spvpvy dyias éxxAnoias’ may 
yap phpa, 6 adixev ex Tod oroparos adrod, éredec@On Kal TeAecwOnoerat 

6 d€ avri¢ndos Kal Baoxavos Kal movnpds, 6 avTiKeipevos TO yéever 
tov Sixaiwv, idov rd Te péyeOos ad’rod Tis paprupias Kal THY am’ apxns 
> r , > , Q a > ’ s 
averiAnmrov mohiretav, Leorehavepevov te Tov Tis apOapoias orépavov 
kal BpaBeiov “@dvavrippnrov amevnveypévov, émerndevoev as pnde TO 
copdriov aitod dp nuav AnPOnvar **xaimep morAGv erOvpovvTav TovTo 
monca Kal Kowavncat TO ayio aitod capkio. “iméBadrev yodv Nixyrny 
rov Tov ‘Hpwdou marépa, adedpoy Sé”AAkns, evtuxetv TO Apyovte Sore py 
Sodvar a’rov 7d capa, “yn, hnoiv, apévres tov eotavpopévov, Tovrov 
dpfovra oéBecOa: “Kai ratra troBadddvtav Kal evicyvivTav Tov 
lovdaiwy, ot Kal éripnoav, peddCvT@v jpav éx Tod mupds aidrov 
AapBavew, dyvootvres Gre ov'te Tov Xpiordy more Katahireiv Suvnodpeba, 
Tov Umep THs TOD mavTos Kéopov Tv calopévov caTnpias mabdvra, 
dpopov vmép dpuapTodev, ovre erepdv tia oéBecOa. ToiTov piv yap 


70 kaudpas of a vault. 11 rovjoay neut. sing, Ist Aor. part. act. row. 
7 606 the sail. 7 \.Bavwrod frankincense. 74 un duvduevov 150. 
® Samravnbfvat to be consumed. 7 xougdéxtopa an executioner (Latin 
confector). 7 rapaBioa Epldov to stab him with a dagger. 78 KaTa- 
oBéoat from karacBévvum. 7 Oavudoa el... wondered that... 167. 
80 BaoKxavos envious. 81 gorepavwpevoy Tov Tis dpOapalas srépavov and 
that he was crowned with the crown of immortality 19, 20. 82 dvavrlppnrov 
which none could gainsay. 8 drevnveyuevov Perf. pass. part. dropépw. 
84 kalrep moh\@v erOupotyTwy... 246. 8 JréBarev yoov Therefore he (the 
Evil One) put forward...to plead with the magistrate.... % uh, dnoly,... 
Todrov dpfwvrat c€BeoOat lest, as he said, ... they should begin to worship this 


man 184, 87 kal radra broBaddéovrwv... this being done at the instigation 
and earnest entreaty of the Jews. 


APPENDIX II 165 


vidvy dvra rod Gcod mpockuvodper, tos d& pdprupas os pabnras Kai 
Mtuntas Tod Kupiov dyamGpev akios évexev Beivolas dvumepBdyrov THs 
eis Tov idtov Baciéa Kal diSdoKadov: Sv yévorro Kai fas ovyxowavors 
Te Kal cuppadnras yevéor bat 

dav odv 6 Kevtupioy Thy Tay “lovdalav yevopevynv dudroverkiay, Gels 
aitov ev péow, as O08 adrois, Exavoev. olTws Te Hpeis Vorepor dveddpevor 
Ta Tyuumrepa AiO@v woduTehOv Kal Soxiorepa Urép ypvciov dara adrod, 
ameBépeOa érrov Kal dxddovOov Hv. evOa ds Suvardy fpiv cvvayouévors 
€v dyah\tdoet Kal xapa mapéer 6 Kuptos emiredeiv thy Tod wapruplov adtod 
npépav yeveOduov, els te THY TOv %rponOAnKdr@v pyyjpny Kal Tov peddév- 
Tov doknolv Te Kal éropaciav. 

88 e¥volas affection, 89 8rou Kal dxédovdov av in a suitable place. 


9 sponOrnkérwv gen. pl. Perf. part. act. rpoabhéw of those that have already 
fought the contest. 


A DESCRIPTION OF THE EUCHARIST IN THE SECOND 
CENTURY FROM THE APOLOGY OF JUSTIN MARTYR. 


UHyeis b¢, wera ro ovtas Aodoat Tov meretopévoy Kai ovyxararebepe- 
vov, €ml Tovs Aeyopévous adeAovs Gyoper, evOa ovynypévor eici, Kowas 
evyas *roumodpevan brép te Eavtdv kal tov %dwricévtos, cal GddAov 
mavtaxod mavtay evtéves, tomas xatafimb@pev, Ta andy paddytes, Kal 
bv épywv dyaboi Srodirevtal, Kai pudakes Tov Sevreradpévav eipeOjvat, 
Sres THY aiaviov 7cetnpiay coOdpev. GAAnAovs Pidrjpate dowaldpeba 
mavodpevor Stay evyav. emeita mpoohépetat TS *mpoeoTSrt Tav aded- 
av dpros, kai mornpiov datos Kai xpdparos* Kal otros, NaBdy, aivoy Kal 
ddéav TH Marpi rdv drwy dia rod évdparos Tot Yiod Kai rod vevparos rod 
‘Ayiou dvanéure Kai ebxapiotiay Nimép rod xarngaoba @rovrav rap’ 
a’rov emt mov moveirat: 08 auvTeA€aavtos Tas Edyas Kal THY evXapioTiay, 

1 jets 6¢ But we, after having baptized in this way the man who 


believes and gives his assent to our doctrine, bring him to those whom we call 
“ Brethren.” 2 rounobuevor 265. 3 duwticbévtos the man who has been 
enlightened, a common name in the Early Church for a baptised person. 
4 rus KaTatiwiGuer 189. 5 rondtrevral citizens. 6 évreradudvwy from 
évTéXrw. 7 gwrnplav 17. 8 ray edx Gy 34 (5). 9 apoeor@re dat. of 
mpoeotws the president. 10 kpdwaros gen. of kpdua mixed wine. 1 yrép 
Tov KaTniveoba 173; for the tense see 111, 2 rovTwy 34 (8). 


166 APPENDIX II 


~ - > , iu ‘ - c 
mas & mapav dads Berevpnpet Aé€yov “Apnyv. 1d dé “Anny tH “EBpaide 
Lal , f ‘ ~ - s 
gory ro Tévorro onpaive. evyapiotnoavtos dSé Tov mpoeaTa@Tos, Kal 
~ fol , Fae. - ¢ , 
émevpnunoavtos mavrds Tov daod, vi Kadovpevor map’ juiv didkovor diddaowy 
+ o ~ , a ‘\ wa 
éxdoT@ Tov TapdvT@Y peTaraBeEiy ard TOU ebxapioTHO€vTOS prov Kal otvoU 
A ee 
kal Udaros, kal Tois ov mapovow amodépovorv. 
r ea > bg z > ‘ 
kal 7) tpopy avrn Kadeirae map npiv edxapiotia: fis ovdevi aro 
a - inn oo: A , e419 
petacyely eEdv eorw 7) TO miotevovte GAnOH eivar ra Seddaypéva Up 
- , -~ > > 
npav, cat !dovcapevm ro tmep adécews dpapti@v kai eis dvayévynow 
15 , ‘ oo ~ c c A é§ > ‘A © LY 
NouTpov, Kal ovTws BiodyTe ws 6 Xpioros mapédwxev. ov yap ws Kowwov 
- S > a , \ , 
dprov ovd€ Kowdv mopua Taira KapBavopev: aN’ ov rpdmov dia Adyou 
~ a A 4 ~ ‘\ , A e 
cod capxorroinbels “Incods Xpiords 6 Srp nuev, kal odpKa kcal aipa 
a wn , ~ > > ~ 
bmép caTnplas nuav exyxev, oUTas Kal THy Ov edvxns Adyou TOU map avTov 
- xt re ‘ ‘ 
evxaptaTndcioay rpopyy, €& is aia Kal odpxes Kata peraBodyy Tpépovrat 
a a , > A , +2 > va 
Npav, ekelvov Tov capKoroinbévtos Incod Kal odpka Kat aipa edidayOnpuev 
c > r tA 
elvat. of yp dmdarodot ev Tots yevouévors Ur’ ad’tav Baropynpovedpacw, 
a a 4 > a 
a xadetrat Evayyédua, ovras mapédaxay SevreraddOat avrois tov “Incody: 
- ~ a A > , , 
19) aBdvra diprov, evyapiotnoavta eimeiv: “rovro moveire eis THY avdprynolv 
~ col , A 
fou: TovTd é€oTe TO Gud pouv:” Kal rd mornpiov 6poiws AaBdvTa Kat 
A mn e » ’ sees 
evxaptotnoavta eimety: “roiTd éote TO aid pov.” Kal povos avrois 
a a ~ , , 
2ueradovva. Omep Kal ev Trois Tod MiOpa pvotnpios mapédaxav yiveoOa 
if , a 
uunodpevor of rovnpot Saiuoves. Ore yap aptos Kal mornpiov vdatos 
co a , cal > cat a > , 
tiderar "ev rais Tov puovpévov Tederais per emiddyav TwWOy, i) emi- 
i) padeww Svvacd 
atacbe, 7) padery dSuvacde. 2 
€ ° ‘ ~ = A 28 ’ IAX aN > , 2 ‘ 
nets O€ pera TavTa Aourroy del TOUT@Y GAANAOUS avapLpYnoKOpEV: Kal 
yy tal co a ‘ vA , 
ol ¢xovres *rois Nermopévors mao emixouvpodvperv, Kal avverpev adAAHAoLs 
Berl mact i ue, UNoyou by Ilouriy Te 
TL maoi Te ols mpoohepdsueOa, evhoyodpev tov Tlowrny trav 
a. \ “ (pee > Anes. ~ a ‘ \ ia ~ 16 4 
mavtov Oa Tod Yiovd av’rov "Inoov Xpicrod Kai dua Tvedparos rod “Ayiov. 


ea? 
aét. 


13 éreudynuel assents thereto. 14 Novcauévw Middle voice, that has 
allowed himself to be baptized 81. 15 \ourpév 17. 16 8» rpdmov 22 For 
even as Jesus Christ our Saviour, having been made flesh by the Word of God, 
took flesh and blood for our salvation, so we have been taught that the food, 
for which we return thanks in a prayer containing His very words and from 
which our flesh and blood are nourished by its transformation, is the flesh and 
blood of that incarnate Jesus. 17 6a Adéyou, for the omission of the article 
see end of 68. 18 drouvnuovebuacw memoirs. 19 \aBdvra dprov namely 
that He took bread, and, when He had given thanks, He said... 146, for the 
participles see 258, 218. 20 yeradodvat, this infinitive is dependent on the 
idea of saying implied in rapédwxay, as are the other infinitives above, 146. 
1 ey rats Too uvoupévov TereTals in the rites of initiation. 
to those that are in wunt., 
prayers 63. 


Tots NevTromevors 
23 éwl waoi re ols mpoodepducda in all our 
poo pepoy 


APPENDIX II 167 


kat TH ToD ‘HXiov Aeyouevy 7 NHEpa mavT@v Kata modes } dypovs Boney 
€mi rd aird ouvédevors yiverat, Kal Ta dropynpovedpara TOY drogtdhav, j 7) 
Ta ovyypappara Tay mpopyray dvaywédoxerat * HEXpts eyxopel. ira 
mavoapévoy Tod dvaywecKortos, 6 mpoeotas Sia Adyou THY vovbeciav Kab 
mpoxAnow tis Tov Kaddv ToUT@V piphoews Toveira. ereira dviordueba 
Kow]) madvres, Kal evxds méuropuev Kal Os mpoepnuev, mavoapévoy huav 
Tis evxNs, dpros mpoogéperas Kat oivos Kal dap: Kai 6 mpoeoras edyds 
Opoiws kai edyaporias, Gon Sivas adt@, dvaréuret, kal 6 Aads emevpnpet 
Aéyov 76 °Apny: Kat 7 Suddoors Kal 7 peTadnYis awd Tdv edyapioTnbévT@Vv 


© 


éxdoT@ yivetat, kat Tots ov mapovor dia Tov diaxdvav méprera. of 
evmopovyres S€ Kat BouvAduevot, Kata mpoaipeow exactos thy éavrod, 6 
Bovrerat Sidwors Kai 76 cvAAeydpevov mapa TH mpoeoT Ste dmoriberat, Kat 
avrés €mixoupet dppavois te kat xnpats, Kal Trois dua vooov 4 Ov GdAnv 
_airiav Aevropévais, Kat Trois ev Seopois cdot, kal Tois maperdypors odor 
Eévois, cal da@AGs mace Tois ev ypeia odor Kydepov yivera. rihv S€ Tod 
‘HXlov juépay Kown mavres Thy cuvédevow mroovtpeOa: ered) porn 
coTiv Hpépa, év 7 6 Oeds, TO oKdTOS Kai THY VANY >rpéas, Kdopov erroinge, 
kat Inoovs Xpioros 6 nérepos Swrnp TH adtn juépa ék vexpa@v avéarn. 
Th yap mpo ths Kpovixns eoravpwcay aitév: kal Ty pera THY Kpovixny, 
7rTis eotiv ‘HAlov nuépa, havels rois adoardAas avtov Kai pabnrais, édidake 
tavta, arep eis émiokxep Kal vpiv avedaxaper. 

24 néxpis éyxwpel as long as time permits. 2% rpévas having changed. 
26 els érioxeww for your consideration. 


A HOSTILE OUTSIDER’S VIEW OF CHRISTIANITY. 


Lucian, the writer of this piece, was a native of Samosata on the 
Euphrates, and lived in the second century A.D. 

He was a cultivated man of the world who despised and ridiculed 
all religious and philosophic sects alike. 

In the book from which this passage is taken he is describing the 
death of Proteus Peregrinus, a Cynic philosopher, who burut himself 
alive at the Olympian Games to show his contempt for death. 

Lucian says that after a disreputable youth Peregrinus joined the 
sect of the Christians, and gives the following account of his relationship 
with them. Peregrinus afterwards ceased to be a Christian, and, 
becoming a Cynic, ended his life in the manner described above. 


168 APPENDIX II 


- - x ‘ 
“Orerep kal tiv Oavpactiy copiay Tav XpiotiavOv e€épabe wept THY 
’ - a - ~ , 
Tlakaorivny trois iepedou kal ypapparedow adtav ovyyevopevos. Kai Tt 
- la ’ is id ‘\ 
yap; év Bpaxei waidas adrols dwépnve, mpopyrns, Kai *Ovacdpyxns, Kal 
~ A 
Sguvaywyevs, Kal mavta pdvos avrds dv. Kai tov *BiBov ras pev 
5éEnyeito, kai duecdper, moddas S€ airds Kai ouvéypade, Kai os Oeov 
airov éxeivoe Wyovvro, Kai Svopobérn éxpa@vTo, kal mpoordtny éméypapov. 
rov péyav yoov exeivov ert o€Bovow dvOparov, rov év Th Makaorivy *ava- 
, ¢ 
okodomicbévra, OTL Kali TavTny TeAETHY elonyayev és TOY Biov. 
rére Oy Kai gvAAnPGels eri rovT@ 6 Ipwrets evémecen eis Td Seopo- 
Ud bid \ > \ > \ > Lee , , \ A 8 t‘e> 
Thpiov. Omep kal avTo ov piKpoy adit@ a&iopa wepiemoinae mpos Tov FéEns 
a A ‘ 9 , ‘ 108 / 112 2A pee 2 \ S 
Biov, kat tiv %repareiav, kat do€oxoriav, Ov epdv ervyyavev. eel 
ody ed€dero of Xprotiavol, cvppopay moiovpevot TO mpaypya, mavtTa ekivovy, 
> , S D Sten? WD g FOE IN ~ > 2n7 12 ¢, 
efaprdcat meip@pevor aitov. eit emel TovTO Av advvatov, Miye GAAn 
Oepameia aca ov mapépyws adda adv orovd; eyiyvero* Kat ewbev pev 
‘ > Ce \ ~ ‘ , - , 
evOvs nv Opay mapa T@ Seoparnpio mepimevovta Bypaidia, xnpas Tivds, Kal 
‘ > A c ‘ > , > ~ y a a > > an 
maidia oppavd. oi de év réhet a’t@v Kal cuvexdbevdov evdov per avrod, 
A 2 cal 
SiapGeipovtes rovs Secpodvddkas: eira Seimva moxita eioexopiCero, Kat 
Adyou tepol adt@v EhéyovTo, Kai 6 BédArioros Tlepeypivos (ere yap rovro 
ekaNeiro) Kavos S@xpatns Um avtav avopacero. 
14 \ \ ‘ an 54 ES: ’ r ' > a + n a 
kal pny Kal Tov ev “Agia rodewy eat dv HKdv tives, Tay Xpioriavov 
oTehNévTwy ard Tod Kowod, BonOncortes, Kal TvvayopevoorTes, Kal Tapa- 
6 , cy wy 8 > (2 bé AY fa >? p 16 BI UA 
pvOnodpevoe Tov dvdpa. apunxavoyv S€ Tuts Tayos émideixvuTa, Bereddv 
Tt ToLOUTOY yévnTat Snudctoy. 
> - , 2 - , ‘ A ‘ ~~ 
16 dy Bpaxet yap, aedovar mdvtov. Kat o7 Kat T@ Tepeypiv@ moda 
i ze pear oF Se , ~ n ’ 
TOTe NKE XpNwata wap avTav emi mpohace Tov Secu@v, kal mpocodov ov 
pukpav TavTnY emouncaro. 
Moremeikaot yap avrovs of kaxodaipoves 8rd pév ddov dOavaror eoeaOat, 
cai Biooeo Oat roy det ypdvov. 


74 ‘ . A a , 
map 6 kal Karappovodor rot Aavdrov, Kai Exdvtes abrovs émidiSdacu 


1 kal rl yap; why say more 3 2 OQacdpxns leader of the company. 
3 guvaywyevs convener. 4 BiBdos 7 a book, 5 for the force of these 
Imperfects see 89, 101, 102. 8 yomobéryn 44. 7 dvacko\oricbévra 
crucified. 8 rov é&fs Blov the life to come. ® reparetay jugglery. 
10 SofoKorlay thirst for notoriety. 1 dy épdv érbyxavev with which things 
he was in love. 12 nye made up of 7 and ye. 13 ypatdva wretched 
old women. 14 kal pny kal... And there were actually some of the cities 


of Asia from which there came certain men sent by the Christians by common 
consent (35) to help, and defend, and comfort the man (203). 1 éreday 
yéevnrat (209). 6 ey Bpaxel ydp in a word they spare nothing. 7 tremel- 


\ 


kugt 97, 18 rd wev Bdov 22. 9 tov del xpbvov 18. ™ rod Gardrov 34 (8). 


APPENDIX II 169 


oi wodXol. Ereiva O€ 6 vomobérns 6 mparos Exeioev aitrods ds ddeAHot 
mavres elev a\AnAr@v, ereiddav drak wapasdvres, Oeods pev tods ‘EAAy- 
vikods arapyjowvra, tov dé dverkoromiopévoy exeivoy codiorny aiTaev 
mpookuv@ot, kal Kata Tovs ékeivov vopous Bidar. 

katappovovaw ovv dmdvrev e& tons, Kai Kowa Hyovvrat, Zdvev tiwds 
dxpiBovs wictews Ta Tovadra mapadeEdpevor 

nv toivuy mapéAOn tis eis adtods yons Kai Teyvitns avOpwros Kat 
mpdypact xpnoOar duvipevos, adtika dda mrovows ev Bpayei Beyévero, 
*4iSi@rais avOpwras eyxavav. 

why add’ 6 Lepeypivos >adpei@n ims tov rére ris Supias dpyovros, 
avdpos iocopia xaipovtos, bs *6 
7 SeEar’ dv dmodaveiv, ws Sdkav emi rovto 


A > a 
guveis THY amovoltay avTod, Kal OTL 


5 ee x 
BimoXimol, apnkey ator, 


ovdé THs KoAdoews UrodaBay aévov. 


2 elev 154. 2 dvev tTivds axpiBovs mlarews without any sufficient evidence. 
%3 éyévero he becomes, Gnomic Aorist 95. °4 ldlwrais... making a mock 
of simple men. 2% adelOn was let go, from adinm. 6 cuvels knowing, 
from cuvinu. 27 6éfair’ dy 182, 276. 28 Ws dmoNlmo 184. ws=tra, 


THE LAST WORDS OF SOCRATES TO HIS JUDGES. 


These selections may fitly close with one of the noblest and yet 
easiest passages in Classical literature. Socrates was condemned to 
death by the Athenians on the charge of corrupting the youth and of 
introducing the worship of strange gods. The passage below consists 
of part of his address to the judges who voted for his acquittal. 


évvontwpev dS€ Kai tHde, ws TOAAH EAmis eoTiv dyabdv Jairo eivat- 
+ , = lj 
28voiv yap Odrepdy eotw Td TeOvavar 7 yap Fpyndev ewar pnd aicenow 
me x \ , , 
pndepiav pndevos Exe Tov reOvedra, 7) Kata Ta heyopeva petaBodn Ts 
> fol cod da ot 
rvyxdver ovoa Kai peroixnars TH uxy evOevde eis G@\Xov TOmov. Kal Eire 
3 bd 4 > w+ 
pndepia atcbnois cor, GAN otov vavos, eredav tis Kabevdav pnd dvap 
‘ ia a ) , 4x a id , ‘ \ vde Xr , id r 
pndev dpa, Gavpactov Képdos tay ein 6 Odvatos. Kai yap ovdev mreiwy 6 mas 
a . , A \ > a , #. ? S bo GI > 8 a Le) G 
xpsvos paiverat ovta bn eivar 7H pia vg. «i & ad oiov amodnunoal eotw 6 
ay ” a 
Odvaros évOévde eis GAXov ToTov, Kal aAnOn eotw Ta heydpeva, ws dpa Exel 
- ca , wy A > a” 
cio dravtes of TeOveares, Ti peiCov ayabdv rovTov *ein av, @ avdpes 
1 giro i.e. death. 2 dvotv the gen. of the dual of two things. 
3 undév 267. 4 ay eln 132, 276, 


170 APPENDIX Il 


dikacral; mavrws ov Snwov rovtov ye eveka of eke amoxTeivovat: Td TE 
yap adda evdaovéorepol ciow of exci Trav evOdde, Kal 75n Tov Aouroy 
xpovov dOavaroi ciow, elmep ye Ta Neyopeva GAnOn eat. 

GAAG kal tuas xpi, d dv dpes Sixacrai, evéAmidas eivat mpos Tov Odvaroy, 
kal €v te TovTo diavocicbat adnés, Ott ovK eotiv avdpi ayab@ Kkaxdv ovder 
ovre Cavts ovre TehevTNoavTL, Ovde Gpedeirat VO Oeay Ta TOVTOV mpdypara. 
ovd€ Ta Eva vdv aod TOU a’Toparou yéyover, GAG pot SjAdV €aTL TOvTO, OTL 
70n TeOvava Kal araddaxOjva mpayparev BéAriov Hy pow. adda yap Hn 
dpa amiéva, épol pev droOavovpéva, vpiv dé Biocopévois: dadrepar de 
bev Epxovrat em dpecvov mpaypa, addnrov marti mryny 7) TO Oew. 


Plato, Apology (abridged). 


ENGLISH INDEX 


The references are to sections in all cases 


Ablative Case 23 
Accusative Case 14-22 
adverbial 22 
cognate 17 
extent 18 
object 15 
two accusatives with one verb 19, 
20 
predicate accusative 21 
subject of infinitive 9, 16 
Active voice 79 
Adjectives 45, 46 
used as nouns 47, 48 
Adjectival clauses 250-254 
Adverbial clauses 197-249 
Antecedent 60 
assimilation of 67 
attraction of 66 
omission of 62, 65 
Aorist tense 91-95 
dramatic 95 
epistolary 95 
gnomic 95 
inceptive 93 
resultative 94 
distinction between aorist and im- 
perfect 101, 102 
distinction between aorist and 
perfect 101, 103 
used where English requires perfect 
104-106 
used where Englisn requires plu- 
perfect 98-100 
aorist subjunctive in prohibitions 
126, 129, 130 
imperative 125 
participle 262-264 
Apodosis 235 


Article, definite 68-76 
forming nouns of adjectives, phrases 
ete. 71-73 
attributive position 75 
predicative position 76 
with infinitive 172 
as a personal pronoun 54 
Assimilation of relative pronoun 63- 
66 
Attempted action, present of 86 
imperfect of 90 


Cases, meanings of 12 
Causal clauses 225-229 
Clause, definition of 115 
Clauses, subordinate classification of 
118 
Comparative clauses 249 
Complement 11 
Concessive clauses 246-248 
Conditional clauses 235-245 a 
future conditions 240-243 
general conditions 244 
present and past conditions 238, 
239 
participle 245 
Consecutive clauses 139, 176, 185, 
230-232, 234 


Dative case 36-44 
of cause 42 
indirect object 37 
of instrument 42 
of interest 38 
of manner 42 
of possession 39 
of resemblance or union 43 
of sphere 41 


172 


Dative of place or time 40 
after verbs 44 
Deliberative subjunctive 121 
Dependent commands 159 
Dependent questions 160 
Dependent statements 145-157 
Direct quotations introduced by de 
158 


Epexegetic or Explanatory clauses 
170, 178, 195, 196 


Final clauses 198-204 
introduced by wa ete. 184, 198 
with infinitive 188, 175, 201, 202 
with participle 203 
final relative clauses 204 
Final particles, clauses introduced 
by 180-196 
commands 183 
consecutive clauses 185 
explanatory clauses 195, 196 
final clauses 184 
noun clauses 
as subject 186, 187 
as object 188-193 
in apposition 194 
Future tense 107 
in final clauses 199, 204 
in conditional clauses 242 
participle 265 
infinitive 112 
periphrastic form 114 


General suppositions 244 
Genitive case 23-31 

genitive absolute 35 

in comparisons 33 

of definition 31 

objective 28 

partitive 26 

of possession 24 

of price 30 

of source or material 25 

subjective 27 

of time 29 

after verbs 34 

after adjectives 32 
Gnomic aorist 95 


ENGLISH INDEX 


Historic present 88 
Hortatory subjunctive 119 


Imperative mood 124, 125 
force of tenses of 125 
Imperfect tense 89-90 
distinction in meaning between 
aorist and imperfect 101, 102 
imperfect of attempted action 90 
periphrastic form of 114 
Indicative mood 78 
Infinitive mvod 133-179 
imperative infinitive 137 
in consecutive clauses 139 
in final clauses 138 
in noun clauses 
as subject 142 
as object 144-168 
in apposition 169 
in temporal clauses 140 
with the article 172 
with rod 174-179 
substitutes for 134 
negatives with 267 
Instrumental case 36, 42 


Local clauses 220 
definite 221, 222 
indefinite 221, 223, 224 

Locative Case 36, 40 


Middle voice 81, 82 
Moods in general 78 


Negatives 267 
Nominative case 8 
used as vocative 13 


Object clauses 
after verbs of exhorting 159 
after verbs of fear and danger 166 
after verbs of striving 165 
in dependent statements 145-157 
Oblique cases 12 
Optative mood 131 
in conditional clauses 243 
in dependent questions 161 
potential optative 132, 275 
in wishes 131 
Classical use in final clauses 184 
Classical use in dependent state- 
ments 154, 157 
Classical use after aply 217 


ENGLISH INDEX 


Participles 255-266 a 
tenses of 259-2664 
in dependent statements 150 
negative with 267 
adjectival use 256 
adverbial use 256 
conditional 245 
causal 227 
concessive 248 
final 203 
temporal 218 
Passive voice 79 
Perfect tense 96, 97 
difference between perfect 
aorist 101, 103 
periphrastic form 114 
Phrase, definition of 115 
Pluperfect tense 98-100 
Potential optative 275 
Predicative nouns and adjectives 11 
Prepositions 
governing genitive 4 
governing dative 5 
governing accusative 3 
governing genitive and accusative 6 
governing genitive, dative, and 
accusative 7 
in composition with Verbs, appen- 
dix to section 1, pp. 27, 32 
Present tense 85-88 
of attempted action 86 
historic 88 
periphrastic form of 114 
Prohibitions 126-130 
Pronouns 49-67 
demonstrative 57 
indefinite 59 
interrogative 58 
personal 50-53 
reflexive 55 
relative 60-67 
Protasis 235 


and 


Questions 268 
Questions, dependent 160-162 


Relative clauses 
definite 251 
indefinite 252 


173 


Relative expressing purpose 204 
pronoun 60-67 
case of 60 
assimilation of 63-06 


Sentences 115 
simple 115 
complex 115, 117 
compound 115, 116 
Subject and predicate 8 
Subjunctive mood 
generally 78 
deliberative 121, 122 
hortatory 119, 120 
in prohibitions 126, 129, 130 
in consecutive clauses after tva 185 
in final clauses 184, 198 
in noun clauses after iva ete. 1S6- 
196 
in conditional clauses 241, 244 
in indefinite relative clauses 252 
in indefinite temporal clauses 208, 
209 
in indefinite local clauses 224 
after éws 213, 214 
negative with 267 
Subordinate clauses classified 118 
in dependent statements 156, 157 


Temporal clauses 205-219 
definite 206, 207 
indefinite 206, 208, 209 
introduced by é€ws 211-215 
introduced by rplv 216, 217 
expressed by a participle 218 
expressed by infinitive with article 

219 

Tenses in general 83, 84 
in indicative mood 83-107 
in dependent moods 108-113 
in reported speech 113, 151-157 
in the imperative 125 
in the participle 259-2664 


Vocative case 13 
Voice 79-82 


Wishes 131 


GREEK 


dv, general use of 272-277 
avtés 51, 6 airés 53 
des, Apere followed by Hortatory 
Subjunctive 120 
dxpe-ete. 215 
Bovdecbe followed by Deliberative 
Subjunctive 122 
did with articular Infinitive 228 
édy used for dy in Indefinite Relative 
clauses 252 
éav xal concessive 246 
el in Conditional sentences 236 
el Interrogative 268 
el cal concessive 246 
els with articular Infinitive 202 
éxelvos 52 
év with articular Infinitive 219 
émel, émevd4y causal 225 
ép @ causal 225 
ws 211 
# in comparisons 249 
GéXexs, OéNere followed by Deliberative 
Subjunctive 122 
wa, special chapter on 180-196 
va in commands °183 
in Consecutive clauses 185 
in Final clauses 184, 198 
in Noun clauses 
as subject 186 
as object 188-193 
in apposition 194 
in explanatory clauses 195, 196 
kal el, kal édy concessive 247 


INDEX 


kalmep concessive 246 
pédAw 114 
werd with articular Infinitive 219 
péxpe 215 
by negative 267 
in questions 270 
in Final clauses 198 
in Object clauses 
after verbs of fear and danger 
192 
after verbs meaning to take 
heed 191 
émws in Final clauses 198 
in Object clauses after verbs of 
exhorting 188 
in Object clauses after verbs of 
striving 165 
ért meaning “because” 225 
introducing a dependent state- 
ment 146, 153 
redundant before a direct quota- 
tion or question 158 
ov negative 267 
in questions 269 
od py 123 
ovros 52 
mpiv 216 
mpd with articular Infinitive 219 
rod with Infinitive 174-178 
@s with a causal participle 229 
@s, @omep in comparisons 249 
wore with Indicative 232 
with Infinitive 231 
introducing a principal clause 233 


ST MATTHEW 


1. 21 


Me 6. 50 


wee eeenee 


wet wees 


see eeenes 


tee eenae 


see reeeee 


seer eeeee 


tee eeeeee 


tee eeeeee 


wee eeenee 


oeeeseree 


INDEX OF TEXTS 


189 


124 

42, 173, 202 
62, 219 
110, 125 


Oren eee 


wee ee eens 


ss eeecece 


seer eseee 


wee reaeee 


214 


176 INDEX OF TEXTS 


ST MATTHEW (cont.) +e ae yestraeee x 
; Roti wee 
Be Oeics =e ie meee 114 
DOSEOO Pere eeee 102 
An TOSVBO Sa eeacsats 122 
OY aiier scams 32 
1O¥ SS aes 81 
DY Race, eaene 201 a 
¢ SU CB MRBARR Gus 252 
Pho ew sere 264 
FIR eo FiSeh na 253 
OH Be Mie panacea 81 
07, 8 105 TUR Ofer 88 
Oye ee 94 11Pos ere 195 
eae ene TS CL sas capeice 89, 102 
ST Dd ay eee eee 69 
13 sou ere 123 
DOOM eaeeenese 170 
ie) Jiph 209 
DT AAB geek 97 é 
13,0 eee 128 
DAG eects 265 ll 
ee See 266 det ee et 
98. 13 aes 266 14 31 wee eee eee 123 
ak 14 Oh aera 93, 102 
ST MARK 15 ged een 163 
te Oe acess 20 V5 Giese 89 
i Pe era EOT 185 5532 Oe 19 
‘Til gerne 106 15. 23 90 
RDO eee ee 258 1 160, 167 
13 eben: 110 16 <2 Cie ee 106 
nie encores 254 16520 meesccnae 259 
AD Se acs a ser 54 
PDS Were tices 87 ST LUKE 
OF 1 Soe ee 116 ie Ze ana 66 
OF oat 142 Lagat 179 
DY, UR TB. cause 68 11D Orem ae See 64, 66 
97905 Paes 210 1; 2%, Reese 114, 219 
SRO Maen se iiss 163 Li38 eae 131 
Sool Listens 208 Lao eens 194 
BE ees tere 32 15 Dee ee 90 
PA Hom eens ad 173 162) ee ee 73, 277 
As 2 amnentnet 158 IS76eeee 175 
Ao (eee 249 Ti ee 175, 202 
Zt Hee apes BA Cy, 139 Ard Ole magneton 175 
GN SS Ton eean 143 2D ieee 81 
A'30 saatenece Ss 111 OF Ohi ace 219 
[ea o eeeetes 103 D599 cana 175 
Br OO mmr trees 183 994 aoe 175 
Lief thee. 127 Wh, DAR Se snanesne 114, 217 
Sasol anes 106 Aen tae aac 121 
GA Olea es 213 35 LO gare 66 
6.2 [tere 158 3,00 ae 106 
6 3ee eee 19 fDi a He ee 267 
Cx DOs ee 127 4, 3s 238 
G2 5Ggeee ee 223 45 eee 258 
yak? eee dere 81 AL 1G ace cctee 254 
Sos eee cae 100 43D Secincee 22 
87290 cen 264 Bol ten ee 175, 258 
tee Ie es Soho 186 5 Oe ee 63 
9 220 aae ae 124 Se l0S eee 114 
023 ee ees DRL BRE Ac 105 
OOD Gey ncrsdccee ee Bs Bbw icintteelo 


INDEX OF TEXTS aye 


BOSOM creas oe 199 
ST LUKE (cont.) 2022) eee. 142 
Op Lene Ree ain 277 20226 het cs: 93 
et uOae aten eae 195 C0741 eens 148 
i fsa i TA in 106 D1 AG ees: 178 
Y (ea aoe aa 239 Oe OH ont 114 
Gaon eM oees 173 DOORS I tear. 73 
Be ge. eens 170 22: FiG > Bee 187 
Gayo Tee hone: 100 Oe OR eae be ore 73, 161 
Oreo esteem 40 PCE es eee 73 
Se.dG, seaecaws 150 py te ee See 18 
Os ee ice 127 pT Team peas, ih 
O25 Pees: 245, 284 Zandor ake: 42 
Peele. aa 65 SN 28. ne eeas 127 
GSOF eases 159 Mays BEF a AnAdnOe 54 
QE AGa ee esos: 277 Ono Deen ae 156 
Or bf Mer See 1 D4 5 a: 178 
GY a eles eee 201 a Ee By ee sn eee 106 
LO SD Seseeciest 189 
iO) ae A me 130 ST JOHN 
I 4 inake oo eee 69, 128 i eat Toe ne Sa 52 
(O77 Dee oe ee 13 TO e ieee. 39 
IE) he eee 57 stor ie Oo eee 184, 198 
TORA0) Feo 143 Lia * CREE. 15 
PRED” Beseoses 109, 125 NH ake A ARR 135, 195 
AY 2 NS Oa aie | Pee 148 eRe. ee 251 
Gd AOm eve ccs: 17, 69 TS Ot weed a 162 
INES UE Toaodeea 161 1 55 Oey cee 33 
EES) Bebo nee 67 ae I Ye a se 18 
Ne 2 a ee a 165 ) Gh aa 127 
1D We Rees codeine 210 Pew d0 ie rein sAode 40 
TCS ae eee 130 RD He 2 Se 52 
11g 5 (= a: ea 106 Doe 2 Pee 29 
Ne ese cae 213 SGI) Sescndanee 76 
iG. ec. . 266 a BG rein. .2 232 
Del Oe ee oe. 195 ASO seers -. 239 
eo O ar meets 266 a fh Be ois 3 eee 63 
IGG Be aaaree 93, 106 4290 oe. eee 270 
1G Lye, od ee os 59 A SA meses: 186 
NG sie 2 as ee 95 4 AU SRI is 68, 189 
Grae Sitcee sce 31 2 ET onan 93 
1 ot 7 a Se 130 Oe ee cos 195 
ie, Ale reese ees 177 Dog ee eee, Joe 54 
(ON eel ie a 187 Doel Stee Mahe cs 263 
Wie ee 110 Ea ie ieee 127 
Nate Olmert siatcl 2454 eA Glee rats ciciowse 239 
Te Lome ek sices 13 Te in on eae 194 
Te OH vesea canes 89 5 BY nace 123 
NSE ag os ane 57 (G583 9 see cco 194 
ANS ea dsye eS eae 142 (ae) scape 164 
Gio osadaneee 161 GhiG3E* ee... 251 
Ne ASI ake 88 Os: Oar css 97 
195523 275 UG MS cascrtee 117 
LORONe cemtacpoul mee 7 
iP 


178 


ST JOHN (cont.) 
7. 47 


seeeeeees 
see eeeeos 


eer eeeeee 
eee eceeee 


wee eeeeee 


se ssecees 
ecco rens 
ee ecetees 
see eeeeee 
oes eeeees 


INDEX OF TEXTS 


3. 

149 e 
270 7 
247 > 
245 a . 
196 i 
181, 185 e 
211 : 
158 if 
99, 196 i 
10 . 
86 e 
128 2 
244 . 
153 . 
89 . 
187 . 
190 . 
12 

16, 148 . 
ze 13. 
106 mee 
100 13. 
106 14. 
194 14. 
194 14. 
a 14. 
15. 

7K 15, 
1d. 

63 15. 
123 16. 
267 i. 
186 17. 
40 Pi 
= 17. 
18 

100 . 
70 18. 
18 

138 < 
259 
88 
148 ms 
21, 

42, 219 21 
159 ale 
64 21. 
258 21 
68 21 
2664 22. 
89 23. 
177 ae 


Pie pra d £03 
LY alos ees ae 261 
Ba ce Pee 
Of eS. 277 
OB aiae ats 97 
Eig va aeae 204 
19) See 178 
OG ie eon 90 
5D = eee 105 
60 ieee: 93 
ine ae 219 
11 eee 40 
192 ee 194 
33 ee 150 
31 132, 2450, 278 
33s eke Ne 275 
Sta peae 87 
SOR eee: 100 
Tie one 5 
LG eae 160 
Pe eee 177 
Sens 227 
D0 sae eee 40 
oS eee 248 
BEY eines tiles 264 
So eee 40 
Gietgate 178 
Git eee: 40 
19: See 111 
LO ee 
13} Serer 93 
J) eee 177 
28: eek 169 
PR a wate 111 
Ties os 161 
LS es i 
Pio Biennale 68 
BUS ae te 54 
Si aes 129 
10° oe 176 
24 caters 41 
2 ee 20 
Lo oe: 69 
30 aera’ 99 
Beat or ane 177 
iG fo. ae 57 
LD eee 177 
TG. Niece ee: 67 
28 eee 103 
Gh are anne 161 
38. eee 76 
GSS eer 203 
10. ee . 192 
| Ogee ere 178 


INDEX OF TEXTS 


ACTS (cont.) 


VERDI sie seek 177, 229 
BIESOD Seca: 137 
CBR Clie Seeeenee 95, 113 
Seed Sees 265 
DEAD My kee: 47 
DAE TR cerca 245 a 
Baia eae 172 
SaSVCE NV ee eee 217 
lst TESNs eRe eae 66 
QBS 26 eee cs 161 
2 Go Lgmeeencs 90 
CNG ONS ee ae 275 
A og ea ge 177 
QUI S822 111 
Cail SU a ee 229 
27. 34 7 
Si 2k” ae eae 186 
CLS ee 94 
OOo Tem.bas-'s: 184, 198 
28, lw aes 92 
ROMANS 
OD mere 149 
Pl. boda Oe a 53 
eee ae 86 
He DI Mi Seabees 238 
(lei lee wae cee 31 
ce ieee ae 40 
GRO PS Se cee ce 176 
Gm eee 128 
OS SI fame 67 
Ve meyees a Bee 176 
Qi Om fat. 267 
Set eee. 178 
SEOC ecscc so. 73 
Gy BS tan 27 
©). BPR eeein ae 149 
TL OO! Saeseaerr 42 
LO Oe. eee 137 
Ty Gh | Tease ae 73 
Tha}. KO) aeaatinne 71 
TES A a ae a 170, 195 
ie OY Bee ane 54 
Tele Zar ear wae 38 
i ui epee 54 
Tee creat cone 93 
list, TE eepaeete 111, 266 
i Eb eee 179 
NG Mec ooe sere. 40 
I CORINTHIANS 
Nie ZY pas ane 263 
fl Ta pecan: 138 
Hh dc ain cree 28, 2664 


. 


bo po 


OG bo bh OO OD 


i 


SOOT CUR RR ge pO 


8 


tee eeaeee 


een en nee 


Soncornr iy 


see eecees 


ee ereeens 


wee eeenee 


sete eeees 


see eeeeee 


tte eeweee 


GALATIANS 


AoOrnrnpPwnwwrwwory 


179 


PHILIPPIANS 
pe Ne es rae 107 
Oe Deereeee: 196 
DER LO an vesiaae 95 
DOB  cicveule 95 
eee lesen ee cae 109 
Dom Ole sects nes 175 
Bis Gin cease neem 137 
Bie We ana oan 179 
COLOSSIANS 
2 ee Siar e ane 246 
AG rete tecs 139 
Ae 8 ears eee ees 95 
ARS Gaon eee 190 
I THESSALONIANS 
Ds Nie eee 20 
DA A Se AS 249 
Pel Gates ee... 106 
B03) Bqocencup 195 
Le OS ene are 169 
OMRPA tees eto 65 185 
I TIMOTHY 
Boel bee seea ss 68 
Any Aap east 245 
AeA age wee « 128 
is OW He Nat einen 128 
Goes ove eateaas = 68 
fl TIMOTHY 
ey Ooeccan actives 129 
ie OM Gre ns 2664 
Deli Ds tae gerecace 242 
OF A epee mine 106 
CO Airs 97 
AS) Sereesess 111 
CTR ee Peers 165 
Bal Lew eee 258 
TITUS 
DMD ences 137 
PHILEMON 
LD Se Santesccas 95 
HEBREWS 
Oa Benaeasess 245 
DN Baar Paseo 32 


CAMBRIDGE! PRINTED BY W. LEWIS AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS. 


hoe 


XTS 


Il PETER 
I WU Scerconds SH 
I JOHN 

dee Or eacdsitans 185 
fe OL owen 52 
B Be a Were otis 194 
Sed scams 76 
Bo LS cee 194 
B13) ratte 167 
CE) ces cncans 194 
4G US re eenens 128 
gine er meecte nv ae 119 
41S cesteans 69 
AaB les cannes 194 
Bh: st Beehocccneor 194 

II JOHN 
6. once aA 

Ill JOHN 
A ee ke tees 194 
aa AR rir 264 

REVELATION 
Yael MR se ora 57 
Ore L ancora 210 
QTd Osteen te 186 
G5 210) e shosneae 185 
TA. 1S ei Seana 183 


GTU Library 
2400 Ridge Road 
Berkeley, CA 94709 
For renewals call (510) 649-2500 


All items are subject to recall,” 


/ 


TU Librar 


ing gt 


= oan 00457 


——